Home

AMOS 4.5 Sys Cmd Ref Man

1. You may enter a Control C at any time to prevent further transfers ERRORS Cannot find DSKO SCNWLD SYSL1 43 or MEM SCNWLD SYS The COPY program needs this file to be able to process wildcard symbols in your file specifications This message can indicate that SCNWLD SYS doesn t exist or that you do not have enough memory to Load the file into your memory partition Specification error Your command Line is not in proper format The symbol points to the Location in the command Line that COPY does not understand Cannot READ Devn device does not exist Cannot READ Devn device is not mounted You tried to copy to or from a device that is not Listed in the DEVTBL command in your SYSTEM INI does not have a driver in area 1 61 of the System Disk is not file structured or is not mounted C Devn is the device you specified Changed 30 April 1981 COPY Cont d Page 4 XAccount does not exist p pn The indicated PPN does not exist to create it you must be logged in under 1 21 XNo file oriented device corresponding to Devn is mounted You specified a device but left off the unit number COPY cannot find a logical unit that matches your specification Try mounting the device Missing output specification You omitted the equal sign in your COPY command Line COPY couldn t tell which information was your Newfilespec and which your Otdfilespec More than one output specification
2. A Nu montst FUNCTION Tests a new monitor or system initialization command file by brinaing up the system under the control of the new monitor or command file HINTS RESTRICTIONS Useful for testing the new monitor generated by the MONGEN command Also useful for testing a newly modified system initialization command file IMPORTANT NOTE The system monitor and the system initialization command file you want to test along with the the MONTST command itself must all be located on physical drive zero That is for a CDC Hawk hard disk drive system these programs must be Located on the fixed platter for a floppy disk system these programs must be located on the disk in the System Drive Zero You can also use MONTST with MONGEN to boot up on a floppy drive even if your System Device is a hard disk For example say that you use MONGEN to build a monitor named WNGMON MON that contains the Wangco floppy disk device driver you can use the MONTST command MONTST WNGMON MON SYSTEM INI to boot the system up on the Wangco drive You may only use MONTST if your job is running in the first memory partition of the system Bank Zero for bank switched systems FORMAT _MONTST Monitorspec Command f i Lespec Gen where Monitorspec specifies the monitor you want to test which must be on 0SKO and Command filespec specifies the system initializaton command file you want to use also on DSKN DEFAULTS The defa
3. 2 Type PDLFMT followed by the specification of the file you want to format Then type a RETURN For example 1 October 1979 PDLFMT Cont d Page 2 PDLFMT DSPEC TXT Q PDLFMT assumes an extension of PDL 3 PDLFMT now creates a LST file with the same name as the specification you supplied on the PDLFMT command Line This LST file contains the formatted version of your text file 4 PRINT or TYPE the LST file to see your formatted design document COMMAND SUMMARY Below are the PDLFMT commands you may insert in your text file ALL commands must begin in the first character position on the Line and must start with a slash No line of text that is not a command may begin with a slash ALL PDLFMT commands except R take a text argument T text TITLE Specifies the name of the program design PDLFMT writes this title at the top of every page of your LST file The title command must always be the first command in the file and must always be present S text SECTION NAME Specifies the start of a new section of procedure designs PDLFMT uses this name as a subtitle for every page in that section After this command enter text that describes the section P text PROCEDURE NAME Specifies the start of a procedure design and assigns Procedure Name as the name of that design Any time the Procedure Name occurs as a statement within a procedure design PDLFMT considers that occurrence a reference to the proced
4. HINTS RESTRICTIONS The T80LOD program when contained on a 2716 PROM allows the system to boot off a System Disk on a T80 or T300 hard disk when a hardware reset Occurs that is when you hit the RESET button The program is also in account DSKO C1 4 of the System Disk You may use T80LOD at AMOS command Level to reset the system if your System Device is a T80 or T300 hard disk The memory partition of the job that uses the T80LOD command MUST be in Bank Zero if your system bank switches memory For information on bank switched systems refer to the document Memory Management 0 n DWM 00100 10 in the AM 100 documentation packet meni Option FORMAT T80LoD Y OPERATION 1 Type T8OLOD followed by a RETURN T80LOD Y The system now resets itself by reading a copy of the T80LOD bootstrap program into system memory and executing it 2 Once invoked the T80LOD program reads the operating system Skeleton monitor DSKO SYSTEM MONL1 4 into memory SYSTEM MON then brings up the system under the control of your system initialization command file SYSTEM INI 3 Once the system is up and running you see the AMOS prompt ERRORS T80LOD generates no error messsages However if it cannot find SYSTEM MONC1 4 and SYSTEM INIC1 4 the start up procedure fails 1 October 1979 T80LOD Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Boots the system from a Century Data Trident 180 or T300 hard disk if that disk is the System Device Re
5. 3 Wildcard File Commands APPEND COM DSKFIL ERASE MAKE SIZE TYPE copy PRINT Changed 30 April 1981 DIR LOG PPN ASCDMP CREATE DSKDMP FILCOM PRINT SORT DIR RENAME DIRSEQ LOGOFF SYSACT copy DIR DUMP FILDMP RENAME SRCCOM ERASE Page 6 2 NOTE MOUNT PAUSE PERLOD PU RENAME RUN SKIP SUSPND SYSTAT TIME TRISET T8OLOD WNG210 Those A THE AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE SHEETS 4 Disk and File Copy Commands COPY CPMCPY CPYS00 DSKCPY SYSCPY 5 Special Commands BMVR DSKPAK EMAIL FIXDVR MONGEN MONTST NEWTRM OPR 6 Command File Commands BATCH com EXIT GOTO PAUSE TRACE 7 Text Processing Commands EDIT PDLFMT VUE 8 Language Processer Commands BASIC COMP IL LIB LINK MACRO PC Pcu PL PU RUN 9 Job and Terminal Handling Commands ATTACH BAUD FORCE JOBMEM JOBS KILL LOGOFF REVIVE SET SLEEP WAIT xY Changed 30 April 1981 CPY410 IBMCPY DO FIXMTM MOUNT CONT LOOKUP TXTFMT GLOBAL LISP PCL PRUN SYMBOL DING JOBPRI LOG SEND SUSPND Page 6 3 THE AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE SHEETS Page 6 4 10 Memory Partition Commands bEL JOBMEM LOAD MAP MEMORY RES SAVE SYSMEM 11 Disk Analysis and Certification Commands BADBLK CRT410 DIAG2 DSKANA HASHER LABEL RAZA REDALL RNDRED 12 Memory Diagnostic Commands DIAG3 DIAG4 13 Disk Formatting Programs FMT200 FMT210 FMT400 FMTSOO 14 Magnetic Tape U
6. BITMAP GM The display you see tells you what memory locations have assigned to the disk bitmaps that were defined at the tim system initialization For example BITMAP ED DskO 3 1350 40450 DSKT 3 31350 40450 DSK2 3 31350 40450 DSK3 3 371350 40245 DSK4 3 31350 40450 DSK5 3 1350 4045 rea same been e of Each Line of the BITMAP display gives you the following information Devn Bank Startddress EndAddress where a Devn is the device for which the bitmap is allocated b Bank is the memory bank the bitmap is in if the bitmap IS 3n switchable memory If it is not in switchable memory this item is omitted C StartAddress is the first memory Location used by the bitmap area d EndAddress is the last memory location used by bitmap area Changed 30 April 1981 the Ca BITMAP Cont d Page 3 If bitmap areas are shared between units those devices will have the same StartAddress and EndAddress because the devices share the same area of memory for their bitmaps Note that DSKD DSKS in the sample display above share the same bitmap area as do HWKO HWK1 and STDO STD1 Using BITMAP as a system initialization command 1 Type BITMAP followed by the three character name of the device for which you are defining a bitmap area the size of the bitmap area and the one or more logical units that will be sharing that bitmap area For exemple BITMAP AMS 39 0 1 The
7. P Generate program PRG or 0VR file The default switch Operation switch R Designates a required file The default switch Cancels the L and 0 switches S Generate a symbol table SYM file Operation switch You may specify multiple switches by preceding each switch with a slash OPERATION 1 Enter LINK followed by the specifications of the files you want to Link together Then type a RETURN For example OPTIONS LINK M VISFIL VIS1 UTILIT LIB L Ge changed 30 April 1981 LINK Cont d Page 3 4 ERRORS Notice that the command Line above specifies a library file UTILIT LIB By using the M switch we are also asking LINK for a load map file If you have more file specifications than will fit on one Line end the current command Line with a comma LINK now displays an asterisk and you may continue your List of file specifications You may enter as many Lines of file specifications as you wish as long as you end the preceding command Line with a comma Type just a RETURN at the end of the Last line of filespecs Now LINK displays several messaaes as it process the files The exact messages you see depend on the options you have requested and files you have specified For example Linkage Editor Version 2 0 Processing VISFIL 0BJ Base 0 Size 106 bytes Processing VIST 08J Base 152 Size 657 bytesT Optional and Library Request Processin
8. Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 label FUNCTION The LABEL program allows you to label a disk with descriptive information and to display that information LABEL maintains as part of the Label the date the disk was Last mounted and the date the disk was originally Labeled HINTS RESTRICTIONS Disk labels are stored in block zero of the disk and are used both to allow the operator to easily determine what disk is mounted and to allow programs to verify that the correct disk has been mounted FORMAT LABEL Devn GE where Devn specifies the device which you want to label or for which you want the current label displayed OPERATION 1 Type LABEL followed by the device specification for the disk you wish to label For example LABEL DSK4 GE 2 If the disk you specified is already labeled LABEL will now display the current disk label For example LABEL DSK1 Payroll Data PAYO01 Created on 1 Jan 80 at Computer Makers Inc on System 1 by F Smith O A on system 1 by Fe Smith 3 LABEL now asks for new contents for each of the label fields If you do not wish to change the label type a Control C at this point which returns you to AMOS command level If you do wish to change the Label answer each of the following questions a Volume Name Enter the textual description of the disk This field is used by the operator to determine which disk is mounted The MO
9. SUSPND J085 The job remains suspended until you issue a REVIVE command for that job ERRORS NONEXISTENT_J0B You specified an invalid job name Check your spelling If the job name looks all right use the SYSTAT command to see a list of valid jobs on the system CHARACTERISTICS Returns your terminal to AMOS command level To wake up the job you suspended use the REVIVE command 1 October 1979 symbol FUNCTION Creates a symbol table file for one or more machine Language object files to allow you to reference user defined symbols when you use the symbolic debugging programs DDT or AlphaFIX Also provides several options that let you generate a program file or a load map file HINTS RESTRICTIONS The object files that MACRO the assembler creates contain complete information about the symbols used in your program as well as the actual generated code To make this list of symbols available to the debuaging programs DDT and AlphaFIX you must use the SYMBOL program to generate a symbol table file SYMBOL processes files in the order in which their specifications appear on the command Line You may not soecify an overlay or Library file as the first file on the command Line NOTE You may also use SYMBOL to generate a program file And you may use LINK to produce a symbol table file LINK and SYMBOL can be made to perform exactly the same functions if you use the appropriate option requests SYMBOL supp
10. The first Line of the display above gives the relative address 1 October 1979 FILCOM Cont d Page 2 of the first data mismatch the first byte of the files byte A number zero the specification of the first file CRLF MAC the data in that file at byte number zero 000000 the specification of the second file WRKFIL MAC and the data in that file at byte number zero 000204 ERRORS You may see the usual system error messages when using this command in particular File specification error FILCOM doesn t understand your command line For example FILCOM SUBJCT OBJ P File specification error Check your command line against the FORMAT section above Filespec NOT FOUND FILCOM couldn t find one or both of the files you specified Check your spelling next check your account specifications use the DIR Filespec command to find the location of the files CHARACTERISTICS Compares two files and displays the data mismatches between them Y Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level Displays data in octal form or hexadecimal if SET HEX is in effect M 1 October 1979 fildmp FUNCTION Displays the contents of a sequential file in numeric form HINTS RESTRICTIONS Displays the data in the file in octal form Cor hexadecimal if the SET HEX command is in effect 16 bytes per screen Line FORMAT FILDMP Filespec where Filespec specifies the file whose contents you want to see DE
11. in the system device table Every other device for which the system uses a device driver program and each logical unit of every device must have an entry on the DEVTBL command Line Enter DEVTBL followed by the List of devices you want to define in the system device table Separate the entries with commas For example DEVTBL DSK1 AMSO AMS1 TRM MEM RES MTM The first three letters of each entry identifies the device driver program the system will use to access that device The optional fourth character of each entry identifies the unit number of that device The command Line above identifies a device table for a System Device that contains two logical units DSKO and DSK1 Remember that the system already knows about DSKO We also define a two drive AMSO and AMS1 floppy device that uses the AMS driver We also tell the system that we are going to want to use the MEM driver allowing us to use our memory partition as another device the TRM driver allowing us to use a terminal as a device and the RES driver allowing us to reference system memory as a device All of these devices are sharable that is more than one user can use them at the same time If you want to define any devices that are NOT sharable e g a printer or a paper tape punch the entries for such devices must appear at the end of the DEVTBL command line after a Single stash For example the example above defines a Multiterm printer MTM as a nonsh
12. CHARACTERISTICS PARITY is re entrant reusable and may be loaded into system memory It may only be run with AMOS versions 4 5 and later PARITY is only for use with AM 710 memory boards that are used with 1 AM 100 T CPU or 2 an AM 100 CPU and an AM 120 30 April 1981 FUNCTION pause PAUSE causes a temporary interruption in the processing of the command file in which it appears HINTS RESTRICTIONS PAUSE may appear only in a command file or DO file AMOS stops processing a command file when it reaches the PAUSE statement At that time you may choose whether to return to AMOS command level or to continue execution of the command file When the PAUSE processed PAUSE waits for you to enter a character a command is RETURN tells PAUSE to continue execution of the file any other character tells PAUSE to avort the command file When you return to AMOS command level you may perform a series of actions such as running a program editing a text file using another command file etc To resume executing the command file where it was interrupted use the CONT command at AMOS command level See the CONT reference sheet When you interrupt execution of a command file via the PAUSE command PAUSE stores the remainder of the command file in the disk file CNT CMD This file appears in the account and device you are logged into When you use the CONT command to resume execution of the file CONT loads
13. Changed 30 April 1981 systat FUNCTION Provides information about the jobs running on the system HINTS RESTRICTIONS May be run by any user on the system whether logged in or not The job status codes which appear in the SYSTAT display are as follows TI Terminal Input wait state TO Terminal Output wait state LD Program Load state SL Sleep state DS Disk access in progress 10 1 0 access other than terminal or disk EW External Wait state RN Running SP Suspended state C Control C For more information on job status codes see Chapter 12 System Information Commands in the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 C SYSTAT displays memory addresses in the number base the system is using for your numeric displays usually octal If you wish to see these addresses as hexadecimal numbers make sure that the HEX option is set before using SYSTAT See the SET reference sheet for information on changing the numeric display base FORMAT SYSTAT switch where the optional switch requests a brief status display OPTIONS You may select a brief status display by using the N switch This switch tells SYSTAT to omit the List of devices and blocks free on those devices OPERATION 1 Type SYSTAT followed by a RETURN SYSTAT GED Changed 1 May 1980 SYSTAT Cont d Page 2 The display you see gives this information for each job running on the system 1 the name of the job 2 the terminal to whi
14. Copies an AMOS Version 4 4 System Disk update cartridge onto the first fixed platter of a CDC Phoenix hard disk drive HINTS RESTRICTIONS CPY410 is a command file that certifies DSK1 of a Phoenix drive and then copies the contents of DSK onto DSK1 It destroys all data on DSK1 so make sure you make a back up of everything on DSK1 you want to save before you use CPY410 You usually use it to update your System Disk on the fixed disk by copying the contents of a new System Disk cartridge down onto it NOTE You may only use CPY410 to copy an AMOS Version 4 4 or Later System Disk The SYSTEM command will tell you which version of AMOS you are running under The disk off of which the system is running i e the System Disk is ALWAYS called DSKO When you reset or turn on the system if the cartridge on the system contains account 1 4 and the files SYSTEM MONL1 4 and SYSTEM INIL1 4 then the system uses the cartridge as the System Disk In this case the cartridge is DSKO and the first fixed disk becomes DSK1 If these files do not appear on the cartridge the system tries to boot up off the first fixed disk if it is successful THAT disk becomes DSKO and the cartridge becomes DSKS If the Phoenix disk drive contains a System Disk cartridge when you reset or turn on the system the system boots off that cartridge regardless of whether or not the fixed disk is also a System Disk In this case CPY410 copies the content
15. FILENAME not found An error has occurred within the AlphaMAIL system Refer to the AlphaMAIL User s Manual for instructions CHARACTERISTICS OPR is used by the ALphaMAIL Operator to maintain and manage the Alpha Micro electronic mail system It is ONLY for the use of the authorized AlphaMAIL Operator OPR displays one main menu and five submenus To return to the main menu from any submenu use the Q command To exit to AMOS from any menu use the X command To see the current menu re displayed use the command OPR is re entrant and reusable 30 April 1981 parity FUNCTION Initializes parity error detection for the AM 710 memory board HINTS RESTRICTIONS The AM 710 128K byte memory board has a parity error detection capability which you must enable by using the PARITY command within your system initialization command file For information on the AM 710 memory board see the Alpha Micro Integrated Systems User s Guide DWM 00101 01 This manual tells you how to address your AM 710 memory board and gives bank switching information for the board If you don t use the PARITY command the AM 710 memory boards will not be able to detect and report parity errors Make sure that the memory boards are property jumpered for the 1 0 port addresses you supply to the PARITY command For information on addressing see the Alpha Micro Integrated Systems User s Guide NOTE You will probably want to put PARITY i
16. GLOBAL produces the listing file in the account and device you are logged into The listing file bears a GLB extensions and the name of the first segment specified on the GLOBAL command Line FORMAT GLOBAL switches Filespect Filespec2 FilespecN where switches are optional and affect format of the information in the Listing file Filespec1 FilespecN is a list of OBJ files for which you want a global cross reference If there are too many files to fit on one command line you may end the command line with a comma Then you can resume the command Line on the next Line 1 May 1980 GLOBAL Cont d Page 2 You may enter as many lines of Filespecs as you wish as long as you end each preceding Line with a comma DEFAULTS If you omit portions of a file specification GLOBAL assumes a file extension of 0BJ and the device and account you are logged into OPTIONS You may request the following options by including the appropriate switches on your command line Each switch must begin with a slash Line width options default is 80 characters iW Wide Listing same as w 130 Produces a Listing file that may have up to 130 characters on a Line Win Characters per line where n specifies the number of characters Page Length defauit is 60 n Long listing same as L 80 L n Lines per page where n specifies number of Lines OPERATION 1 Type GLOBAL followed by optional switches Then supply a list of
17. In Command mode VUE allows you to search for specific strings of text perform Local and global replacements move and delete blocks of text and change various editing parameters VUE is re entrant and may be loaded into system memory by the System Operator VUE copies into memory the file you want to edit and makes a backup file by renaming the disk file to a BAK extension When you exit VUE the new edited version of the file goes out to disk under the original name and extension of the file You may edit a file too big to fit into your memory partition A VUE initialization file INI VUE allows you to set your own default editing parameters Refer to the manual AlphaVUE User s Manual DWM 00100 15 Revision B00 for information on using VUE and setting up INI VUE NOTE To exit VUE enter Command mode If you see a screenful of asterisks or if you see your text you are in Screen mode Type an Escape to enter Command mode Now type an F followed by a RETURN to exit and update your file or type a Q followed by a RETURN if you want to exit without updating FORMAT VUE Filespec where Filespec selects the file you want to edit DEFAULTS The defaults VUE uses for example the default file extension are set in the VUE initialization file INI VUE OPERATION 1 Type VUE followed by the specification of the file you want to edit Then type a RETURN For example Changed 1 May 1980 VUE Cont d Page 2 VUE X
18. JANI WALES system commands reference manual N alpha DWM OO10D 49 SOFTWARE MANUAL AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE MANUAL DWM o0100 49 REV A02 alpha Piero AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE MANUAL Page ii NOTE This printing of the manual contains the contents of Change Page Packet 1 for the AMOS System Commands Reference Manual DWM 00100 62 and Change Page Packet 2 for the AMAS System Commands Reference Manual DSS 10000 09 which may be ordered separately from Alpha Micro First printing 1 October 1979 Second printing 1 May 1980 Third printing 30 April 1981 Alpha Micro AMOS ALphaBASIC AM 100 ALphaPASCAL AlphaLISP and AlphaSERV are trademarks of ALPHA MICROSYSTEMS Irvine CA 92714 This document reflects AMOS Versions 4 5 and later 1981 ALPHA MICROSYSTEMS ALPHA MICROSYSTEMS 17881 Sky Park North Irvine CA 92714 C 2MD 4 81 30 April 1981 DSS 10000 09 CHANGE PAGE PACKET 2 FOR THE AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE MANUAL This set of documents is the second update package for the AMOS System Commands Reference Manual DWM 00100 49 Once you incorporate these pages into your copy of the manual your manual will contain information that reflects AMOS Versions 4 5 and Later NOTE Look at the title page of your current manual If it says Revision A01 the manual already contains the contents of the first change pa
19. LOAD PAYROL BAS O 1 October 1979 BASIC Cont d Page 2 I or begin to create a new program 10 PRINT This program computes interest rates 20 INPUT Enter balance BALANCE 2 To run the program that is in memory type RUN followed by a RETURN RUN COMPILE Compile time was 0 05 seconds This program computes interest rates Enter balance 2000 D Runtime was 1 71 seconds READY 3 To exit from BASIC use the BYE command BYE ERRORS You may see any of the standard BASIC error messages For a list of the BASIC messages refer to the back of the ALphaBASIC Users s Manual CHARACTERISTICS Invokes the compiler and runtime package portions of the BASIC Language processor 1 October 1979 batch FUNCTION Loads commands frequently used by command files into your memory partition HINTS RESTRICTIONS A command file executes faster if the programs that it accesses are already loaded into memory BATCH Loads into memory GOTO LOOKUP END TRACE PAUSE and LOAD Using BATCH speeds up the execution of your command file if that file uses those programs Include BATCH at the front of the command file NOTE GOTO END LOOKUP TRACE and PAUSE are re entrant the System Operator may place them into system memory where they can be accessed by all users on the system BATCH takes up about 1K of your memory partition You may want to include a DEL command at the end of a command file that contains the BA
20. NODELETE or NOD Don t copy over to any existing files file switch PACK or P Allow COPY to copy files over to themselves thus packing disk operation switch NOPACK or NOP Don t allow copying files over to themselves default operation switch OPERATION 1 Type COPY followed by the specification you want to assign to the new file Now type an equal sign followed by the specifications that select the files you want to copy For example Changed 30 April 1981 COPY Cont d Page 3 COPY SORT TXT WRK1 TXT GED WRK1 TXT_to SORT TXT Total 1 file transferred 2 Remember that you can use wildcard symbols and that COPY assumes certain Filespec defaults For example COPY DSK1 OLD NEW copies all files with a NEW extension from the account and device you are logged into over to the same account on bSK1 The new files have the same names but have extensions of OLD 3 When you use the Q switch COPY asks for confirmation of each transfer Remember however that the placement of the switch on the command Line can affect which files it affects When COPY prompts you for confirmation answer with a Y for Yes or an N for No Do not type a RETURN after your answer For example COPY SREFILL110 2I WRKFIL QUERY GED WRKFIL BAS to SRCFIL BASC110 23 Y WRKFIL LST to SRCFIL LSTET10 2 v WRKFIL RUN to SRCFIL RUNCT10 2 Y WRKFIL SEQ to SRCFIL SEGLTT0 212N Total of 3 files transferred
21. VERIFICATION ERROR FOR DRIVE n RECORD x If RAZA finds that any of the data it has written does not verify it tells you which drive e g DRIVE 2 holds the bad disk and tells you which record of the disk contains the error e g RECORD 1000 CHARACTERISTICS Destroys any data already on the device Continues until you type a Control C 1 October 1979 redall Noy FUNCTION Performs a disk diagnostic test by reading all or a specified number of the records on a disk and reporting any read errors HINTS RESTRICTIONS REDALL does not harm the data on your disk FORMAT REDALL Devn N where Devn specifies the disk you want to read and N gives the number of disk records you want to read If you omit N REDALL reads all records on the disk OPERATION 1 Type REDALL followed by the specification of the device you want to test and the number of records you want to read DO NOT separate the device specification and N with a space Type a RETURN For example T REDALL DSK1 100 I 2 REDALL now tells you the number of records it is reading If you omit a number after the device specification REDALL reads all records on the disk After it has finished it displays an EXIT message and returns to the monitor level REDALL DSK1 READING 9696 RECORDS EXIT 3 REDALL tells you if any read errors occurred by displaying the appropriate error messages on the screen ERRORS You may see the standard system error messages tha
22. example WT lt Backup Project 100 accounts on DSK1 over to DSK0 COPY DSKO LI DSK1 L100 1 i lt FINISHED Remove backup disk DING 5 ERRORS DING generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS Used within command file to get the attention of the user of the file Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 FUNCTION Produces a directory listing for specific files or accounts HINTS RESTRICTIONS You can use DIR to display the List of all files in a specific account tell you what accounts and devices a particular file appears in find out the complete specification of a file and place a copy of directory Listing into a file DIR MEM Filespec performs same function as MAP Filespec DIR RES performs same function as SYSTEM To use the two formats above the devices MEM and RES must be defined in your system device table E To search for a particular file on all mounted devices and in all accounts use DIR ALL J Filespec If you use DIR to create a file that holds a directory Listing and if you use the DATA option then BASIC can read the file specifications in your file and you can use the file with the OPEN statement To send a directory Listing directly to a printer use TRM xxx as your Listfilespec where xxx is the terminal name associated with the printer Use the WIDE option to fit a Long directory Listing on your terminal display DIR is a wildc
23. COM Reference Sheet CONT Reference Sheet CPY410 Reference Sheet CREATE Reference Sheet CRT410 Reference Sheet DEVTBL Reference Sheet DO Reference Sheet DSKANA Reference Sheet DSKCPY Reference Sheet DUMP Reference Sheet EXIT Reference Sheet FEX Reference Sheet FIXDVR Reference Sheet GLOBAL Reference Sheet GOTO Reference Sheet HASHER Reference Sheet ISMFIX Reference Sheet LABEL Reference Sheet LOAD Reference Sheet LOG Reference Sheet LOOKUP Reference Sheet MACRO Reference Sheet MEMERR Reference Sheet MOUNT Reference Sheet PAUSE Reference Sheet SRCCOM Reference Sheet SYSACT Reference Sheet SYSMEM Reference Sheet SYSTAT Reference Sheet TRACE Reference Sheet TRMDEF Reference Sheet VUE Reference Sheet WNG210 Reference Sheet Page 2 Remove the original pages Those pages for which us c CHANGE PAGE PACKET 41 AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE MANUAL Page 3 For your quick reference The new reference sheets are coc210 HASHER COM ISMFIX CONT LABEL CREATE LOOKUP EXIT MEMERR FIX PAUSE GLOBAL TRACE GOTO WNG210 The revised reference sheets are ATTACH LOAD BADBLK LOG BITMAP MACRO CPY41D MOUNT CRT410 SRCCOM DEVTBL SYSACT DO SYSMEM DSKANA SYSTAT DSKCPY TRMDEF DUMP VUE FIXDVR For a List of the reference sheets grouped by function see Section 6 3 Functional Summary of Commands of the AMOS System Commands Reference Manual NOTE The ISMFIX and MEMERR reference sheets were issued in an inf
24. LSP HLP CMD DO etc FORMAT TYPE Filespec o where Filespec selects the file you want to see DEFAULTS TYPE assumes a file extension of LsT OPERATION 1 Type TYPE followed by the specification of the file you want to display Then type a RETURN For example TYPE PSTINV BAS O You now see the fiie displayed on your terminal screen ERRORS 2Cannot OPEN Filespec file not found TYPE wasn t able to find the file you specified Check your spelling Cannot INIT Filespec device does not exist TYPE cannot find the device you specified in your filespec Use the SYSTAT command to see if the device is a valid mounted system device 1 October 1979 TYPE Cont d Page 2 Cannot OPEN Filespec disk not mounted The system can t access the device specified by your filespec use the MOUNT command to mount the disk Cannot OPEN Filespec file type mismatch You tried to display the contents of a random file You will have to use another method to display the contents of that file File specification error spe TYPE did not understand the format of your command Line Check your spelling and retype Cannot_OPEN Filespec illegal user code You ve specified an account that does not exist Check your typing If that s OK check to see that you are trying to access the proper device CHARACTERISTICS Assumes that the specified file contains data in ASCII form You
25. Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Page A 4 THE ASCII CHARACTER SET p q r s t u v W x y t H Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Opening Brace Vertical Line Closing Brace Tilde Delete Page A 5
26. Others can bring other users on your system to a halt or must only be used under certain conditions Refer to the reference sheet for a particular command for more information on that command 2 1 1 Commands that May Only Be Used From the First Memory Partition The job that uses these commands must be running in the first memory partition on the system Bank Zero for bank switched systems j coc210 HWKLOD ICMLOD MONTST PERLOD SMDLOD TRILOD T80LOD WNGLOD WNG210 2 1 2 Commands that Destroy Disk Contents CPY410 CPY500 CRT410 DSKCPY RAZA SYSCPY SYSACT Initialize option NOTE The disk diagnostic commands DIAG2 RNDRED and REDALL do not harm the data on your disk 2 1 3 Commands Only For the Use of the System Operator You must be logged into the System Operator s account 1 2 to run these commands DSKANA SYSACT Changed 30 April 1981 INTRODUCTION TO AMOS COMMANDS 2 1 4 Access Limitations Page 2 3 These commands may only be used when no other job is running on the System cpy500 FMT200 FMT210 FMT4OO FMT500 DSKCPY Cin fast Hawk mode These commands may only be used when no disk controller CPY410 CRT410 These commands may only be used when no disk s other user is accessing the other user is accessing the DIRSEQ MOUNT DSKPAK COPY P SYSACT SYSCPY DSKCPY Cin all modes but Hawk fast copy affected affected Note also that never more than one user may access the same file at the same ti
27. The first Line tells us about the first job on the system 1 it s named JOB1 2 it is attached to terminal TERM1 3 it is logged into account DSK4 310 2 4 its Job Control Block appears at memory address 23056 5 it is in a RUN state 6 it is running the SYSTAT program and 7 it has 50176 bytes of memory in its partition which starts at memory address 35400 in Bank Zero Note that JOB2 and JOB3 both have memory partitions that start at the same address this is because the system represented above is a bank switched system Both jobs memory partitions start at the same address but in different memory banks We also see that devices DSKO through DSK5 are mounted Devices AMSO and AMS1 are not mounted Changed 1 May 1980 system FUNCTION As part of the system initialization command file SYSTEM tells the operating system what programs to include in system memory At AMOS command level SYSTEM tells you what programs currently reside in system memory HINTS RESTRICTIONS The SYSTEM command performs an important part of the system initialization process by allowing you to add programs to the monitor at the time of system start up In addition to that function a SYSTEM command without a file specification MUST appear within the SYSTEM INI to tell the system to close out the monitor expansion process that takes place at system start up See the document The System Initialization Command File in the AMOS Software U
28. This program is only for use by qualified maintenance personnel The AM 120 board is shipped from the factory fully calibrated Normally you will not need to re calibrate the time of day clock You will only need to use this program if the time of day clock oscillator is out of calibration when you initially install the AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board in the system or during subsequent maintenance Requires the use of a high precision counter for the calibration procedure CAL120 calibrates the first AM 120 board it finds in the system After you have completed the calibration procedure you should reset the AM 120 clock catendar by using the TIME and DATE commands See U the DATE and TIME reference sheets for information on using those programs with the AM 120 CAL120 is both re entrant and re usable For further information on calibrating the AM 120 see the document Installation Instructions AM 120 PDI 00120 XX FORMAT CAL120 GED OPERATION 1 After you have installed the AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board in your system you may calibrate it by entering CAL12N followed by a RETURN CAL120 GED 2 Now adjust the trimmer capacitor to exactly 1024 Hz at the calibration test point 3 When you have completed the calibration procedure type a Control C to exit CAL120 30 April 1981 CAL120 Cont d Page 2 ERRORS You may see the following error message when using CAL120 Unable to
29. You may not supply more than one Newfilespec Files may not be transferred to RES You may only add programs to system memory by using the SYSTEM command within your system initializaton command file SYSTEM INI XRandom files can not be transferred to MEM You may only put sequential files in your memory partition Not copied Destination file already exists You tried to copy to an existing file while the NODELETE option was in effect You are not logged in under 1 21 can t create p pnJ You cannot copy from an account to a nonexistent account unless you are Logged in under 1 2 If you copy to a nonexistent account while logged under 1 2 COPY will create the account with the same password as the account copied from 0utput MFD is fult The Master File Directory only has room for 64 entries The transfer in progress would have created a new account but there is no room in the MFD Device full There is no more room on the disk Bypassing BADBLK SYSC1 27 BADBLK SYS exists to prevent bad blocks on a device from being allocated and should never be directly accessed XNo files transferred You tried to copy the file BAOBLK SYS 1 2 which must never be altered moved or destroyed Changed 30 April 1981 COPY Cont d Page 5 ker CHARACTERISTICS Because it is a wildcard file command COPY has advanced wildcarding abilities You can use COPY to back up or pack entire disks
30. You must be logged into the System Operator s account or use DATE from within the system initialization command file to request date rollover at midnight available only if your system contains an AM 120 board or to select European date format DATE allows you to set and display the system date in either American or European format A date in American format looks Like this January 1 1982 a date in European format looks Like this 1 January 1982 Certain functions e g day of the week automatic date rollover require that your system contain an AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board The optional feature that tells DATE to automatically rollover the date at midnight requires approximately 350 extra bytes of system memory Sets the date for the AlphaAccounting package DATE is not re entrant but is re usable Changed 30 April 1981 DATE Cont d Page 2 FORMAT DATE E or DATE MM DD YY EN or DATE DD MW YYL E or DATEC EC RY The first format displays the current system date if it has been previously set You may use DATE in this format when you are logged into any account The second and third formats set the system date where MM is month DD is day and YY is year and E is an optional switch that tells DATE to use European format If your system contains an AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board these formats also allow you to set the AM 120 calendar You must be logged into 1 27 to us
31. an equal sign and one or more specifications separated by commas of the files whose contents you want to merge Now type a RETURN For example APPEND ASMBLR MAC PARSE MAC SCAN MAC TABLE MAC CNVRT MAC When APPEND has written the combined contents of the old files into the new file you see the AMOS prompt symbol If you type APPEND ASMBLR MAC PARSE SCAN TABLE CNVRT APPEND will assume the default extension of MAC for each of the files PARSE SCAN TABLE and CNVRT because that is the extension of the new file ASMBLR If you type APPEND ASMBLR PARSE SCAN TABLE CNVRT APPEND will assume that the extension of the file ASMBLER is a null extension ASMBLR or an extension having no characters Then APPEND will also assume by default that the extensions of PARSE SCAN TABLE and CNVRT will also be null extensions If you type APPEND EXAMPL TXT INTRO SAMPL1 BAS SAMPL2 CLOSE TXT RET APPEND will create the new file EXAMPL TXT to include INTRO TXT the extension is assumed to be the same as that of the new file specification SAMPLE1 BAS SAMPL2 BAS the extension is assumed to be the same as that of the previous old file specification SAMPL1 BAS and CLOSE TXT Command error APPEND did not recognize the characters on the command line as being in valid command format For example APPEND VIEW BAS Try again making sure that you have remembered to type an equal sign and new and old file specificat
32. and 8 RETURN For example WAIT J083 2 When the specified job finishes its current task you see the AMOS prompt Your job now proceeds ERRORS WAIT displays no error messages CHARACTERISTICS Delays the execution of any program by your job until the specified job has finished its current task Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 wnglod FUNCTION Bootstrap loader program for a s ystem that uses the Wangco floppy disk as the System Device HINTS RESTRICTIONS The WNGLOD program when contained on a 2716 PROM allows the system to boot off a System Disk on a Wangco floppy disk when a hardware reset occurs that is when you hit the RESET button The program is also in account DSKO 1 4 of the System Disk You may use WNGLOD at AMOS command level to reset the system if your System Device is a Wangco floppy disk drive The memory partition of the job that uses the WNGLOD command MUST be in Bank Zero if your system bank switches memory For information on bank switched systems refer to the document Memory Management Option DWM 00100 10 in the AM 100 documentation packet You may use WNGLOD either to boot from an AMS or STD format diskette FORMAT WNGLOD Y OPERATION 1 Type WNGLOD followed by a RETURN MNGLOD O The system now resets itself by reading a copy of the WNGLOD bootstrap program into system memory and executing it 2 Once invoked the WNGLOD program reads th
33. and on LIB MACRO LINK and SYMBOL see the AMOS Assembly Language Programmer s Manual DWM 00100 43 FORMAT LIBC L output input 1 input2 inputN Em or LIBC L inoutf input2 inputN where output selects the name of the library file you want to build and input specifies the object files that will make up the Library The second format is equivalent to LIB inout inout input inputN However if you specify the L switch the second format is equivalent to LIB L TRM inout input1 inDutN 30 April 1981 LIB Cont d Page 2 The input specifications may take the following forms filespec filespec item1 filespec item1 item2 itemN filespec item1 item2 itemN where the symbol designates an exception and the parentheses designate a group of files For more information on the use of these symbols see the section OPERATION below If you want to specify more files than will fit on one command Line you may continue the command Line by ending the current line with a comma LIB will now display an asterisk and you may continue entering filespecs You may enter as many Lines of file specifications as you wish as Long as the preceding Line ends with a comma DEFAULTS LIB assumes an extension of LIB for the output file and a 0BJ extension for the input files If you do not include an account and device specification LIB Looks for the files specified in the account and de
34. but briefly bank switching memory allows you to access more than 64K of memory on your system although each individual user is still Limited to a maximum of 64K NOTE The first 16k of memory cannot be allocated to the bank switchable system area it is reserved for the monitor Second 16K of memory 40000 77776 octal or 4000 7FFE hex Third 16K of memory 100000 137776 octal or 8000 BFFE Chex Fourth 16K of memory minus last 256 bytes for the 1 0 ports 140000 177376 octal or COOO FEFE hex IMPORTANT NOTE You may not allocate to switchable system memory the last 256 bytes of the 64K address space That means that the highest memory address you can allocate is 177376 The memory addresses 177400 177777 are reserved by the system for the 1 0 ports You may enter more than one SYSMEM command in the SYSTEM INI if you want to allocate more than one area of system switchable memory FORMAT SYSMEM or SYSMEM Bank H StartAddress EndAddress Changed 30 April 1981 SYSMEM Cont d Page 2 Use the first format to find out what memory is allocated to the system area Use SYSMEM in the second format in SYSTEM INI to allocate memory to the system area where Bank The number of the memory bank containing the memory being allocated to the system area StartAddress The beginning address of the memory block being allocated to the system area EndAddress The ending address of the memory block being allocated to
35. checks to see if the file is already in memory If it is DDT deletes it and replaces it with a fresh copy 2 Now DDT looks in the account in which your file resides for a symbol table file for that program If such a file exists DOT Loads it into memory enabling you to reference memory addresses in symbolic rather than numeric form 3 Next DOT displays the base memory address and the size in bytes of the program For example PROGRAM BASE IS 56670 P A I 4 Now you can begin to enter DDT commands Most entries to DOT consist of a numeric or symbolic argument followed by a DDT command These commands are usually one or two symbols such as a slash or an Escape followed by a character e g 8 To modify the contents of a location you must first use a command that opens it DDT operates im several modes 1 program relative mode 2 absolute mode and 3 register mode The default mode is program relative mode This mode assumes that addresses are relative to the base address of the program you are debugging Changed 30 April 1981 DOT Cont d Page 3 Absolute mode assumes that ali addresses are absolute memory addresses Enter absolute mode by typina a TAB leave this mode by use the R command Register mode assumes that expressions refer to the registers instead of memory locations Enter reaister mode by using any of the special symbols that represent the registers RO R5 SP or PC Any of th
36. includina providina a battery supported calendar and clock which maintain and update the date and time even when your system is not on For information on the AM 120 see the document Software Instatlation Instructions for the AM 120 You may only set the system time and reset the AM 120 time if you are logaed into the System Operator s account 1 2 From within the system initialization command file TIME allows you to set the system time automatically from the AM 120 clock calendar TIME is not re entrant but is re usable FORMAT TIME GE TIME HH MM SSCAMCPMD GED or or TIME where HH is hours MM is minutes and SS is seconds You may optionally enter AM or PM if you do not use military i e 24 hour format You may use the first format when logged into any account This format displays the time if it is set You may only use the second format if you are logged into the System Operator s account 1 2 or if you are using TIME in response to a K command that appears before the final SYSTEM commmand in your system initialization command file This format sets the system time and optionally resets the time on the AM 120 board Changed 30 April 1981 TIME Cont d Page 2 Use the third format from within the system initialization command file to set the system time from the AM 12N Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board DEFAULTS If you have entered the time in military form TIME sets the display to A
37. te This means that an alternate track table has assigned to Changed 1 May 1980 been assigned Certain disk devices such as the Phoenix use an alternate track table to handle media flaws This means that a non sharable device is currently being used by the specified job The devices defined in the display above are Logical devices zero through five of the System Device DSKO DSK1 DSK2 DSK3 DSK4 and DSKS where the System Device is a Phoenix disk drive Logical devices HWKO and HWK1 where a HAWK drive is on the system the MEM device that allows you to use your memory partition much as if it were an ordinary device MEMO the RES device RESO that allows you to refer to system memory e g DIR RES the TRM driver TRMO that allows you to use terminals as devices e g COPY TRM TEXT LST a printer MTMO that requires its own special device driver program and SNDO representing a printer or any other nonsharable device that is currently being used by a particular job J DEVTBL Cont d Page 3 Using DEVTBL as a system initialization command 1 To define a system device table or to add items to the device table edit the system initialization command file SYSTEM INI with one of the text editors Place the DEVTBL command line directly after the terminal definition TRMDEF commands The system already knows about device DSKO the device off of which the system booted so do not include DSK
38. the AMOS commands so that if you are not familiar with the name of a specific command but know its function you will be able to find it 6 2 ALPHABETIC SUMMARY OF AMOS COMMANDS Below is an alphabetic List of all AMOS commands APPEND ASCDMP ATTACH BADBLK BASIC BATCH BAUD BITMAP BMVR CAL120 coc210 CLKFRQ com COMPIL CONT COPY CPMCPY CPMDIR CPY410 cPY500 CREATE CRT410 DATE DDT DEL DEVTBL DIAG2 DIAG3 DIAG4 DING DIR DIRSEQ do DSKANA DSKCPY DSKDDT DSKDMP DSKFIL DSKPAK DUMP DYSTAT EDIT EMAIL ERASE EXIT FILCOM FILDMP FILTAP FIX FIXDVR FIXMTM FMT 200 FMT210 FMT400 FMT500 FORCE GLOBAL GOTO HASHER HEDLOD HELP HWKLOD IBMCPY IBMDIR ICMLOD ISMBLD ISMCOM ISMDMP ISMFIX JOBMEM JOBPRI JOBS Ki C LIB LABEL LINK LISP LOAD LOG LOGOFF LOOKUP MACRO MAKE MAP MEMDEF Changed 30 April 1981 THE AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE SHEETS MEMERR NEWTRM PC PPN QDT RES SAVE SLEEP SYMBOL SYSTEM TRACE TRMDEF U xY MEMORY OPR PCL PRINT QUEUE REVIVE SEND SMDLOD SYSACT TAPE TRIDDT TXTFMT VUE MONGEN PARITY PCU PL RAZA REWIND SET SORT SYSCPY TAPFIL TRIINI TYPE WAIT 6 3 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY OF COMMANDS Below is a functional summary of all AMOS commands that perform several functions appear under more than one heading MONTST PASS PDLFMT PRUN REDALL RNDRED SIZE SRCCOM SYSMEM TAPDIR TRILOD T8OINI WNGLOD system commands 1 Disk Directory and Account Commands CPMDIR IBMDIR PASS 2 File Commands
39. the Filespecs that specify the segments for which you want a global ross reference Type a RETURN For example GLOBAL W L MAIN SUB1 SUB2 2 If you have more file specifications than will fit on one command Line end the Line with a comma GLOBAL now prompts you with an asterisk GLOBAL MAIN SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 Enter the next Line of file specifications You may enter as many lines as you want as long as all preceding Lines end with a comma 3 GLOBAL reads each file you specify and builds a table of global symbols in memory As it works GLOBAL tells you which file it is processing For example 1 May 1980 GLOBAL Cont d Page 3 ERRORS PROCESSING MAIN OBJ PROCESSING SUBT 0BJ PROCESSING SUB2 08J After processing all files GLOBAL creates a disk file that contains the global cross reference As it works GLOBAL displays the name of the file it is building and prints a dot each time it outputs a disk block For example BUILDING MAIN GLB This file has the same name as the first segment you specified to the GLOBAL command and a GLB extension When GLOBAL is finished it prints the following and returns you to AMOS command level GLOBAL FILE FINISHED Here is a portion of what a GLOBAL Listing file might look like TYPE MAIN GLB Global Cross Reference Version 1 0 MSS AUU 188 ALPHA TE BETA I E ZETA IO The listing file above tells us 1 the symbol ALPHA appeared in an
40. the wildcard symbol in this file specification F TXT creates a specification that selects all TXT files whose names begin with F regardless of the rest of the file name Changed 30 April 1981 INTRODUCTION TO THE MANUAL Page 1 4 NOTE The use of wildcard symbols varies among commands Some commands do not recognize wildcards others the witdcard file commands handle wildcards differently than do the rest of the commands on the system Refer to the reference sheet for a particular command to see how it handles wildcards SWITCH OR OPTION Several AMOS commands and programs allow you to select among several options by including switches on a command line A switch is a stash followed by one or more characters You can sometimes include several switches on one command Line The specific form that switches take varies dependina on the particular command Some commands expect every single character after a slash to represent a different switch e g MAP FSR others require that each switch begin with a new slash e 9 PRINT NET BAS COPIES 2 BANNER HEADER Refer to the reference Sheet for a particular command to see the switches for that command WILDCARD FILE COMMAND SWITCHES Wildcard file commands make a distinction between two types of switches file switches and operation switches If a file switch is placed directly after a file specification it affects only that file For example ERASE MNT
41. they have much more powerful abilities to process file specifications than other commands on the system it s important that you be aware of how they handle file specifications before you begin to use them extensively They do not follow the standard system rules for specification defaults and wildcards If you are not yet familiar with wildcard file commands read Section 9 1 Introduction to Wildcard File Commands in the AMOS User s Guide Changed 30 April 1981 CHAPTER 3 FILE SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 INTRODUCTION Most AMOS commands require that you supply one or more file specifications on a command Line The file specification identifies a file to AMOS and takes this form Devn Filename Extension p pn where Devn Three letters and a number that select a logical unit of a physical device This specification tells AMOS the device the specified file resides on The device specification and the filename are separated by a colon Devn usually identifies a disk e g DSKO the System Disk but can identify a magnetic tape unit e g MTU7 or a special device such as system memory RES Several commands also recognize a different type of device called an ersatz device Ersatz devices identify specific accounts on the System Disk For example the ersatz device BAS identifies the System BASIC Language Library account DSKO 7 6 For more information on ersatz devices refer to Section 9 1 5 Ersatz Devices in t
42. to you Within this section you can also see paragraphs marked NOTE or IMPORTANT NOTE These subsections contain special warnings They also highlight important information such as definitions of terms used in the text An IMPORTANT NOTE can advise you of potentially dangerous situations that can result from improper use Of the command For example some commands may not be used while other users are accessing the same disk Important warnings usually also appear under the CHARACTERISTICS section near the end of the reference sheet DEFAULTS as needed Every command has a set of file specificaton defaults The particular defaults used by a command depend upon that command If the defaults differ from the standard system defaults we List them here OPTIONS as needed Options are available with most commands you may select the options by including switches on the command line This section describes the options available with the command FORMAT The first Line of this section is always a sample command Line For example COMMAND FilespecH Switcht Suitchd y COMMAND is the AMOS command being discussed In the example above Filespec is the specification of the file you want the command to act upon and Switch is a switch that selects a command option The FORMAT section shows the syntax of the command j e how to enter the command Line correctly Notice that all command Lines begin with the AMOS prompt a
43. Cannot READ Devn disk not mounted The device specified by Devn is not present in the DEVTBL command of the SYSTEM INI does not have a driver in area 1 6 of the System Disk is not file structured or is not mounted XNo file oriented device corresponding to Devn is mounted You specified a device but did not include a unit number RENAME is not able to find a Logical unit that matches your specification Check your spelling XAccount does not exist Lp pn3 The indicated PPN does not exist to create it you must use SYSACT More than one output specification You can t rename a file to two names use only one Newfilespec 3Device or p pnJ specifications on output are illegal Your Oldfilespecs and Newfilespec must contain the same PPN and device specifications Missing output specification You must give an output specification so that RENAME knows what to use as the neu names for your files XNo files renamed RENAME couldn t find any files that matched your Oldfilespecs or wasn t able to carry out the renaming procedure because of an error 2Cannot RENAME Oldfilespec file already exists You tried to rename a file but a file of that name already exists If you want RENAME to delete existing files when it renames use the D option CHARACTERISTICS You can only rename files within the same account 1 October 1979 RENAME Cont d Page 4 RENAME is a wildcard file command It rec
44. Documentation Archives 1 ARCHIVOT ERRORS Nonexistent device You tried to mount a disk that AMOS cannot access the device is not defined in the DEVTBL command of your SYSTEM INI is not file structured or does not have a driver program in area 1 6 of your System Disk No disk currently mounted You tried to unmount a disk that is not currently mounted Check your spelling to make sure that you specified the correct logical unit 2Device not ready The specified device is not ready Try again when the device has been fully cycled up If you wish MOUNT to wait until the device is ready use the W switch WARNING BADBLK SYS has a bad hash total When reading in the alternate track information for a device that uses alternate tracks MOUNT discovered that the BADBLK SYS file had been damaged and did not have the correct hash total Check with the System Operator for instructions CHARACTERISTICS Allows you to mount and unmount disks Also displays a list of all mounted disks If a disk contains a Label MOUNT displays part of the Label when it mounts that disk Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level Changed 1 May 1980 newtrm FUNCTION Creates a standard terminal driver HINTS RESTRICTIONS Because of the large number of terminals available for use with the Alpha Micro Operating System it is no longer possible to provide a separate driver program for each kind of terminal Alpha Micr
45. FILE SPECIFICATION DEFAULTS AND WILDCARD SYMBOLS 4 1 DEFAULTS l le lerRe 1 r6 rre RR 4 1 1 Standard System Defaults 4 2 WILDCARD SYMBOLS e 4 2 1 Standard System Wildcard Symbols CHAPTER 5 REFERENCE SHEET FORMAT 5 1 INTRODUCTION uennonnnnnunnnnnunnnnnnnnenunnne 5 2 REFERENCE SHEET SUBHEADINGS CHAPTER 6 THE AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE SHEETS 6 1 INTRODUCTION II 6 2 ALPHABETIC SUMMARY OF AMOS COMMANDS T 6 3 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY OF COMMANDS 6 4 THE COMMAND REFERENCE SHEETS APPENDIX A THE ASCII CHARACTER SET PPP Changed 30 April 1981 Page y c CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO THE MANUAL 1 1 PREFACE The purpose of this manual is to help the experienced AMOS user gain quick access to information on every command on the system This manual does not give you the information you need to operate the system It does serve as a quick reference manual for those occasions when you need to jog your memory by glancing at the format of a specific command In writing these reference sheets we ve assumed that you are already quite familiar with the AMOS commands If this is not the case do NOT attempt to use the system without reading the AMOS User s Guide and the AMOS Software Update Documentation Packet If you find yourself confused about the use of a particular command refer to the AMOS User s Guide and the AMOS Software Update Documentation
46. For a list of valid system devices type DEVTBL followed by a RETURN CHARACTERISTICS Requires that IMG be a valid system device and that IMG DVR 1 6 exist on your System Disk Uses IBM 3740 diskettes that contain 80 byte records Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 icmioci FUNCTION Bootstrap toader program for a system that uses the Pertec Icom floppy disk as the System Device HINTS RESTRICTIONS The ICMLOD program when contained on a 2716 PROM allows the system to boot off a System Disk on an Icom floppy disk when a hardware reset occurs that is when you hit the RESET button The program is also in account DSK0 1 4 of the System Disk You may use ICMLOD at AMOS command Level to reset the system if your System Device is an Icom floppy disk drive The memory partition of the job that uses the ICMLOD command MUST be in Bank Zero if your System bank switches memory For information on bank switched systems refer to the document Memory Management Option DWM 00100 10 in the AM 100 documentation packet FORMAT ICMLOD I OPERATION Type ICMLOD followed by a RETURN 1CMLOD D The system now resets itself by reading a copy of the ICMLOD bootstrap program into system memory and executing it 2 Once invoked the ICMLOD program reads the operating system skeleton monitor DSKO SYSTEM MONL1 41 into memory SYSTEM MON then brings up the System under the control of
47. For more information on modifying TRISET MAC and setting up your system initialization command file to handle a mix of Century Data drives refer to the document Installation and Operating Instructions for the AM 400 System that accompanies your AM 400 Hard Disk Interface The portion of code that you must modify is titled Configuration Table Each Line in the table below defines a type of Century Data Trident drive being used on the system The first four entries represent the four drive types in the example above The high byte of the last word in each entry represents the physical drive number of the device For example the last word of the fourth entry is 1400 If you translate this number into binary the top byte the top eight bits represents the number 3 The fourth entry then defines the drive physically addressed as drive 3 on the system A sample configuration table in TRISET MAC CONFIGURATION TABLE FOR EIGHT DEVICES DRIVES 0 7 THE SIXTH WORD IN EACH ENTRY IS THE SECTOR PER TRACK CONSTANT USE 26 FOR T25 T50 T200 DRIVES i USE 40 FOR T80 AND T300 DRIVES 7 THE LAST WORD IN EACH ENTRY IS THE DRIVE NUMBER HIGH BYTE CHGTBL WORD 0 0 0 0 400 40 400 0 Drive O WORD 0 0 0 0 400 26 400 400 Drive 1 WORD 0 0 0 0 400 26 400 1000 Drive 2 WORD 0 0 0 0 400 40 400 1400 Drive 3 WORD 0 0 0 0 400 26 400 2000 Drive 4 WORD 0 0 0 0 400 26 400 2400 Drive 5 WORD 0 0 0 0 400 26 400 3000 5
48. INTERN statement in the file MAIN and in an EXTERN statement in file SUBI 2 the symbol BETA appeared in an INTERN statement in MAIN and in an EXTERN statment in SUB2 3 the symbol ZETA appeared in an INTERN statement in MAIN and in an OVRLAY statement in SUBI Undefined switch x Ignored You specified an invalid switch The only switches GLOBAL recognizes are the L or W switches 1 May 1980 GLOBAL Cont d Page 4 CHARACTERISTICS Assumes a file specification extension of 0BJ Produces a listing file with the same name as the first file specified in the command tine and an extension of GLB Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 May 1980 FUNCTION Allows transfer of control within a command file HINTS RESTRICTIONS Used in combination with the LOOKUP and EXIT command file commands GOTO allows you to set up conditional transfers within a command file based on whether or not a specified file exists See the LOOKUP and EXIT reference sheets You may only use GOTO within a command or DO file For more information on branching within a command file see New Features of Command Files and DO _ Files DWM 00100 63 in the User s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet GOTOs must precede the labels they branch to that is GOTO statements may only transfer forward in the command file FORMAT GOTO Argument comment where Argument is the name of the label that s
49. Packet for examples of command use These documents also contain general system information For detailed information on the system Language and text processors refer to the specific manuals for those processors The new AMOS user may want to refer to the manual Introduction to AMOS which contains general background information on the AMOS system and on computer terms and concepts Changed 30 April 1981 INTRODUCTION TO THE MANUAL Page 1 2 1 2 CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL To make our examples concise and easy to understand we ve adopted a number of graphics conventions throughout our manuals PPN Devn Filespec default o A Project programmer number This number identifies a user account e g 100 21 We also represent an account number as p pn A device specification This symbol represents a logical unit of a physical device Such a specification usually refers to a disk but can represent any valid system device e g a magnetic tape drive or a printer for which a special driver program is required A file specification Such a specification identifies a file It usually has these elements Devn Fi Lename Extension p pn Information assumed by the system if you omit necessary data For example if you omit an account specification from a file specification most AMOS commands assume that you want to access a file in the account you are logged into In this case your own account is th
50. Several system commands require that you have both MEM and RES defined in your SYSTEM INI as devices As a user command at AMOS command Level DEVTBL lists the devices C defined on the system telis whether the devices are sharable or nonsharable and tells you if alternate track tables are assigned for those devices FORMAT DEVTBL To find out what devices are defined on the system or DEVTBL Devni Devn2 DevnN to define the system device table in the system initialization command file where Devn is the one or more devices you want to incorporate device drivers for in the System monitor OPERATION 1 Type DEVTBL followed by a RETURN Using DEVTBL as a user command at AMOS command level DEVTBL GED Changed 1 May 1980 DEVTBL Cont d Page 2 The display you see tells you what devices have been defined on the system where sharabl alterna For example DSKO sharable alternate DSK1 sharable alternate DSK2 sharable alternate DSK5 sharable alternate DSK4 _ sharable alternate sharable alternate HWKO sharable HWK1 sharable MEM sharable RES sharable TRMO sharable MTM SNDO__ Assigned to J083 e This means that the device was defined as sharable e g the device can be accessed by more than one user at a time for example a disk Nonsharable devices are those devices that only one user can access at a time such as a printer
51. Such a program creates account 1 2 on the disk to be certified and writes a List of the bad blocks or tracks into the file BADBLK SYS 1 21 See the CRT410 reference sheet for an example of a certification program The output from BADBLK will vary slightly depending on whether the particular BADBLK SYS in question is block or track oriented BADBLK allows you to see the contents of BADBLK SYS 1 2 BADBLK also verifies the BADBLK SYS 1 21 hash total A hash total is a computed value based on the contents of a file It serves as a validity check on the data in the file FORMAT BADBLK Devn where Devn specifies the logical unit that contains the BADBLK SYS 1 21 file you want to display OPERATION 1 Type BADBLK followed by the specification of the logical unit whose BADBLK SYS file you want to see Then type a RETURN For example BADBLK SMDS Gen 2 BADBLK searches for the BADBLK SYS file in account DSKO on the specified device If it finds it it tells you so For example BADBLK SMD4 GEN SMb4 BADBLK SYS 1 21 3 Next it tells you the serial number associated with that device and the number of blocks or tracks marked as bad on that disk For example Changed 1 May 1980 BADBLK Cont d Page 2 Serial number INVENTORY2 Number of bad blocks 3 Serial number BACKUPA Number of bad tracks 3 4 If there are any blocks or tracks listed in the BADBLK SYS file BADBLK Lists them for you
52. TXTFMT tells you as it begins to process each file TXTFMT HEADER MEMO GED Processing HEADER TXT Processing MEMO TXT 3 When TXTFMT has finished formatting all specified you see the AMOS prompt the files you 4 To see your formatted file you can either print it using the PRINT command or display it on the monitor screen via the TYPE command Both PRINT and TYPE use the default file extension of LST COMMAND SUMMARY Below is a list of some of the TXTFMT commands for a full list refer to the TXTFMT User s manual LINESIZE n Sets width of text Line BREAK Start new Line PAGESIZE n Set of Lines per page INDENT n Indent Line MARGIN n Set margin JUSTIFY Right justify CENTER text Center text line PAGE Begin new page TITLE text Set page header PAGE n Tf not n Lines on NUMBER n Set page number page begin new page FORMAT Format text LIST Begin List UNFORMAT bo not format text LE A List element PARAGRAPH Start new paragraph END LIST End the list CHAPTER Start new chapter INDEX Mark as index entry Other commands allow you to set the page number Roman numeral lower Roman numeral upper Chapter oriented absolute etc for the top or bottom of the page You may also create a table of contents appendices an index with entries and sub entries double indents nested Lists whose elements are numbered with letters Roman numerais etc You can also reset page numbers header levels and app
53. The command line LIB NEWLIB MATH CBINADR SMLLNUM BINWRT tells LIB to process the library NEWLI8 and to add the object file MATH but to delete the object files BINADR SMLLNUM and BINWRT 3 When replacing an existing module in a library do not just add a new version of the module without first deleting the original module of the same name Doing so can cause problems because both versions will still be in the Library The recommended procedure is to first delete the module and then to add the new version of the module For example to replace the object file KEYSUB LIB MACLIB KEYSUB KEYSUB ED The command line above first deletes the existing module from the library and replaces it with the new one ERRORS You may see the following error messages when using LIB Command error CIs did not understand your command Line For example you entered LIB followed by a RETURN Undefined switch X ignored where X Ts the switch you specified LIB only recognizes one option switch L Make sure that you did not accidently type a when you meant to type a backslash 08J files are not Libraries they cannot be restricted by a modifier You may only use the V file restrictor and the O file inclusion symbols if you are modifying a Library Listing aborted LIB was not able to finish the Library Listing For example an error occurred while LIB was trying to access a file The following module was not found xxx Yo
54. The purpose of the TRISET command is to tell the Century Data Formatter the specific mix of drives that it is handling You must run TRISET each time you reset or turn on the system You can do this from AMOS command Level or you may include TRISET in your system initialization command file after the SYSTEM commands Reference each type of drive in the DEVTBL and BITMAP commands with a different three letter code For example the commands below set up a system that contains a T 300 DSKO DSK18 the system Device a T 25 TRA5 TRA9 a T 50 TRB10 TRB14 and a T 80 TRC15 TRC19 DEVTBL DSK DSK1 DSK2 DSK3 DSK4 DSKS DSK6 DSK7 DEVTBL DSK8 DSK9 DSK10 DSK11 DSK12 DSK13 DSK14 DEVTBL DSK15 DSK16 DSK17 DSK18 BITMAP DSK 1630 0 1 2 3 18 BITMAP TRA 562 5 6 7 8 9 BITMAP TR8 1022 10 11 12 13 14 BITMAP TRC 1534 15 16 17 18 19 Remember to rename the drivers in account DSK0 1 6J for the Century Data drives to the three letter names by which you referenced those drives in the DEVTBL and BITMAP commands For example in the sample commands above we reference the T 50 drive as device TRB Rename the T 50 driver DSKO TRITSO DVRC1 6 to DSKO TRB DVRC1 6 Before using TRISET you may have to modify the source program TRISET MAC to reflect the mix of drives on your system if that program is not already correctly set up TRISET MAC is located in account DSK0 10 2 1 October 1979 TRISET Cont d Page 2 NOTE
55. Y DIAG3 now asks you for the starting and ending addresses of the test area Then it repeats them back to you or if you replied to its questions with carriage returns it displays the default addresses it is going to use DIAGZ I Starting address 2000 9 Ending address 3000 Starting address 2001 Ending address 3000 At the end of each pass DIAG3 prints the number of the pass and the number of errors that have occurred For example END OF PASS 1 ERROR COUNT IS O 1 October 1979 DIAG3 Cont d Page 2 2 To interrupt the test and start it over type a Control C hold down the CONTROL key while you type aC To end the test reset the machine ERRORS DIAG3 Lists the memory addresses where it finds errors It also tells you the data that is in those addresses and the data that was supposed to be there For example END OF PASS 3 ERROR COUNT IS 1 ERROR AT ADDRESS 137776 WAS 005420 SHOULD BE 0054211 CHARACTERISTICS You may only end DIAG3 by resetting the system DIAGS can test memory Locations outside of your memory partition from the Location of DIAG3 itself up to the last contiguous memory address 1 October 1979 diag4 FUNCTION Performs a thorough test of your memory partition by writing data patterns into memory and then reading and verifying those patterns HINTS RESTRICTIONS In addition to the normal memory testing procedure DIAG4 performs a leak down test on dynamic
56. a RETURN after the current prompt symbol For example OPR gt Invalid entry try again The Directory maintenance portion of OPR did not recognize your entry For example you entered just a RETURN when OPR asked you for some information You must enter less than 20 characters You are trying to define a new user account or to modify an existing one but you entered a user ID of more than 20 characters You will have to shorten the user ID to 20 characters or less You must enter exactly 3 digits You are trying to define a new user account but the box number you entered was not three numeric digits Try again This mail box already exists try again Each user mail box on your system must have a unique number Pick another three digit number and try again USERNAME is already in the list Each user in the Directory must have a unique user 1D Pick another name and try again USERNAME not found You tried to modify an account for a nonexistent user Check the User Directory for the List of all users 30 April 1981 OPR Cont d Page 4 User Directory not found No User Directory yet exists You will need to build one Check Chapter 4 of the AlphaMAIL User s Manual for instructions on building a User Directory If you know that a User Directory does already exist then an error has occurred in the AlphaMAIL system Refer to the AlphaMAIL User s Manual troubleshooting section for instructions
57. an existina file thus deleting it default file switch NODELETE or NOD Don t copy over to an existing file file switch OPERATION 1 Type TAPFIL followed by the optional output specification Then type an equal sign followed by any input specifications Type a RETURN The output specification assigns the specifications of the new files you are creating the input specification selects the files to be copied For example to copy all PRG files from the tape that were originally backed up from account 110 2 on DSK2 over to your current account DSK3 110 51 enter TAPFIL DSK3 110 57 0SK2 PRGC110 27 RET Now TAPFIL asks you for the specification of the maanetic tape drive that holds the tape reel you want to read Enter tape unit number TAPFIL assumes a default device code of MTU So to read the tape in the magnetic tape drive MTU1 you may either enter 1 or MTUT 2 Remember that you may specify wildcard file specifications to TAPFIL as in the input specification PRG above 30 April 1981 TAPFIL Cont d Page 3 3 Use the QUERY switch to ask for confirmation before each transfer Enter a Y for Yes or an N for No after each TAPFIL prompt Do not type a RETURN after your answer For example suppose you are Logged into DSK2 and you are copying files from the magnetic tape drive MTUO TAPFIL 0LOLT 0SK3 MACL 10 1 QUERY BET Enter tape unit number 0 Ev MTUO 0SKS NEW MACL10 31
58. and echoes as an XXX followed by a tab Both input and output expressions may be either in symbolic or numeric form ALL numeric input is ALWAYS in octal Use the SET HEX command at AMOS command level if you want to see data displayed in hexadecimal form You may reference local symbols First open the location of the non local symbol that occurs before the local symbol you want to reference Then reference the Local symbol DDT allows you to single step through an assembly Language program you have previously assembled using MACRO If you want to enter symbolic input e g labels you must create a symbol table file for your assembled program using the SYMBOL program before you use DDT See the MACRO and SYMBOL reference sheets For information on using DDT MACRO SYMBOL LIB GLOBAL and LINK refer to the AMOS Assembly Language Programmer s Reference Manual DWM 00100 43 Chapter 13 of that manual contains DDT operating instructions Changed 30 Aprit 1981 DOT Cont d Page 2 FORMAT DDT Filespec Ger where Filespec selects the file that contains the program you want to debug DEFAULTS If you do not specify a file extension DDT assumes that the file is a PRG file The default DDT mode is program relative mode OPERATION 1 Type DDT followed by the specification of the file you want to debug For example DOT DSKO CREATEL100 2 DDT loads the file into your memory partition but first it
59. assembly switch to specify a value on the MACRO command Line but something was wrong with the format of the option request for example the value after the V switch was missing or was incorrect Cannot OPEN Devn invalid file name There is something wrong with the format of your command Line For example you may have tried to use an assembly switch but forgot to place it at the end of the file specification ALL switches must appear at the end of the command Line file specification error There is something wrong with the format of your command Line For example you typed MACRO followed by a RETURN MACn OVR not found where n is a number from O to 5 MACRO cannot find one of the overlays that are a part of MACRO Make sure that the specified file is in 0SK0 01 4 If the file is not there contact the System Operator Copy file filespec not found Where filespec is the file specification you supplied to the COPY pseudo opcode For information on copy files see the AMOS Y Assembly Language Programmer s Manual Expression stack error This Ts an internal MACRO error You should never see it but if you do check your source program to see if you made any errors in specifying expressions NO ENDM STATEMENT ou left off the final statement ENOM in a macro definition Check your source program CSYNC ERROR MACRO generates a Listing file by reading the source file and the object file and synchronizing
60. bit errors When you use MEMERR single bit errors are still corrected but the system halts if a double bit error occurs At the time of a system halt if MEMERR is in effect Look at the Piiceon memory board If the error Light a red LED is Lit the halt was the result of a double bit memory error You will probably want to put MEMERR into your system initialization command file although you may use it at AMOS command level Edit the file DSKO SYSTEM INIC1 4 with one of the system text editors VUE or EDIT Place the MEMERR command after the TRMDEF commands NOTE MEMERR was designed to be used with the AM 100 T CPU If you want to use your Piiceon 32K word memory boards as 64K byte memory boards i e you want to use the AM 100 CPU you may do so by selecting a different error interrupt enable jumper jumper 54 is the AM 100 T interrupt Line and enabling that Line on the AM 100 CPU board FORMAT MEMERR 1 0 Port where 1 0 Port selects the port you have assigned to the memory board error register This 1 0 port is usually set to 250 octal or AB hex MEMERR Cont d OPERATION 1 gt 3 ERRORS Page 2 Use one of the system text editors to edit the SYSTEM INI Place the MEMERR command after the TRMDEF statements For example T JOBS J0B1 J082 SPOOL TRMDEF TRM1 AM300 1 ADM3 100 100 200 TRMDEF TRM2 AM300 3 SOROC 100 100 100 MEMERR 250 If the system halts look at the error light on th
61. commands to tell the system to include programs within system memory Use one SYSTEM command for each program Follow the SYSTEM command with the file specification of the program you want to include For example SYSTEM RUN PRG Any program that you include in the system monitor in this way must be reentrant 2 Place any SYSTEM commands after the TRMDEF BITMAP and DEVTBL commands 3 Whether or not you use SYSTEM to include programs in the monitor area of memory you MUST use a sinale SYSTEM command without a file specification after all commands that expand the monitor size including any other SYSTEM commands that include a file specification For example QUEUE 10 SYSTEM RUN PRG SYSTEM BASIC PRG SYSTEM Changed 30 Aprit 1981 SYSTEM Cont d Page 3 ERRORS No error messages CHARACTERISTICS Serves both as a system initialization command and as a user command MUST appear within the SYSTEM INI to tell the system to close out the monitor expansion that occurs at system start up Changed 30 April 1987 tapdir FUNCTION Allows you to display a List of the files on a magnetic tape reel Also allows you to create a disk file containing the tape directory HINTS RESTRICTIONS Used in combination with FILTAP to write disk files to magnetic tape and TAPFIL to copy files from tape to disk For more information on these programs see The Magnetic Tape File Backup Programs in the System Operator s Info
62. files and lists the differences between them HINTS RESTRICTIONS Useful for distinguishing between two versions of the same program so that you can determine what changes have been made FORMAT SRCCOM Listfilespec Oldfilespec Newfilespect Switch RET where Oldfilespec and Newfilespec select the files that you want to compare and Listfilespec is the file that SRCCOM will create to hold the comparison You may choose one of two switches see OPTIONS DEFAULTS SRCCOM assumes a file extension of MAC for Oldfilespec and Newfilespec and LST for the Listfilespec Listfilespec may be omitted in which case the listing wi l be displayed on the terminal i e the default Listfilespec is TRM OPTIONS You may choose one of the two options below by ending the SRCCOM command Line with a slash and the appropriate switch Q Quick Listing The comparison listing is in the same format as the standard listing but SRCCOM Lists only the differences between the two files B Brief listing The comparison listing is in the same format as the Quick listing but all line numbers are omitted OPERATION 1 Type SRCCOM followed by the specification of the file you want to create to hold the file comparison Now type an equal sign followed by the specifications separated by a comma of the two files you want to compare If you want to ask for a B or option enter it here Type a RETURN For example SRCCOM CMPA
63. following errors when using DSKCPY Invalid switch please use one or more of the following 7H generate a hash code for the copied disk 70 use old slow copy method for the AM 500 You specified a switch on the command Line other than 0 or H Enter the command line again Driver not found DSKCPY couldn t find the device driver program for the specified non DSK device That means that the driver was not in Changed 30 April 1981 OSKCPY Cont d Page 5 system memory user memory or 0SK0 1 63 Check with the System Operator Input and output devices must be the same You entered device specifications in which the three character device code was different For example you tried to copy HWK1 to AMS1 Remember that you may only copy between devices that use the same device driver program that is devices that have the same device codes 20isk size not defined in table DSKCPY doesn t know the number of disk blocks per disk for the devices you are trying to copy between This means that you are copying between devices that DSKCPY doesn t know about Check with the System Operator for help Verification error at block nnn After DSKCPY copied the data in the specified disk block it was not able to verify the data on the output disk This means that the data changed between the time it was read on the source disk and the time it was read on the output disk Try using DSKCPY again If you see this
64. from the compiled code This reduces the total size of your compiled program but prevents compite or run time error messages from reporting the number of the program line where the error occurred The M switch causes COMPIL to verify that each variable in your program is mapped If COMPIL encounters an unmapped variable an error message is displayed Type COMPIL followed by the specification of the file you want to compile Then type RETURN For example COMPIL PROJCT BAS ser COMPIL now displays messages followina the command Line that indicate the status of the program compilation For example Phase 1 Initial work memory is 2310 bytes Phase 2 Adjust object file and process errors Illegal MAP level 350 MAP FILL 7 5 2 Syntax error 980 BALANCE BALANCE INTEREST Memory usage Total work space 4712 bytes Label symbol tree 322 bytes Variable symbol tree 86 bytes Data statement pool 0 bytes Variable Indexing area 27 bytes Compiler work stack 140 bytes Excess available memory 11918 bytes End of compilation When COMPIL finishes and if it found no errors there were two in the example above it produces a file containing a compiled program This file has the same name as the file you specified on the COMPIL command Line but it has a RUN extension To execute this file use the BASIC runtime package via the RUN command You may see the standard BASIC error messages For a List of the
65. if you are logged in as System Operator changed 30 April 1981 cpmcpy FUNCTION Transfers a copy of a file from a floppy diskette created under the C PM operating system to an AMOS file structured device HINTS RESTRICTIONS CPMCPY assumes that the data in the C PM file is in ASCII or binary form it does no translation of the data CPMCPY assumes that the C PM diskette is mounted on C PM device B i e AMOS device IMG1 C PM device A is AMOS device IMGO You must have a copy of the IMG DVR in area 1 6 of your System Disk You must have the IMG device defined in your system device table see the DEVTBL reference sheet If you are using an AMS device you should not copy between floppy devices that are attached to the same floppy controller The extension you provide in your C PM file specification must be three characters This means that if the C PM extension is only two characters you must enter a space as the third character If the extension is a null extension you must enter three spaces for the extension FORMAT CPMCPY AMOSfilespec CPMfilespect B Y where AMOSfilespec is the Filespec you want to assign to the file copy e g DSK1 CBIOS CPML110 3 and CPMfilespec gives the C PM specification of the file you want to copy e g A CBIOS ASM B is an optional switch that tells CPMCPY that the data in the file is in binary form not ASCII DEFAULTS If you do not specify an extension for the
66. in index h IDX freecount Number of free Logical index blocks i Records allocated Number of data records used j Top dir blk pointer Block pointer to beginning of top index block The rest of the display contains debugging information about the structure of the index file This information is mostly Of use to the experienced programmer who understands the internal workings of ISAM ERRORS No records dumped You tried to dump data from an empty ISAM data file Cannot RENAME Filespec file not found ISMDMP could not find the ISAM file you specified Check your device and account specifications CHARACTERISTICS The default extension of the ISAM file whose data you want to dump is IDX The default extension of the file that will hold the contents of the ISAM data file is SEQ You can only dump data to a sequential file Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 ismfix FUNCTION Rebuilds ISAM files to recover lost indices HINTS RESTRICTIONS ISMBLD Version 4 2 contained a bug that under certain circumstances resulted in indices being hidden in an ISAM index file ISMFIX rebuilds ISAM files processed by 4 2 ISAM and thus recovers any hidden indices You must run ISMFIX on all ISAM files processed by 4 2 ISAM Using ISMFIX does no harm if you run it on a file in which indices have not been Lost Also rebuilding a file that has already been rebuilt does not harm that file I
67. information on DUMP see The DUMP Program DWM 00100 24 in the User s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet FORMAT There are six different formats for the DUMP command 1 To display memory DUMP Address Address RET where Address is the first address of the memory block you want to display and Address2 is the last 2 To display a file DUMP Filespec E where Filespec is a valid file specification of a random or a sequential file 3 To display a disk block DUMP BLOCK Block number1 Block number2 Devn GED where Block number1 is the number of the block you want to see and Devn is the specification of the logical unit that contains the block If you omit the device specification DUMP assumes the device you are logged into Changed 1 May 1980 DUMP Cont d DEFAULTS Page 2 You may optionally supply a second block number If you give two block numbers DUMP displays the data from the first to the second block inclusive To display a disk bitmap DUMP BITMAP Devn GE where Devn is the specification of the logicat unit whose bitmap you want to see If you omit the device specification DUMP assumes the device you are logged into To display the disk Master File Directory DUMP MFD Devn E where Devn is the specification of the logical unit whose MFD you want to see If you omit the device specification DUMP assumes the device you are
68. is BAS If you enter LOAD BAS NEM RET LOAD will try to load in the file NEW BAS The ersatz device default extensions are Ersatz Device Extension BAS BAS BOX BOX CMD CMD DVR DVR HLP HLP LIB PRG LSP LSP MAC MAC OPR PRG PAS PAS SYS PRG vuo VUO c Changed 30 April 1981 LOAD Cont d Page 2 FORMAT LOAD Filespec where Filespec selects the disk file you want to load OPERATION 1 Type LOAD followed by the specification of the file you want to load into your memory partition then type a RETURN For example LOAD DSKO ISAM PRGL1 41 2 LOAD does not tell you what file it has loaded into memory You will know that it was unsuccessful if it displays this message Filespec NOT FOUND where Filespec was the specification you supplied To see a List of the memory modules in your partition use the MAP command See the MAP reference sheet ERRORS Filespec NOT FOUND LOAD was not able to find the file you specified Check your spelling and your device and account specification 2Cannot READ Filespec device does not exist eee 7 device Goes not exist LOAD did not recognize the device you specified Use the DEVTBL command to see if the device exists Then make sure the device is mounted CHARACTERISTICS You may use LOAD to load itself into memory Does not understand wildcard symbols Changed 30 April 1981 log FUNCTION Logs you into an account so that y
69. it with COMPIL 3 Is it a PAS file Uf yes compile it with PRUN CMPILR 4 Is it a TXT file If yes format it with TXTFMT OPERATION 1 At AMOS command tevet type COM followed by the specification of the file you want to process then type a RETURN For example COM SPRAD GEN COM searches for the file in the Order listed above in the DEFAULTS section If the file is found COM processes it with the appropriate processer based on the file s extension Changed 30 April 1981 com Cont d Page 2 ERRORS If COM cannot find the file or if the file does not have one of the extensions listed above in the DEFAULTS section COM displays the message Filename is not a compilable file where Filename is the file you specified on the COM command line If you use COM in a command file if COM cannot find the file you specified the command file aborts operation CHARACTERISTICS Processes a file with the proper processor the selection of the processor is based on the file s extension COM is a DO file in DSK0 2 21 When specifying the file to be processed you may not specify an extension The file must appear in the account you are Logged into If you omit the device specification COM assumes the device you are logged into Changed 30 April 1981 compil FUNCTION Compiles BASIC programs HINTS RESTRICTIONS Invokes the compiler portion of the BASIC Language processor The Program you compile is a program yo
70. logged into To display a user s disk directory DUMP DIRECTORY p pnJ Devn GD or DUMP DIRECTORY Block number Devn GE where Devn is the specification of the logical unit that contains the user s directory you want to see p pn is the PPN associated with the user s directory and Block number is the starting block number of the user s directory If you omit the device specification DUMP assumes the device you are logged into DUMP assumes the device and PPN you are currentiy logged into It also assumes a file extension of PRG OPERATION 1 Type DUMP followed by the keyword and arguments required by your particular application of the DUMP command See FORMAT above Then type a RETURN For example DUMP BLOCK 16407 DSKO GD To freeze a DUMP display type a Control S to resume it type a Control Q To interrupt a display type a Control C Changed 1 May 1980 DUMP Cont d Page 3 NOTE DUMP uses several different formats for its displays depending on the kind of data it is displaying The bitmap MFD and User s File Directory displays have their own format ALt other displays show the data in both numeric and ASCII form The most common type of display takes the form of the example below where the numeric form of the data appears on the left of the display and the character form of the data i e as ASCII characters appears on the right DUMP DSK1 DUMP TXT Block number 12033
71. made do not affect your current table of contents Now insert and replace sheets as described in the next section List of Change Pages CHANGE PAGE PACKET 1 AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE MANUAL 3 6 LIST OF CHANGE PAGES Below is the List of change pages in this packet listed below and replace them with the revised pages no Originals exist are to be inserted into the manual in proper alphabetical order these are new reference sheets for AMOS Version 4 4 Replace Original Page Titie page Page 1 1 1 2 Pages 6 1 through 6 5 ATTACH Reference Sheet BADBLK Reference Sheet BITMAP Reference Sheet CPY410 Reference Sheet CRT410 Reference Sheet DEVTBL Reference Sheet DO Reference Sheet DSKANA Reference Sheet DSKCPY Reference Sheet DUMP Reference Sheet FEXDVR Reference Sheet LOAD Reference Sheet LOG Reference Sheet MACRO Reference Sheet MOUNT Reference Sheet SRCCOM Reference Sheet SYSACT Reference Sheet SYSMEM Reference Sheet SYSTAT Reference Sheet TRMDEF Reference Sheet VUE Reference Sheet with with with with with with new new new with new with with with with with with new new with new new new new new with with new with new with new with with with with new with with new Revised Pages Title page Page 1 1 1 2 Pages 6 1 through 6 5 ATTACH Reference Sheet BADBLK Reference Sheet BITMAP Reference Sheet CDC210 Reference Sheet
72. may not use TYPE to display a random file Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 FUNCTION t80ini Performs initialization for Century Data T80 and T300 hard disks HINTS RESTRICTIONS If you are using models T80 or T300 of the Century Data Trident series of hard disks as peripheral disk drives that is you are not using these drives as your System Device you must use the T8DINI command every time you turn on or reset the system to initialize the Century Data 1150A Formatter If you do not use the T80INI command the disk drive will not be able to achieve READY status i e a SYSTAT command shows the drive to be NOT READY discussion of the the documentation working with the FORMAT T80INI Q OPERATION 1 Type T80INI followed by a RETURN T80INI The TBO0INI command initializes the 1150A formatter 2 T8 INI returns a numeric code that identifies the status of the formatter The message takes this form STATUS n where n is a 16 bit status code For a formatter status codes refer to accompanying the 1150A formatter ERRORS T80INI generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS Communicates with a Century Data 1150A formatter AM 400 Trident Hard Disk Interface Returns your terminal to AMOS command level E 1 October 1979 t80locd FUNCTION Bootstrap loader program for a system that uses the Century Data Trident 780 or T300 hard disk as the System Device
73. must configure it to reflect the particular 1 0 controller and 1 0 port on which you are going to run the Multiterm printer You must be Logged into account DSK0 1 61 to use FIXMTM NOTE When you are using MTM DVRL1 61 no other device may use the AM 300 interface controller That means that no terminals or printers may run on the AM 300 that the Multiterm is connected to when you are printing on the Multiterm FORMAT FIXMTM D OPERATION 1 Log into account DSKO 1 6J LOG DSK0 1 6 2 2 Enter FIXMTM followed by a RETURN FIXMTM 2 3 If the MTM driver exists in DSK0 1 6 you now see a message that tells you how the MTM driver is currently configured that is what 1 0 interface and what port of that interface board the driver is set up to use The interface board and port number will vary depending on your particular system but you might see a message something Like this CURRENT DRIVER IS SET UP FOR AM 300 ON OCTAL PORT 375 ENTER TO CHANGE IT OR L TO LEAVE IT ALONE Enter a C or ant 1 October 1979 FIXMTM Cont d Page 2 4 If you tell FIXMTM to leave the MTM driver alone FIXMTM returns your terminal to AMOS command level Otherwise you see ENTER P FOR 3P S S FOR SIO OR A FOR AM 300 INTERFACE Enter a P S or A to select the specific 1 0 interface controller to which your Multiterm printer is going to be connected 5 You now see a message asking you for the number of port i
74. needs a bitmap size of 606 words to keep track of 9696 disk records A single density floppy disk in AMS format needs a much smaller bitmap 39 since such a disk contains only 616 disk records The FIXDVR program witl tell you the bitmap size you need for any floppy disk device To find out the bitmap size required for a hard disk drive refer to the documentetion accompanying that device You may also define the bitmap to be in switchable system memory via the S option By placina the bitmap in switchable system memory you reduce the total resident monitor size To use the S option your system initialization command file SYSTEM INI must define switchable system memory via the SYSMEM command See the SYSMEM reference sheet FORMAT BITMAP to find out what areas of memory are used by the disk bitmaps or BITMAP Dev Size Unit1 Unit2 UnitN S Changed 30 April 1981 BITMAP Cont d Page 2 to define the disk bitmap areas from within the system initialization command file where Dev specifies the device type for example DSK AMS HWK etc size is a decimal number that defines the size Cin words of the bitmap area you want to reserve and unit specifies the number of the Logical unit that will be usina the bitmap a More than one logical unit of the same device may share the bitmap area OPERATION Using BITMAP as a user command at AMOS command Level 1 Type BITMAP followed by a RETURN
75. not exist GOTO NOFILE File doesn t exist give user option to create E COMPIL MAIN BAS RUN MAIN RUN EXIT Returning you to AMOS command level OFILE i lt If you want to create MAIN BAS type a RETURN gt PAUSE otherwise type any other character TRACE ON VUE MAIN BAS Y ERRORS PAUSE displays no error messages However you can see the message XSupersedes existing file if the following sequence of events occur 1 You use a command file which contaims a PAUSE command that interrupts execution of the file You then return to AMOS command level PAUSE writes the remainder of the command file into the disk file CNT CMD 2 You then invoke another command file which also interrupts execution because of a PAUSE command However you have not yet typed a CONT to resume execution of the first command file PAUSE writes the remainder of the second file into CNT CMD thus overwriting the contents of first command file 1 May 1980 PAUSE Cont d Page 3 If a command file is pending execution that is if CNT CMD exists in the account when another command file uses PAUSE to interrupt execution PAUSE tells you so by displaying the above message This message does not indicate an error but warns you that you cannot resume execution of the first command file because CNT CMD now contains another command file CHARACTERISTICS Used only in a command file or DO file Causes temporary interruption of command fil
76. number base that the system is currently using for your numeric displays enter record numbers in that same base See the SET reference sheet for information on changing the display base NOTE You may freeze the display by typing a Control S and resume it by typing a Control Q To interrupt the display type a Control C FORMAT DSKDMP Devn Record I where Devn is the logical unit that contains the data you want to display Record is the number of the physical disk record you want to see DEFAULTS If you do not supply a device specification DSKDMP uses the disk you are currently logged into OPERATION 1 Type DSKDMP followed by a device specification and a disk record number then type a RETURN For example DSKDMP DSK1 202 9 nu DSKDMP displays the entire record in the number base that the system is currently using for your displays usually octal base 8 with a message that tells you which record you are seeing fach Line of the display groups data into eight groups of 16 bits DSKoMP 3063 I RECORD 3063 003101 052057 046124 042040 045523 046504 020120 041450 067157 023564 024544 005015 066057 033040 005015 052506 1 October 1979 DSKDMP Cont d Page 2 ERRORS Cannot READ illegal block number You gave DSKDMP a record number that does not exist For example DSKDMP 3333333 I RECORD 1333333 2Cannot READ illegal block number You may also see some of the stand
77. on the diskette make sure that you have a valid copy of the image driver in area 1 6 of your System Disk IBMDIR assumes that the diskette is mounted on device IMG1 IMG must be a defined device on your system For information on defining devices refer to the DEVTBL reference sheet IBMDIR reads IBM 3740 diskettes that contain 80 byte records FORMAT 18MDAR 2 OPERATION 1 Type IBMDIR followed by a RETURN Ka 2 IBMDIR 2 IBMDIR displays the directory of the IBM diskette mounted in IMG1 For example 18M 3740 Diskette Directory Filename start end used AT 7 2 11 ORDER78 8 00 11 13 922 Below are the elements of the directory display a Filename The name of the IBM file IBM users will recognize this as the dataset name b Start The starting address of the file on the diskette The first file DATAO9 starts at track 2 sector 0 c End The address of the last sector of the file The ending address of DATAO9 is track 7 sector 26 C 1 October 1979 IBMDIR Cont d Page 2 d Used The last disk address of the file that contains valid data In the case of DATAO9 the last sector of the file that contains valid data is sector 2 track 11 ERRORS You can see several of the standard system error messages that result from invalid device specifications For example Cannot READ IMG1 device does not exist You must define IMG as a system device Make sure that IMG DVR 1 6 exists on your System Disk
78. or DSK0 f1 63 Check with the System Operator for help Disk size not defined in table HASHER doesn t know the number of disk blocks per disk for the devices you are trying to copy between This means that you are using a device that HASHER doesn t know about Check with the System Operator for help There are also several AM 500 hard disk controller hard error messages that it is possible but extremely unlikely that you would ever see If any of these do occur please contact Alpha Micro Sector not found during disk hash drive N block X where drive N is a decimal number and block X is an octal or hexadecimal number This can only happen when you are using the fast copy mode of DSKCPY or HASHER on a Hawk hard disk system The Changed 30 April 1981 HASHER Cont d Page 4 contents of a disk sector have become unformatted Verify if there is a problem by using REDALL to diagnose the disk and report any read errors See the REDALL reference sheet for more information about disk diagnostic tests CRC error during disk hash drive N block X where drive N Ts a decimal number and block X is an octal or hexadecimai number This can only happen when you are using the fast copy mode of DSKCPY or HASHER on a Hawk hard disk system The Cyclic Redundancy Check device on the AM 500 board has detected a problem in data transmission First verify if there is a problem by using REDALL to diagnose the disk and report any read e
79. program that certifies disks im devices that run under control of the AM 410 the file contains a list of all bad blocks or tracks on the certified disk If BADBLK SYS was written by a 4 4 Release or later version of CRT410 DSKANA ignores the BADBLK SYS data If BADBLK SYS was written by a pre 4 4 version of CRT410 DSKANA checks the BADBLK SYS file before proceedina with the disk analysis If the hash total for BADBLK SYSC1 2 is bad DSKANA tells you so BADBLK SYS contains a bad hash code You then know that the original certification was not allowed to finish or that the data in BADBLK SYS has become damaged Although DSKANA continues with the disk analysis if BADBLK SYS has a bad hash total you should copy all files off the disk and then re certify it since DSKANA is using information in BADBLK SYS that is of doubtful integrity For more information on disk certification see the reference Sheets for BADBLK and CRT410 Changed 30 April 1981 DSKANA Cont d Page 2 If you are using the L switch and if the the BADBLK SYS hash total is OK DSKANA now prints the numbers of any bad blocks For example j fbad disk blocks 3 2036 2041 2042 FORMAT DSKANA Filespec Devn switch GED where the optional Filespec selects a DSKANA output file Devn selects the device that contains the disk you want to analyze the optional switch selects either the E errors only or L full Listing options OPTIONS The L
80. reference sheet with HASHER reference sheet new LIB reference sheet LINK reference sheet with LINK reference sheet LOAD reference sheet with LOAD reference sheet MACRO reference sheet with MACRO reference sheet MONTST reference sheet with MONTST reference sheet CHANGE PAGE PACKET 2 AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE MANUAL Page 3 ka new NEWTRM reference sheet new OPR reference sheet new PARITY reference sheet Delete PASCAL reference sheet new PC reference sheet new PCL reference sheet new PCU reference sheet new PL reference sheet PRINT reference sheet with PRINT reference sheet new PRUN reference sheet new PU reference sheet SET reference sheet with SET reference sheet SYMBOL reference sheet with SYMBOL reference sheet SYSMEM reference sheet with SYSMEM reference sheet SYSTEM reference sheet with SYSTEM reference sheet new TAPDIR reference sheet new TAPFIL reference sheet TIME reference sheet with TIME reference sheet TXTFMT reference sheet with TXTFMT reference sheet For your quick reference The new reference sheets are U BATCH PC CAL120 PCL EMAIL PCU FILTAP PL LIB PRUN NEWTRM PU OPR TAPDIR PARITY TAPFIL The revised reference sheets are APPEND ERASE LOAD BITMAP FILDMP MACRO com FIX MONTST COMPIL FIXDVR PRINT COPY FMT200 SET CREATE FMT210 SYMBOL DATE FMT400 SYSMEM DDT FMT500 SYSTEM DO HASHER TIME DSKANA LINK TXTFMT DSKCPY For a list of the reference sheets grouped by function
81. see Section 6 3 Functional Summary of Commands of Manual the AMOS System Commands Reference C 1 May 1980 DWM 00100 62 CHANGE PAGE PACKET 1 FOR THE AMOS SYSTEM COMMAND REFERENCE MANUAL 1 0 INTRODUCTION This set of documents is the first update package for the AMOS System Commands Reference Manual DWM 00100 49 Once you incorporate these pages into your copy of the manual your manual will contain information that reflects AMOS Versions 4 4 and later This change page packet contains 1 Updating instructions 2 A new title page for the manual indicating the current revision Level of the manual 3 The manual pages we have changed Each page that was changed contains a legend at the bottom of the page that reads Changed 1 May 1980 We have marked with change bars vertical black lines in the left margin those portions of each page that have changed Each page that is new for this revision of the manual contains the Legend 1 May 1980 2 0 UPDATING INSTRUCTIONS To make the update process easier we suggest that you put your AMOS System Commands Reference Manual in a three ring binder notebook If the pages of the manual are secured with a staple remove the staple First remove the title page from this change page packet and exchange it for the title page in the AMOS System Commands Reference Manual Notice that we have not included a new table of contents the changes we
82. so Your SYSTEM INI can be set up to initially mount your disks for you every time the system comes up but if you change any of your disks after the system is up and running you still must explicitly mount them using the MOUNT command If you do not mount a disk after you change it when it comes time to transfer data it is likely that the system will write to the new disk as if it had the same free and used locations as the old disk That is it will make its decision of where to write data to the disk based on the bitmap of the old disk Using the MOUNT command tells the system that you are changing disks and that the system must therefore look at the new disk to fetch the appropriate bitmap A disk bitmap is a map of the disk it tells the system which disk blocks are free and which are used IMPORTANT NOTE Never mount or unmount a disk while someone is accessing the disk to do so can severely damage the file structure of that disk FORMAT MOUNT Devn switch ae where Devn is the specification of the device you want to mount If you do not include a device specification MOUNT displays a list of all of the disks mounted on the system OPTIONS The U switch tells MOUNT that you want to unmount the disk in the specified device The W switch tells MOUNT that you want to wait until the specified device is ready before mounting the disk Changed 1 May 1980 MOUNT Cont d OPERATION Page 2 To mount
83. specifications CMPILR assumes the device and account you are logged into If you omit the extension CMPILR assumes an extension of PAS OPERATION 1 Type PC followed by the specification of the file you want to compile Then type RETURN for example PC SALES GED The fi e you specify must be a compilable PASCAL program 2 PC now invokes the AlphaPASCAL compiler CMPILR which proceeds to compile the program PC causes CMPILR to display some diagnostic status messages so you see something Like this 30 April 1981 PC Cont d Page 2 PRUN CMPILR AlphaPascal v2 0 Source file name SALES Diagnostic file name lt return gt for terminal AlphaPascal Compiler Version 2 0 PROGRAM lt 3 72 Tines 2 82 seconds 149 48 Lines minute No compilation errors For more in ormation on CMPILR and what each line of the display means see the ALphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 00100 08 ERRORS PC generates no error messages itself However you may see the standard PASCAL error messages For a List of those error messages see Appendix C of the AlphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 00100 08 CHARACTERISTICS Invokes the PASCAL compiler CMPILR Causes one PASCAL program to be compiled Causes CMPILR to send diagnostic information to your terminal display 30 April 1981 pel FUNCTION Compiles and links a PASCAL program by invoking the AlphaPASCAL compiler CMPILR and the Alpha
84. takes this form STATUS n where n is a 16 bit status code for a formatter status codes refer to accompanying the 1150A formatter ERRORS TRIINI generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS Communicates with a Century Data 1150A formatter AM 400 Trident Hard Disk Interface Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 trilod FUNCTION Bootstrap loader program for a system that uses the Century Data Trident T25 T50 or F200 hard disk as the System Device HINTS RESTRICTIONS The TRILOD program when contained on a 2716 PROM allows the system to boot off a System Disk on a T25 T50 or T200 hard disk when a hardware reset occurs that is when you hit the RESET button The program is also in account DSK0 1 4 of the System Disk You may use TRILOD at AMOS command level to reset the system if your System Device is a 125 TSO or T200 hard disk The memory partition of the job that uses the TRILOD command MUST be in Bank zero if your system bank switches memory For information on bank switched systems refer to the document Memory Management Option lt DWM 00100 10 in the AM 100 documentation packet TRILOD onty tries to boot off surface Zero It will not Operate if the i drive is write protected ye FORMAT TRILOD Y OPERATION 1 Type TRILOD followed by a RETURN TRILOD The system now resets itself by reading a copy of the TRILOD bootstrap program into system memory and executi
85. terminal input mode Messages cannot be longer than one Line Your terminal must be at AMOS command level if you want to use SEND FORMAT SEND Jobname Message where Jobname is the job to whom you want to send a Message OPERATION 1 Type SEND the name of the job that you want to communicate with and the message Type a RETURN For example assume that you are JOB1 SEND JOBS HOW LONG IS THAT LISTING YOU RE PRINTING Q 2 If the terminal attached to J0B3 is not guarded and is at AMOS command level or in terminal input mode the message appears on JOB3 s terminal JOB1 HOW LONG IS THAT LISTING YOU RE PRINTING NOTE the name of the job that sent the message appears at the front of the message Now JOB3 can return an answer by also using the SEND command e 9 SEND JOB1 ABOUT 17 PAGES 3 When SEND is finished it returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 SEND Cont d Page 2 ERRORS You may see the following error messages 2Job not found You tried to send a message to a nonexistent job Make sure that you spelled the name of the job correctly and that the job does indeed exist on this system You can use the SYSTAT command to see what other jobs are on the system 2Job specification error SEND is confused by the job name that you supplied For example you see this error message if you type SEND followed by a RETURN Busy SEND cannot send the message to the job you spe
86. the Line Filespec NOT FOUND DSKFIL was not able to find the file you specified Check your spelling and make sure that you supplied the proper account and device specification 1 October 1979 DSKFIL Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Lists disk records in use by the specified file The default file extension is PRG Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 dskpak FUNCTION Allows you to consolidate or pack the contiguous file area of the disk by moving contiguous files toward the end of the disk HINTS RESTRICTIONS Use the DSKPAK program to avoid fragmentation of open space on the disk DSKPAK consolidates the contiguous files on the disk and thus reduces the number of small free areas on the disk This creates more room on the disk for new contiguous files For more information on file allocation refer to the document New Method of Allocating Contiguous Files DWM 00100 23 in the System Programmer s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet NOTE DSKPAK only packs contiguous files To pack sequential files use the COPY command with the PACK option See the COPY reference Sheet FORMAT DSKPAK Devn Y where Devn is the specification of the logical unit you want to pack OPERATION 1 Type DSKPAK followed by the device specification of the disk you want to pack Type a RETURN For example DSKPAK DSK1 o 2 DSKPAK tells you that it is finished
87. the SRCCOM display Looks much like the one above except that the Listfile contains only Lines where differences occur The B option tells SRCCOM to create a Listfile just like the Q comparison but without Line numbers If you enter a Line that SRCCOM doesn t understand it replies Enter SRCCOM Listfile oldfile newfile or SRCCOM Tistfilesoldfile newfile Qa or SRCCOM Listfile oldfile newfile B Q produces a Quick Listing of differences only 7 B produces a Brief Listing quick and unnumbered Changed 1 May 1980 SRCCOM Cont d Page 3 US You may also see the standard system error messages that result from invalid file or device specifications For example 2Cannot OPEN Filespec file not found CHARACTERISTICS Assumes a file extension of MAC for Oldfitespec and Newfilespec and an extension of LST for Listfilespec If you omit Listfilespec assumes TRM Returns your terminal to AMOS command level Changed 1 May 1980 suspnd FUNCTION Allows you to suspend the operation of a job for an indefinite period of time HINTS RESTRICTIONS Use in combination with the REVIVE command to put a job in suspension and awaken it again Once you use SUSPND the specified job stays inactive until someone wakes it again FORMAT SUSPND Jobname where Jobname specifies the job you want to suspend OPERATION 1 Type SUSPND followed by the name of the job you want to suspend
88. the input file specification specify the disk account and device from which the files were oriqinatly backed up by FILTAP 30 April 1981 tapfil FUNCTION Writes files from magnetic tape to disk Allows you to restore file oriented disk backup from tape to disk HINTS RESTRICTIONS Used in combination with FILTAP to write disk files to the tape and TAPDIR to see a list of files on magnetic tape See the reference sheets for TAPDIR and FILTAP Only reads tapes that have been written via FILTAP Not for transferring data between Alpha Micro and non Alpha Micro computers Use the TAPE program for that purpose see the TAPE reference sheet Use a separate TAPFIL command for each magnetic tape reel Similar to the COPY command See the COPY reference sheet You may not copy to a disk account if it is not in the project you are copying from unless you are logged into the System Operator s account 1 23 or are logged into the account you are writing to If you are logged into 1 23 the default output account specification is CJ and if the account you are copying to does not exist TAPFIL creates it You may copy files into the account you are logged into from any other account regardless of project number TAPFIL is a wildcard file command See Chapter 9 of the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 for information on using wildcard commands The input specification must give the exact specification of the files you
89. times Then you see the message System pack transfer is complete ERRORS If the system encounters a hard disk error you can see the standard AM 500 error messages For example Cannot READ DSKO MOUNT PRGL1 4 device error Check with the System Operator for help CHARACTERISTICS Use to update fixed disk on a Hawk hard disk drive by copying all files from a System Disk update cartridge 1 October 1979 CPYSOD Cont d Page 3 You may also use CPY500 to copy all files from the fixed disk over to a cartridge if the system is running off the fixed disk rather than the cartridge Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 create FUNCTION Creates a random file of specified size HINTS RESTRICTIONS A random file also known as a contiguous file is one in which the blocks that make up the file physically adjoin on the disk as opposed to a sequential file in which the disk blocks that make up the file may be scattered across the disk See Chapter 5 Introduction to Files im Introduction to AMOS DWM 00100 65 for a discussion of random and sequential files Since random files may not be expanded once they are allocated on the disk programs that increase the size of files such as text editors work only with sequential files You will be most likely to use random files for applications such as BASIC data files which never need to expand in size FORMAT CREATE Files
90. to correspond to it Do NOT type a RETURN after entering the VUE command NEWTRM Looks for a RETURN to terminate this series of questions which you must enter after you have correlated all the function keys to VUE commands When you have entered the last return NEWTRM creates the Source file for your terminal driver Then you see The driver is complete You may assemble and test it now Now you must assemble the program by usinq the MACRO command Enter MACRO SOROC ED where SOROC is the name you used in telling NEWTRM what terminal driver to build When MACRO finishes and returns you to AMOS command Level rename the PRG file it produced to the terminal driver extension TDV RENAME D TDV SOROC PRG ae You now have a finished terminat driver program called SOROC TOV customized for your terminal Bad answer try again You typed an answer that did not start with Y y Nor n NEWTRM accepts a number of yes or no answers as well as numeric ones You 30 April 1981 H NEWTRM Cont d Page 4 may use an upper or lower case Y or N or spell out the word for your answers CHARACTERISTICS Requires that you be logged into DSK0 f1 63 Configures a standard terminal driver in the terminal driver account by asking you questions about the terminal s features and Parameters When you are ready to use the terminal be sure to add the new terminal driver name in the system initialization command file T
91. versa If you are copying a magnetic tape created on another system chances are that the data is incompatible with the AMOS system AlphaBASIC requires that all data records end with a carriage return line feed pair If these are not present the BASIC may be unable to read the mag tape data you have written into a file The screen oriented text editor VUE requires that each Line end with a carriage return line feed pair and that the Line be Less than 510 characters Beyond converting data from EBCDIC to ASCII or vice versa the task of modifying data so that it is compatible with the AMOS system is Left up to you MTSTAT SYS must be in system memory Use the SYSTEM command in the system initialization command file to add this module to system memory If you are not sure whether or not MTSTAT SYS is already in system memory type SYSTEM followed by a RETURN SYSTEM tells you what modules are in system memory Make sure that the magnetic tape drives you want to access are defined in your SYSTEM INI device table These devices are NOT sharable so Place them after a slash in the DEVTBL command Line For example DEVTBL DSK1 STDO STD MEM RES MTUO MTU1 NTU2 MTUS NOTE TAPE only works with sequential disk files that contain fixed length data records It does not support any random access file format on the tape Before you use TAPE use the SET BPI command see the SET reference Sheet to set the recording density of the tape you ar
92. want to transfer from the tape including device and account specifications of the files as they were written to the tape The output specification allows you to specify the device and account the files are to be written to on the disk and to rename the files as they are written out to the disk FORMAT TAPFILT switches foutspec Tinspect switches f inspec2 switches RET where switches specifies a TAPFIL option outspec specifies the files to be created on the disk and inspec specifies the files to be transferred from the tape including the disk device and account specifications originally associated with the files when they were backed up onto tape by FILTAP 30 April 1981 TAPFIL Cont d Page 2 DEFAULTS The output specification defaults to the input specification If you are logged into 1 2 the default output account specification is fJ The input specification defaults to and the account and device you are logged into The default switches are NOQUERY DELETE The default magnetic tape drive device specification is MTU OPTIONS Use the switches below to select TAPFIL options Each switch must begin with a slash Remember that the placement of the switch on the command iine modifies its effect QUERY or Q Ask user for confirmation before copying files file switch NOQUERY or NOQ Don t ask for confirmation before copying files default file switch DELETE or D Copy over to
93. where Modulespec specifies the module you want to update and Filespec specifies the PCF file you want to Link the module into DEFAULTS If you omit the file extension PU assumes the extension PCF Tf you omit the device and account specifications PU assumes the device and account you are logged into OPERATION 1 Type PU followed by the name of the module you want to update followed by the name of the PCF file you want to link the module to Then type RETURN For example N 30 April 1981 PU Cont d Page 2 FU COMPAR SALES GED The mcdule name you specify must be a PASCAL module that has been previously compiled that is COMPAR PO1 COMPAR PN2 and COMPAR PN3 must already exist 2 PU now invokes PLINK and passes the filename SALES to PLINK as its code file As PLINK begins you see a display somethina Like this PRUN PLINK AlphaPascal v2 0 Tode file SALES Do you wish to T replace or 2 update SALES PCF 2 PU automatically supplies the 2 telling PLINK to update SALES PCF 3 PLINK continues The standard library code fite for SALES PCF is STDLIB PCF Do you wish to change this N PU automatically supplies the N tellina PLINK not to change the standard Library code file for SALES PCF 4 Now PLINK finishes Please specify files to be linked into SALES ane per Tine ending in a blank Line I L m3 ptam ne File 1 COMPAR ile Losding program and Libr
94. you specify exists PL erases it Then PL invokes PLINK giving it the filename you specify as its code file PLINK then proceeds to link together the files with the code file name and the extensions P01 P02 and P03 You may only enter the filename of the PASCAL file you wish to Link PLINK assumes the device and account you are logged into and the extension PCF For more information on Linking program files refer to the AlphaPASCAL User s Manual DWM 00100 07 DEFAULTS If you onit a device specification PL assumes the device you are i i Ra logged into FORMAT PL Filename OPERATION 1 Type PL followed by the name of the file you want to Link Then type RETURN For example PL SALES GED The file you specify must be a PASCAL program that has been previously compiled that is SALES PO1 SALES PO2 and SALES PO3 must exist 2 PL erases the file SALES PCF if it exists in the account You see something like ERASE SALES PCF Total of T File deleted 2 disk blocks freed 3 PL now invokes PLINK and passes the filename SALES to PLINK PLINK oroceeds to link the files SALES PO1 SALES P92 and SALES PO3 Nx 30 April 1981 PL Cont d Page 2 together into a new file SALES PCF As PLINK proceeds you see a display something Like this RUN PLINK AiphaPascal V2 0 Tide file SALES Treating new code file SALES PCF Library code file for SALES PCF STDLIB Please specify files to be linked into SALES
95. your system initialization command file SYSTEM INI 3 Once the system is up and running you see the AMOS prompt ERRORS ICMLOD generates no error messages However if it is not able to find SYSTEM MONL1 4 and SYSTEM INIL1 41 the start up procedure fails 1 October 1979 ICMLOD Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Boots the system from an Icom floppy disk if the Icom disk drive is the System Device Returns your terminal to AMOS command level if the system resets successfully Ne 1 October 1979 ismbid FUNCTION Buitds an ISAM index file data file combination HINTS RESTRICTIONS ISAM Indexed Sequential Access Method is a method for organizing and accessing data An ISAM file is an index file data file combination The index file contains pointers to records in the data file ISAM PRG quickty finds data records by searching the index file instead of searching the data file itself ISMBLD has three functions 1 create a new ISAM file 2 add data to the new file or to an existing file and 3 change the device specification of a data file You can use ISAM functions from within BASIC programs or assembly language programs For information on using ISAM refer to the ISAM System User s Guide DWM 00100 06 Rev A01 and the AlphaBASIC User s Manual DWM 00100 01 For the latest information on ISAM e g the difference between Exclusive Open Mode and Counted Update Mode refer to the documen
96. your System Disk The IMG device must be defined in your system device table CPMDIR assumes that the diskette whose directory you want to see is mounted on C PM device B Ci e AMOS device IMG1 C PM device A is AMOS device IMGO FORMAT CPMDIR Devns 2 where Devn is the specification Of the diskette in C PM format whose directory you want to see OPERATION C 1 Type CPMDIR followed by the specification in C PM format of the diskette you want to read Then hit RETURN For example Cif the C PM specification of the diskette is Az enter CPMDIR A o 2 You now see a display that Looks something Like this Filename Ext Ex VUE COM 0 EDIT seCOM s APOLLO ASC 0 End of directory i ERRORS You may see these error messages when using CPMDIR Cannot READ IMG3 device does not exist Make sure that IMG is defined as a valid device on your system and that the IMG DVR program exists in DSK0 1 61 1 October 1979 CPMDIR Cont d Page 2 Cannot READ IMG1 device not mounted You have tried to access a valid disk device but the diskette is not mounted Use the MOUNT command to mount the diskette CHARACTERISTICS Requires the IMG DVR in area 1 6 of your System Disk Also requires that IMG device is defined in your system device table See the reference sheet on DEVTBL Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 cpy 410 FUNCTION
97. your disk devices CHARACTERISTICS Formats diskettes used in floppy disk devices that run under control of the AM 200 Floppy Disk Controller board Make sure that the format enable switch on the AM 200 is set Selects the disk format to use on the basis of the device specification you provide When you run FMT200 make sure that your job is the only one running on the system As it formats writes over any data currently on the diskette Changed 30 April 1981 fmt210 FUNCTION Formats diskettes used in floppy disk devices that run under the control of the AM 210 Floppy Disk Controller board HINTS RESTRICTIONS IMPORTANT NOTE When you run FMT210 your job must be the only job running on the system The AM 210 Floppy Disk Controller handles devices that use double or Single density diskettes and single or double sided diskettes NOTE The AM 210 controller does not support single density AMS format FMT210 selects the specific format to use based on the device Specification you provide For example if you have previously configured a floppy disk driver named DDS DVR for a Persci device that uses double sided double density STD format the device specification of DDSO tells FMT210 to use STD format to format the diskette in Drive Zero of that device For information on configuring floppy disk drivers see the document Configuring Floppy Disk Drivers DWM 00100 47 in the System Operator s Information secti
98. 0 FIXDVR requires that 200DVR DVR be in DSK0 1 63 for the AM 210 you need 210DVR DVR in DSK0 1 63 for the Icom controller you need ICMDVR DVR in DSKO f1 63 Please enter Y or N Several of the FIXDVR questions understand only an answer of Y or N for Yes or No Invalid response Several of the questions that FIXDVR asks require that you enter a letter to select an option Check your typing Invalid device You have a bad version of 200DVR DVR 210DVR DVR or ICMDVR DVR in DSK0 1 63 Icom does not support AMS format You tried to format an Icom floppy diskette in AMS format Icom floppy drives only support STD and IMG format AM 210 does not support single density AMS format You may not use single density AMS format on a device that runs under control of the AM 210 floppy disk controller AM 200 does not support CDC floppy disks may only run oppy disks under the control of the AM 210 floppy disk controller CHARACTERISTICS Requires that you be logged into DSK0 1 63 Configures a new device driver in memory use the SAVE command to save the driver as a disk file Changed 30 April 1981 fixmtm FUNCTION Configures the program that drives the Multiterm printer so that it runs the printer with a particular 1 0 interface controller and connected to a specific port on that board HINTS RESTRICTIONS Because the Multiterm driver DSKO MTM DVRL1 63 does not operate through the terminal service system you
99. 6K of memory must be available beginning at the end or beginning of your Present memory partition By coordinated use of the MEMORY command users on the system can move their memory partitions about in memory to rearrange the allocations for specific jobs You must not use the MEMORY command to allocate memory in a system that bank switches memory problems could result The exception to this rule is that a job in Bank Zero may use the MEMORY command FORMAT MEMORY MEMORY Memory allocationtK P Use the first format to tell you how much memory is allocated to your memory partition The second format allows you to change the amount of memory allocated to your job where Memory allocation is the amount of memory in bytes you would Like to allocate to your job 1 October 1979 MEMORY Cont d Page 2 If you include a K after the amount MEMORY multiplies the amount given in your Memory allocation by 1000 For example the command MEMORY 16K tells the system to give you 16000 bytes of memory OPERATION 1 To see how much memory has been atlocated to your job type MEMORY followed by a RETURN For example MEMORY O CURRENT MEMORY ALLOCATION IS 42738 BYTES 2 To allocate memory to your job type MEMORY followed by the amount of memory in bytes you want to allocate to yourself If you type a K after the amount MEMORY multiplies the amount by 1000 MEMORY 32K 32000 BYTES ASSIGNEDI ERRORS ME
100. 95 was chosen as the optimum compression factor for most files You may not enter a value of less than 50 ISMCOM now prints some statistics that tell you how much compression was done and how much good it should do For example No_blocks unchanged No blocks freed No blocks compressed ISMCOM now returns you to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 ISMCOM Cont d Page 3 ERRORS File specification error No attempt made to close and unlock file ISMCOM does not understand the format of your command line For example you see this message if you do not include a file specification on the command Line Cannot RENAME Filespec file not found No attempt made to close and unlock file ISMCOM did not find the index file you specified Make sure that you supply the correct device and account specification CHARACTERISTICS Assumes a file extension of IDX for index file Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 ismdmp FUNCTION For use on ISAM files writes the contents of a data file to a sequential file or displays the structure of an index file on your terminal HINTS RESTRICTIONS ISAM Indexed Sequential Access Method is a method of organizing and accessing data An ISAM file is a data file index file combination The index file contains pointers to records in the data file ISAM PRG quickly finds data records by searching the index file instead of searching the data fi
101. AC erases all BAK backup files in your account if a MAC file of the same name exists in that account If you are logged in under 1 21 FRASE ALL C1 BAK erases all backup files from all accounts on all file structured devices that are mounted NOTE It is very important that you do not erase the file BADBLK SYS 1 2 if it exists on a device since it contains important certification data for that device FORMAT ERASE Outfilespec Filespectt Fi lespec2 FilespecN Switch where Filespecs are one or more files to be erased The optional Outfilespec is a file specification that acts as a qualifier on the files that the Filespecs select Switch is an option request See OPTIONS DEFAULTS ERASE uses the device and PPN you are logged into as default file specifications A null extension is the default extension i e an extension zero characters long The default switch is NOQUERY Changed 30 April 1981 ERASE Cont d Page 2 OPTIONS You may ask for the options below if you place a slash and the appropriate option code switch on the ERASE command Line QUERY or Q Request confirmation to erase NOQUERY or NOQ Erase without asking for confirmation OPERATION 1 Type ERASE optionally followed by an Outfilespec and an equal sign Now type the one or more file specifications that select the files you want to delete Type a RETURN ERASE tells you which files it deleted and how many disk bl
102. BASIC messages refer to the back of the AlphaBASIC User s Manual DwM 00100 01 Changed 30 April 1981 COMPIL Cont d Page 3 CHARACTERISTICS Assumes an input file extension of BAS Produces a file with a RUN extension Changed 30 April 1981 cont FUNCTION Allows you to resume execution of a command file that was previously interrupted by a PAUSE command HINTS RESTRICTIONS When you are using a command file and its execution is interrupted because of a PAUSE command in that file you are then returned to AMOS command level At that point you can use other command files run programs use the text editor etc When you are re dy to resume execution of the command file you may use the CONT command For more information on interrupting command file execution and on the PAUSE and CONT commands see New Features of Command Files and DO Files DWM 00100 63 in the User s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet Also see the PAUSE reference sheet in this manual When command file execution is interrupted because of a PAUSE command PAUSE saves the remainder of the unexecuted command file in a disk file named CNT CMD in the account the user of the command file is Logged into CONT Loads the CNT CMD file into memory from the account you are logged into and executes it Therefore do not erase CNT CMD from your account NOTE If you do not type CONT after a PAUSE d command file has re
103. CNT CMD into your memory partition and processes it Therefore do not erase the file CNT CMD unless you do not want to resume execution of the command file it contains For more information on PAUSE and CONT see New Features of Command Files and DO Files DWM 00100 63 in the User s section of the AM 100 documentation packet FORMAT PAUSE message Information You may optionally include a message which PAUSE displays to the user of the command file OPERATION 1 Place PAUSE in a command file where you want that file execution You may optionally include a message to be the user of the command file For example PAUSE To run the file type RETURN otherwise type When a PAUSE command is reached the user of the file type a RETURN to resume execution of the command 1 May 1980 to interrupt displayed to X may either file or any PAUSE Cont d Page 2 character but a RETURN to temporarily interrupt the processing of the command file 2 Once a command file is interrupted via the PAUSE command the user of the command file is returned to AMOS command level where he or she may run any group of programs or command files The CONT command resumes execution of the file 3 As an example of the PAUSE command let s create a command file that allows you to compile and run BASIC programs Command file to compile and run a BASIC program MAIN BAS E TRACE OFF LOOKUP MAIN BAS MAIN BAS does
104. DSK1 If you have any doubts about whether you are running off the cartridge or the fixed disk type SYSTEM followed by a RETURN If you are running off the cartridge the system tells you so SYSTEM IS RUNNING FROM CARTRIDGE DISK If you bring up the system with a data cartridge mounted and then mount the System Disk update cartridge without resetting the system it continues to run off the fixed disk In this case if you use CPY500 it copies everything from the fixed platter to the cartridge wiping out everything on the System Disk update cartridge Be careful 1 October 1979 CPY500 Cont d Page 2 FORMAT CPY500 Y OPERATION 1 Place the System Disk update cartridge in the Hawk drive Reset the system by pushing the RESET button Type SYSTEM followed by a RETURN If you do not see SYSTEM IS RUNNING FROM CARTRIDGE DISK uiid you are running off the fixed disk If you are running off the cartridge type CPY500 followed by a RETURN CPY500 2 Now when you see the following message type a RETURN This command reformats DSK1 then copies all of DSKO onto it It_is normally used to transfer the system pack Enter CR when ready to execute 3 CPY500 now mounts DSK1 the fixed disk and formats it via the FMT500 program CPYSOO initializes DSK1 and copies every file on DSKO over to DSK1 4 When CPYSOO has finished copying the disk it signals you by ringing your terminal bell five
105. DVR MAC MTNDVR PRG QUERY MTNDVR 0BJ tells ERASE to ask for confirmation before erasing the file MTNDVR PRG It erases the other two files without asking for confirmation however An operation switch affects all files on the command Line no matter where it is placed For example the DIR WIDE option affects the directory display for all specified files no matter where it appears on the command Line NOTE Wildcard file commands allow you to set the default switch by placing the switch in front of a file specification For example ERASE QUERY MTNDVR MAC MTNDVR PRG MTNDVR OBJ NOQUERY SRCFIL BAS tells ERASE to ask for confirmation before erasing the first second and fourth files specified on the command Line See Chapter 9 The Wildcard File Commands in the AMOS User s Guide for more information on wildcard file command switches and default switches COMMAND FILE A command file is an ASCII text file that contains valid AMOS system commands and file specifications It can contain any commands and data that you can enter at AMOS command level including the name of another command file As AMOS processes a Changed 30 April 1981 N INTRODUCTION TO THE MANUAL Page 1 5 command file it performs the functions called for by each Line of the file Command files can also contain several special symbols that affect the way the file is displayed on the terminal screen as it is processed and that allow the file to
106. DYSTAT itself be in system memory Allows board Returns you to select the memory address and 1 0 port used by the video your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 G C FUNCTION Allows you to create and edit text files HINTS RESTRICTIONS EDIT is a character oriented text editor Use various editing commands to move a pointer in your text Other commands allow you to delete insert and change characters at the location of the text pointer Most EDIT commands are one or two characters EDIT uses an Escape rather than a RETURN as a command delimiter so you can enter RETURNS as part of your commands EDIT echoes Escapes as dollar signs To exit enter an E and type two Escapes Ess EDIT brings into memory a copy of the file you want to edit After making your editing changes and insertions EDIT renames your original file to a BAK extension to create a backup file and writes your edited file out to the disk under the same name and extension as the original file NOTE Before you can edit a new file you must first use the MAKE command to create that file See the MAKE reference sheet For information on using EDIT and on the EDIT commands refer to the document EDIT A Character Oriented Text Editor DWM 00100 39 Rev A01 in the AM 100 documentation packet FORMAT EDIT Filespec 2 where Filespec selects the file you want to edit DEFAULTS EDIT assumes a file exten
107. DYSTATY 2 Now you see a display on the DYSTAT video monitor that gives you real time information about the status of the system You see one line of data for each job on the system this Line contains the following information about the job 1 name of the job 2 the account the job is logged in under 3 the job s priority level 4 the name of the last program run by the job and 5 the current status of the job that give you information about job status the AMOS User s Guide Chapter 12 Commands 1 October 1979 The symbols described in Information DYSTAT Cont 3 ERRORS d Page 2 If the symbols indicating current job status are enclosed in square brackets that job is in a suspended state caused either by the user typing a Control S or by using the SUSPND command The display also shows an arrow Pointing to the job that is currently active Included in the left hand corner of the display is the current time in seconds You may run DYSTAT at any time to reinitialize the display or to change the memory address or 1 0 port associated with the video board DYSTAT remembers the Last set of addresses entered If the program DSKO TODCNV PRGE1 4 is not in system memory when you try to run DYSTAT you see TODCNV must be resident in system memory change SYSTEM INI CHARACTERISTICS Requires that your system be equipped with a memory mapped video board Requires that TODCNV PRG and
108. Drive 6 WORD 0 0 0 0 400 26 400 3400 Drive END Use MACRO to re assemble the TRISET program after changing the table Then replace the version of TRISET PRG already in DSK0 1 42 FORMAT TRISET Y OPERATION 1 Type TRISET followed by a RETURN TRISET Y 1 October 1979 TRISET Cont d Page 3 ERRORS The TRISET command now tells the Century Data 1150A Formatter what kinds of Century Data Trident disks are hooked up to your system TRISET and the Trident initialization programs T80INI and TRIINI display standard completion codes Now that the formatter is properly initialized use the MOUNT command to mount the devices you want to access TRISET generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS Initializes the Century Data 1150A Formatter to handle the specific mix of Century Data hard disks you have on your system You may include TRISET in your system initialization command file after any SYSTEM commands You must run TRISET each time you reset or turn on your system Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 trmdef FUNCTION As part of the system initialization command file TRMDEF defines the terminals to be used on the system At AMOS command Level it gives you information about the system terminals HINTS RESTRICTIONS Once the system is up and running TRMDEF is used to find out information about the terminals defined on the system As part of the system initialization c
109. EF commands are entered into SYSTEM INI contiguously the first command defines the memory configuration of the first bank bank0 the second command defines the second bank bank1 and so on At AMOS command level MEMDEF displays the memory configuration of the system NOTE Use the JOBMEM command to allocate memory to jobs on a bank switched system See the JOBMEM reference sheet FORMAT MEMDEF O or MEMDEF Port address On value Off value Use the first format at AMOS command level to find out your system s memory configuration Use the second format within the SYSTEM INI to define the system memory banks 1 October 1979 MEMDEF Cont d OPERATION Page 2 At AMOS command Level T 2 Type MEMDEF followed by a RETURN MEMDEF MEMDEF now displays the memory configuration of your system See EXAMPLES below for a typical display In the system initialization command file La One MEMDEF command must appear in the SYSTEM INI for each memory bank on the system ALL MEMDEF commands must appear before the DEVTBL and BITMAP commands The MEMDEF defines a memory bank by telling the system the following information for that bank a The 1 0 port address of the memory board used by the bank This value is assigned to a specific memory board via switches on that board and serves to uniquely identify that board to the system Each memory board usually has its own address The address of the fir
110. ETURN after the EMAIL prompt EML GD and EMAIL will display its command menu again To exit enter an X followed by a RETURN after the EMAIL prompt EML gt X and EMAIL returns you to AMOS command Level 30 April 1981 EMAIL Cont d Page 3 ERRORS N You may see the following error messages when using EMAIL You must enter exactly five characters When entering your EMAIL password you entered more or less than five characters If you don t remember your password consult the AlphaMAIL Operator on your system No user ID defined for you please contact your Operator EMAIL did not recognize your password Make sure that you are entering the password with the proper spacing and punctuation and try again If you still do not succeed check with the AlphaMAIL Operator on your system who will Look up your password for you 2 Type for help where V is the command you entered EMAIL does not recognize this command Type a followed by a RETURN to see a menu of the commands you may use Invalid message number You tried to delete or look at a message that does not exist Make sure that you did not specify a message on the outgoing mail List when you wanted to look at a message on the incoming mail List or vice versa Ks Sorry FILENAME is a random file Sorry FILENAME is a binary file where FILENAME is the name of the file you specified You tried to look at a random or binary file These files
111. FAULTS The default file specification is the account and device you are currently logged into and a file extension of 0BJ OPERATION 1 Type FILDMP followed by the specification of the file whose data you want to see Hit a RETURN FILOMP INIT PRGL100 51 2 Now you see a numeric display of the data in the file 16 bytes per line 3 digits per byte For example 057 124 124 114 040 106 111 114 104 115 120 040 050 103 157 156 em nn 22 eee To freeze the display type a Control S to resume it type a Control 8 To interrupt the display type a Control C ERRORS You may see several of the common system error messages when using FILDMP for example Cannot OPEN Filespec file not found FILDMP cannot find the file you specified Check your spelling and the account and device specification Changed 30 April 1981 FILDMP Cont d Page 2 Cannot OPEN Filespec file type mismatch You tried to dump a random file To dump a random file use the DUMP command fFite specification error FILOMP did not understand the format of your command Line e g FILDMP D CHARACTERISTICS Gives a numeric display of the data in the specified sequential fite Changed 30 April 1981 filtap FUNCTION Writes copies of disk files to magnetic tape A file oriented disk backup program HINTS AND RESTRICTIONS Used for file oriented disk backup Writes files to tape along with their device and acc
112. FIL tried to find a logical unit that matched the device code you specified but failed to do so Try mounting the device Tape is not file structured The tape you are trying to read was not written by FILTAP TAPFIL can only read tapes written by FILTAP Check to make sure you have mounted the correct reet of tape 30 April 1981 TAPFIL Cont d Page 4 Missing output specification You omitted the equal sign in the TAPFIL command Line TAPFIL couldn t tell which information was your input specification and which was your output specification More than one output specification You may not supply more than one output specification Files may not be transferred to RES You may only add programs to System memory by using the SYSTEM Command within your SYSTEM INI Not_ copied Destination file already exists You tried to copy to an existing file while the NODELETE option was in effect You are not logged in under 1 2 can t create p pn1 You cannot copy from an account to a nonexistent account unless you are logged into the System Operator s account 11 2 If you copy to a nonexistent account while logged into 1 23 TAPFIL will create the account for you Qutput MFD is full The Master File Directory only has room for 64 entries The transfer in progress would have created a new account but there is not enough room in the MFD Device full No more room on the disk XBypassing BADBLK SYS
113. FIX MAC but within that name or extension no symbols may follow the FILE SPECIFICATION DEFAULTS AND WILDCARD SYMBOLS Page 4 3 2 Matches any one symbol in a filename or extension DSK MAC selects PACDSK MAC DIRDSK MAC and ARTDSK MAC You may place characters before or after s If s appear at the end of a filename or extension that many or fewer characters can match the symbols otherwise the number of characters that matches these wildcard symbols exactly equals the number of s For more information on wildcards refer to Section 6 2 Wildcard Symbols in the AMOS User s Guide IMPORTANT NOTE The wildcard file commands handle wildcards differently than do the rest of the commands on the system In addition to the standard System wildcards above they also recognize several other symbols For example these commands allow you to use the wildcard symbol in PPNs as well as in filenames and extensions Wildcard file commands also recognize the wildcard PPN symbol t1 in file specifications The 1 symbol equivalent to selects ALL accounts For more information on how wildcard file commands process file specifications containing wildcard symbols refer to Section 9 1 1 Wildcard Symbols in the AMOS User s Guide CHAPTER 5 REFERENCE SHEET FORMAT 5 1 INTRODUCTION The reference sheets that follow are designed to provide you with the information you need to use the commands of the AMO
114. FUNCTION Executes DO files HINTS RESTRICTIONS A DO file is a special extended type of command file For information on command and DO files see the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 Chapter 8 Command Files and Do Files In summary a command file is a text file that contains system commands You can invoke such a file by entering its specification at AMOS command Level A DO file can contain all of the elements of a command file In addition a DO file allows you to pass arguments to the file by including parameter symbols in that file You can then specify the arguments to be substituted for those symbols when you invoke the DO file Build a DO file by creating a text file with one of the system text editors NOTE If a DO file has a DO extension you may invoke that file simply by entering the specification of that file at AMOS command level providing that no PRG or CMD files of the same name exist in your account or the system Library accounts The system then calls the DO command for you If the file does not have a DO extension you must use the DO command When processing DO files AMOS uses the program DSKO0 MDO PRGL1 43 do not erase that file from the System Disk FORMAT DO Filespec Arg Arg2 ArgN GE where Filespec selects the DO file you want to invoke and Arg through ArgN is an optional List of one or more text items separated by spaces that you wish to substitute for parameter symbols in the DO f
115. Files and DO Files in the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 for more information on command files The System Mail function that LOG performs see OPERATION 4 occurs only when you log into the system after having been Logged off not when you use LOG to transfer between accounts Changed 1 May 1980 LOG Cont d Page 2 FORMAT LOG Devn Lp pnJ or LOG Devn 3L pnJ GD or LOG Devn p RET or LOG GD The first format logs you into the system p pn is the project programmer number that you want to log in under The square brackets enclosing the PPN are optional Devn is the specification of the device that holds the disk containing the account If you are already logged into the system under a different PPN or device LOG transfers you over to the device and PPN you ve requested Use the second and third formats after you ve already logged into the system and want to transfer to another account Use the fourth format after you ve logged into the system to find out what PPN you re Logged in under DEFAULTS If you omit a device specification when you first log into the system LOG uses DSKO as a default If the account you have specified does not appear on DSK LOG searches the rest of the units of that device e g DSK1 DSK etc If you are already Logged in but omit the device specification LOG uses as a default the device you are logged into if the account does n
116. For example Number of bad blocks 20 1035 1036 1041 1042 1043 1045 1046 1047 1052 1053 1056 1057 1060 1062 1063 1064 1067 1070 1073 1074 or Number of bad tracks 2 15 19 5 After displaying the numbers of the bad disk blocks or tracks BADBLK exits and returns you to AMOS command level m XIT NOTE Block numbers are octal track numbers are decimal ERRORS You can see the following BADBLK error messages File not found Devn BADBLK SYS BADBLK could not find the BADBLK SYS file for the device you specified Make sure that the device you specified has been certified by a disk certification program CAUTION HASH TOTAL DID NOT VERIFY The BADBLK SYS file contains a bad hash total This indicates that the data in the file is invalid Use COPY to copy all files off the logical unit containing the bad BADBLK SYS file Then re certify the disk You can also see several system error messages if you enter an invalid device specification For example Changed 1 May 1980 BADBLK Cont d Page 3 UL 2 annot_ INIT Devn device does not exist The system did not recognize the device specification you supplied Check your spelling and try again You can type DEVTBL followed by a RETURN to see a List of valid system devices Cannot READ Filespec disk not mounted The sytem 1s unable to read the device you specified on the BADBLK command Line because it is not mounted Use the MOUNT command to mo
117. For more information on PLINK and what each Line of the display means see the AlphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 00100 08 PCU nos invokes PLINK and passes the filename SALES to PLINK as its code file As PLINK begins you see a display something Like this PRUN PLINK AlphaPascal V2 0 Tode file SALES Do you wish to T replace or 2 update SALES PCF 2 PCU automatically supplies the 2 telling PLINK to update SALES PCF PLINK ontinues Ihe standard Library code file for SALES PCF is STDLIB PCF Do you wish to change this N PCU automatically supplies the N telling PLINK not to change the standard library code file for SALES PCF 30 April 1981 PCU Cont d Page 3 5 Now PLINK finishes please specify files to be linked into SALES one per line ending in a blank Line File 1 COMPAR File 2 oading program and library dictionaries Xeeping global func proc SALES 3rocessing COMPAR C Linking in global func proc MAX fransferring temporary file to new code file SALES completed For more information on PLINK and what each Line of the display means see the AlphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 00100 08 ERRORS PCU gene ates no error messages itself However you may see the standard PASCAL error messages For a list of those error messages see Appendix C of the AlphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 00100 08 CHARACTERISTICS Updates a PCF file by causing PLINK to L
118. HMF For example MAP RSHMF O TRM DVR 252 552 107 745 717 ERRORS MAP generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS Default switches are FSBHMU Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 FUNCTION As part of the system initialization command file MEMDEF allows you to define memory banks on a system that uses memory management At AMOS command level MEMDEF displays the current memory configuration on your system HINTS RESTRICTIONS If you are not familiar with bank switching memory on the Alpha Micro system refer to the documents Memory Management Option DwM 00100 10 and Setting Up Multiple Piiceon 64K Memory Boards DWM 00100 34 in the System Operator s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet We will not discuss here the mechanics of setting up a bank switched system but briefly bank switching memory allows you to access more than 64K of memory on your system although each individual user is still restricted to a 64K maximum When you include it in the system initialization command file SYSTEM INI MEMDEF allows you to define the various banks of memory on the system Unless the SYSTEM INI contains MEMDEF commands the operating system cannot recognize any memory beyond the first 64K 1K 1024 64K 65536 With MEMDEF commands the SYSTEM INI is able to define several different sets or banks of memory each of which may be up to 64K in size The MEMD
119. Hawk fast copy mode DSKCPY gives you a different hash total for the disk than if you use the old disk copy mode See below for information on inhibiting the fast copy mode 10 Tells DSKCPY to use the old disk copy method for copying between Hawk hard disks Even though this mode is much stower than the default fast copy mode you may want to use this switch if your system has more than one set of disk drives since the fast copy mode prevents any other user from running on the system while the disk copy is taking place This switch has no effect if you are copying between other disks OPERATION To copy between floppy disks or Phoenix hard disks 1 Enter DSKCPY followed by a RETURN DSKCPY En If your disk drive permits you should now write protect the drive you are copying from this ensures that you won t accidentally copy the backup disk onto your source disk DSKCPY asks you for the Input drive Enter the specification of the device you are copying from type a RETURN Now DSKCPY asks you for the Output drive Enter the specification of the device you are copying to type a RETURN For example DSKCPY Input drive AMSO GEN Output drive AMS1 ED Changed 30 April 1981 DSKCPY Cont d Page 3 Now DSKCPY makes a Literal image of the disk in device AMSO onto the disk in device AMS1 DSKCPY teils you when it is finished As it copies and verifies it teils you how many blocks it is copying DSKCPY copie
120. ICS May appear only in a command file or DO file If portions of a file specification are omitted LOOKUP assumes a PR amp extension and the account and device you are logged into Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level if symbol is not included on LOOKUP command Line and if specified file is not found 1 May 1980 macro FUNCTION Assembles an assembly Language program file into an unlinked machine Language file HINTS RESTRICTIONS MACRO is a full macro assembler It assembles a source text file MAC file into an intermediate object form 0BJ file that can be Linked into an executable machine language program PRG or OVR file MACRO understands nested macro calls nested conditionals and program segmentation via overlay statements AUTOEXTERN EXTERN and INTERN statements MACRO runs in five distinct phases some of which are called in response to optional switches or special situations If your file contains no internal or external references MACRO automatically calls the Linkage editor to link your program as Phase 4 of the assembly otherwise you must explicitly use the LINK or SYMBOL commands to create a resolved executable program from the 0BJ file created by MACRO NOTE For information on using the macro assembler LINK and SYMBOL see the manual AMOS Assembly Language Programmer s Manual DWM 00100 43 This manual also contains information on the object file Library generator LIB t
121. LR AlphaPascal V2 0 Source file name SALES Diagnostic file name lt return gt for terminal AlphaPascal Eespiler Version 2 0 lt 0 PROGRAM lt 3 32 lines 4 82 seconds 149 48 Lines minute No compilation errors For more information on CMPILR and what each line of the display means see the AlphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 00100 08 PCL now invokes PLINK and passes the filename SALES to PLINK PCL erases the file SALES PCF if it exists in the account You see something Like ERASE SALES PCF Total of 1 file deleted 2 disk blocks freed PLINK proceeds to Link the files SALES P01 SALES PO2 and SALES PO3 together into a new file SALES PCF As PLINK proceeds you see a display something like this PRUN PLINK AlphaPascal v2 0 Code file SALES Treating new code file SALES PCF Library code file for SALES PCF STOLIB Please specify files to be linked into SALES one per Line ending in a blank Line File 1 SALES File2 Loading program and Library dictionaries Processing SALE Linking in global func proc PROGRAM Transferring temporary file to new code file SALES completed For more information on PLINK and what each line of the display means see the AlphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 00100 08 30 April 1981 PCL Cont d Page 3 N ERRORS PCL generates no error messages itself However you may see the standard PASCAL error messages For a list of those
122. LT 2 BADBLK SYS exists to prevent bad blocks on a device from being allocated an should never be directly accessed You cannot copy the BADBLK SYSL1 2 file since this would Lead to the corruption of the file system Cannot OPEN Devn protection violation You tried to copy into an account you are not logged into that is not in the same project as the account you are copyina from and you are not logged into 1 2 Either log into 1 2 or the account you want to write into and try again 30 April 1981 TAPFIL Cont d Page 5 CHARACTERISTICS L A file oriented program that transfers files from a magnetic tape to the disk You must specify the account and device that the files were originally backed up from Allows you to rename files being copied Not for transferring data between Alpha Micro and non Alpha Micro computers use the TAPE program for that purpose Accepts wildcard file specifications Output file specificaton defaults to input file specification input specification defaults to and account and device you are logged into Default switches are NOQUERY DELETE Default magnetic tape drive device code is MTU 30 April 1981 tape FUNCTION Magnetic tape utility program that copies data from disk files to tape or vice versa HINTS RESTRICTIONS TAPE copies data from disk files to magnetic tape or from tape to disk files It can perform ASCII to EBCDIC data conversion and vice
123. Locate AM 120 board There is no AM T20 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board in the system or the board s addressing jumpers are incorrectly set For information on how to physically address the AM 120 board see the document Installation Instructions AM 120 PDI 00120 XX CHARACTERISTICS Allows you to calibrate the time of day clock oscillator on the first AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board in the system CAL120 is re entrant and re usable 30 April 1981 cdc210 FUNCTION Bootstrap loader program for a system that uses the CDC floppy disk as the System Device running under the AM 210 floppy disk controller HINTS RESTRICTIONS The CDc210 program when contained on a 2716 PROM allows the system to boot off a System Disk on a CDC floppy disk when a hardware reset occurs that is when you hit the RESET button The program is also in account DSKO 1 4 of the System Disk You may use CDC210 at AMOS command level to reset the system if your System Device is a CDC floppy disk drive The memory partition of the job that uses the CDC210 command MUST be in Bank Zero if your system bank switches memory For information on bank switched systems refer to the document Memory Management Option DWM 00100 10 in the AM 100 documentation packet You may use CDC210 to boot from double or single sided diskettes that are in single or double density STD format or double density AMS format FORMAT Ccoc210 OPERATIO
124. M or PM as dictated by your entry if you have not used military format the default is AM OPERATION At AMOS command level from any account 1 To see the time of day type TIME followed by a RETURN For example TIME GED 72 30 12 PM At AMOS command Level from the System Operator s account 1 21 1 To set the system time of day type TIME followed by the time Cin the format HH MM SS optionally followed by an AM or PM Remember if ycu are using military format do not include an AM or PM on the TIME command line For example TIME 03 12 56 PM GED or TIME 16 00 00 GD 2 The system time is now set If your system contains an AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board TIME now asks you if you want to reset the time on the AM 120 Do you wish to reset the AM 120 board also Answer by entering a Y or an N followed by a RETURN If you answer N the system time is still set to the time you specified but the time is not changed on the AM 120 board In the SYSTEM INI file 1 To automatically set the system time of day from the AM 120 board when your system is rebooted include the TIME command in your system initialization command file before the final SYSTEM command but after the CLKFRQ command For example CLKFR 60 TIME SYSTEM Changed 30 April 1981 ci er TIME Cont d Page 3 NOTE This feature requires that your system contain an AM 120 Auxiliary I 0 Controller board ERRORS Coul
125. MDLOD generates no error messages However if it cannot find SYSTEM MONL1 4J and SYSTEM INIC1 4J the start up procedure fails 1 October 1979 SMDLOD Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS A Boots the system from a CDC Phoenix hard disk if that disk is the System Device Returns your terminal to AMOS command level if the system resets successfully 1 October 1979 u FUNCTION Alphabetically and numerically sorts data records in a sequential text file HINTS RESTRICTIONS Sorts only sequential files Sorts according to the ASCII values of the characters in the data records Therefore all data records that begin with upper case letters will come before all data records that begin with lower case letters or vice versa depending on whether you are sorting in ascending or descending order You may sort a text file that is too large to fit into memory all at one time SORT does not understand wildcard symbols SORT replaces the file you specify with another file of the same name in which the data are arranged in the proper order Net For more information on SORT and for an example of its use refer to Section 10 4 Sorting a File SORT in the AMOS User s Guide D4M 00100 35 FORMAT SORT Filespec D where Filespec selects the file you want to sort DEFAULTS File specification defaults are a file extension of DAT indicating a data file and the account and device you are currently logged into OPERATIO
126. MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBOB MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB The display above shows a system that contains four memory banks 80 3 The first 16K of each bank is used by the monitor the rest is available for jobs The actual allocation of the memory to jobs is Left to the JOBMEM command M stands for Monitor memory 8 stands for Bank switched memory Another symbol that can appear in this display is S for Sharable memory Sharable memory is that memory which all jobs can use but that is not allocatable to a specific job 1 October 1979 A memerr FUNCTION Enables double bit memory error detection HINTS RESTRICTIONS The Piiceon 32K word memory boards have error correction and detection capabilities MEMERR initializes the memory board by instructing it to abort when a double bit memory error occurs You may only use MEMERR with the Piiceon 32K word memory boards SuperMem Make sure that the memory board is properly jumpered for the 1 0 port you specify in the MEMERR command The error interrupt enable jumper jumper 54 must be installed on the board You may assign the same 1 0 port to more than one memory board you can have several 32K word boards in a bank switched system because the system only issues write status commands to the memory boards If you don t use MEMERR the Piiceon 32K memory board automatically corrects single bit errors but ignores double
127. MORY generates no error messages However if you try to allocate a very small nonzero amount of memory to your job you will not have room to Load the MEMORY command back into your partition to change that allocation MEMORY 10 T10 BYTES ASSIGNEDI MEMORY Insufficient memory for program Load MEMORY So be careful to check your MEMORY command Line to make sure that you ve made no typos Also be careful when attaching your terminal to another job make sure that the job has some memory allocated to it or you will run into the same kind of problem CHARACTERISTICS Not for use on a system that uses memory management Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 mongen FUNCTION Generates a new system monitor HINTS RESTRICTIONS Generates a new system monitor by overlaying the specified disk driver program into the existing monitor This new monitor allows you to access any disk for which you have a disk driver program as the System Device The monitor that you will usually use is SYSTEM MON in account DSKO 1 4 The disk driver you will use is one of the driver programs in DSK0 1 6 MONGEN inserts the specified driver into the monitor overlaying the old driver and then leaves the new monitor in memory At that point you can save the new monitor using the SAVE command or test it directly from memory using the MONTST command For information on MONTST and SAVE refer to the MONTST an
128. N 1 Type CDC210 followed by a RETURN Coc210 GED The system now resets itself by reading a copy of the CDC210 bootstrap program into system memory and executing it 2 Once invoked the CDC210 program reads the operating system skeleton monitor DSKO SYSTEM MONL1 41 into memory SYSTEM MON then brings up the system under the control of your system initialization command file SYSTEM INI 3 Once the system is up and running you see the AMOS prompt ERRORS Coc210 generates no error messages However if it does not find SYSTEM MONL1 41 and SYSTEM INIL1 41 the start up procedure fails 1 May 1980 CDC210 Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Boots the system from an AMS or STD format CDC floppy disk if the CDC disk drive is the System Device and runs under control of the AM 210 floppy disk controller Returns your terminal to AMOS command level if the system resets successfully 1 May 1980 cikfrq FUNCTION When you use it within the system initialization command file CLKFRG tells the system the frequency being applied to the CPU real time clock When you use it at AMOS command level CLKFRG tells you the frequency defined by the CLKFRG command in the SYSTEM INI or resets that frequency HINTS RESTRICTIONS As part of the system initialization command file SYSTEM INI CLKFRQ tells the system the frequency in Hz that is being applied to the clock input Line This gives the programs that acces
129. N 1 To sort a file type SORT the specification of the file you want to sort and a RETURN For example SORT LABELS DAT 2 SORT now asks you a series of questions a Record size SORT recognizes a carriage return symbol D Nee 1 October 1979 SORT Cont d C d Page 2 as the end of each data record but it also needs to know the size of the largest data record it is going to be dealing with Enter the maximum size in bytes of the logical data records in your file Every character in the record is one byte of data including spaces and punctuation Exclude carriage return and Line feed bytes Key size The key is the field in the logical record on which you wish to sort e g customer name SORT asks this question once for each key that you define You can define up to three keys If you want SORT to use less than three keys answer this question with a RETURN after you have defined all of the keys you want to use Enter the size in bytes of the key Key position SORT asks this question for each of the keys you define Enter the column number in the data record where the first byte of the sort key occurs The first byte of a record is position 1 Key order SORT asks this question for each of the keys you define Enter an A if you want that key sorted in ascending ASCII order or enter a D if you wish a descending order sort 3 SORT now sorts the file After the sort has finished SORT r
130. O ports start at 177400 in memory and proceed up to 177777 You can use QDT in much the same way that you would use DDT s absolute mode but DT is much smaller than DDT and allows you to examine and change memory Locations anywhere in memory FORMAT 07 OPERATION 1 Type QDT followed by a RETURN FS 2 Now you can begin to enter QDT commands Unless you specify a memory address QDT assumes that the first memory Location you want to display is at address zero 3 To exit QDT use the E command I jm QDT now returns you to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 QDT Cont d COMMAND SUMMARY B TAB RUBOUT n NRETURN nLineFeed ERRORS Page 2 Change to byte mode so that you can modify single bytes The current location counter changes by one Change to word mode so that you can change full words The current location counter changes by two Exit from QDT Display the current word as two octal bytes Takes the contents of the current Location and uses those contents as the address of the next location to be displayed Cancels current command or number Displays an XXX symbol to tell you that the command Line is being ignored Changes current Location to the one specified by the octal number that precedes the stash No change if you do not include a number Stores the specified octal number in the current location Works Like a RETURN but increments current Location counter Work
131. OG cannot access the device is not defined in the DEVTBL command in your SYSTEM INI does not have a driver program in area 1 6 of your System Disk or is not file structured Bad password The password you gave LOG wasn t the correct one Try again and be careful with your spelling If you still have no success check with the System Operator for help Already logged in under Devn p pn You ve tried to log in but you re already on the system LOG tells you which device and account you re logged in under Devn Cp pn Not logged in You ve typed LOG and a RETURN to find out what account you re logged in under but you haven t logged in yet Log in following the procedure given above CHARACTERISTICS Understands the ersatz devices Uses as defaults a the project or programmer number of the account you are logged into and b all units of the device you are logged into or all units of DSK if you are rot logged in Automatically starts up any file named START CMD in your account If a file named MAIL JNK exits in area 7 21 of the System Disk LOG displays the first Line of that file Returns your terminal to AMOS command level Changed 1 May 1980 FUNCTION LOGOFF Logs you out of the account you were logged into HINTS RESTRICTIONS Use LOGOFF whenever you teave your terminal for any length of time this prevents other users from sitting down at your terminal and accessing the files in your accounts When
132. P functions 1 October 1979 LISP Cont d ERRORS You may Page 2 If you do not load the extended Library you have more memory space for your program but you will be missing some of the standard features of LISP Refer to the AlphaLISP User s Manual for information on the contents of the extended Library Now you see the LISP herald message that tells you the version number of the LISP you are running For example AlphaLisp 1 6 Version 1 0 At this time LISP displays the LISP prompt symbol Now you can start entering LISP commands For example ADD 2 3 5 To leave LISP enter EXIT Next you see the AMOS prompt see any of the standard LISP error messages Refer to a LISP textbook for a List of LISP error messages CHARACTERISTICS Invokes LISP Language interpreter 1 October 1979 load FUNCTION Loads disk files into your memory partition as memory modules HINTS RESTRICTIONS You may use LOAD to Load memory modules only in your own memory partition You may use LOAD to load itself LOAD pSK0 LOAD PRGL1 42 GED LOAD does not understand wildcard symbols LOAD understands ersatz devices For exemple LOAD RAS STRIP SBR BED loads STRIP SBR from the BASIC Library account DSK0 C7 61 If you specify an ersatz device but omit a file extension LOAD uses the default extension for that ersatz device For example the default extension for the BAS account
133. PASCAL Linker PLINK HINTS RESTRICT ONS PCL is a command file which makes the AlphaPASCAL compiler CMPILR and the ALphaPASCAL Linker PLINK easier to use in many applications PCL first invokes CMPILR giving it a filename you specify Then it telis CMPILR that you want the diagnostic display on the screen as CMPILR compiles the PASCAL program Then PCL invokes PLINK giving it the filename you specify as its code file PLINK then proceeds to Link together the files with the code file name and the extensions P01 P02 and P03 You may erter only the filename and device specification of the PASCAL file you wish to Link PCL assumes the device specification if you do not enter it and PPN of the device and account you are logged into and the extension PAS For more information on compiling and Linking program files refer to the AlphaFASCAL User s Manual DWM 00100 07 DEFAULTS If you cmit the device specification PCL assumes the device you are logged into FORMAT PCL Filename ED OPERATION 1 Type PCL fotlowed by the specification of the file you want to compile Then type RETURN For example PCL SALES The file you specify must be a compilable PASCAL program 2 PCL now invokes the ALphaPASCAL compiler CMPILR which proceeds to compile the program PCL causes CMPILR to display some diagnostic status messages so you see something like this 30 April 1981 PCL Cont d Page 2 PRUN CMPI
134. PRG already existed in the account SAVE erased it before saving the memory module TLC PRG 3 If you do not want SAVE to erase an existing file use the rename option Follow the List of Filespecs with a slash and any extension you choose Before saving any memory modules SAVE will rename to the new extension any existing files with the same names as those memory modules For example assume that you have a file in your account named EXIT SBR SAVE EXIT SBR OLD RENAME EXIT SBR SAVE EXIT SBR The example above renames your existing file EXIT SBR to EXIT OLD then it saves the memory module in your partition as file EXIT SBR If a file named EXIT OLD already exists in the account the example above erases it before renaming EXIT SBR to EXIT OLD ERRORS SAVE generates no error messages SAVE Lists all modules that it saves if you do not see such a List it means that SAVE wasn t able to save the modules you specified CHARACTERISTICS Allows you to rename an existing disk file if the module you save has the same specification as that disk file Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 send FUNCTION Allows you to exchange messages between terminals on the same system HINTS RESTRICTIONS Terminals which are not connected to the same computer may not exchange messages and a terminal will only receive a message if it is not protected by a guard program and if it is at AMOS command level or in
135. RE CTLOG1 TXT CTLOG2 TXT ser Changed 1 May 1980 SRCCOM Cont d Page 2 ERRORS 2 After SRCCOM has made the comparison it returns you to AMOS command tevel Now you can either print the comparison file your Listfile or display it on the terminal When you display the Listfile you see a display something like this SRCCOM Version 2 0 Comparison SRCCOM CMPARE CTLOG1 TXT CTLOG2 TXT 00001 00001 First Line of text 00002 00002 So far all the same 00003 1 2 Lines that occur 000 7 only in Eu 00005 00003 Now the text 1s again 00006 00004 the same but the Line 00007 00005 is different between 00008 00006 the two files 44 00007 TT A Cine only in CTLOG2 TXT 00009 00008 The numbers on the left of the display are the Line numbers of the Oldfile the next column of numbers are the Line numbers of the Newfile The symbols indicate a Line that does not appear in the Newfile but does appear in the Oldfile The symbols indicate a Line of characters that does not appear in the Oldfile but does appear in the Newfile In the example above the two files are exactly the same until the third Line then the Oldfile has an extra two lines that the Newfile doesn t have The files are again the same although their Line numbers are now different until the second from the Last line where the Newfile has a Line that the Oldfile doesn t have If you ask for the Q option
136. REF BAS E If the file you specify in this case XREF BAS does not yet exist you see XREF BAS DOES NOT EXIST CREATE IT Enter a Y for Yes or an N for No If you enter N VUE returns your terminal to AMOS command level If you enter Y you see a screenful of asterisks this tells you that VUE has created an empty file and that you can start to enter text Just start typing hitting a RETURN when you want to start a new Line You must not enter more than 510 characters between RETURNS If you are editing an existing file VUE loads a copy of that file into memory and takes you directly into Screen mode Use the cursor control keys labeled with arrows to move the cursor to the point in your text where you want to make changes To leave Screen mode and enter Command mode type an Escape Now you see several lines of data The cursor is waiting at the VUE prompt symbol gt This display might Look something Like this AlphaVue 2 4 Status space insert fold Sblk Editing XREF BAS 34875 bytes free Margin 0 Page 3 z Below this display you might also see a summary of VUE editing commands If the file MENU VUE exists in account DSK0 7 01 or the account you are currently logged into You may now use various Command mode commands To re enter Screen mode type n Escape To exit VUE enter Command mode and type an F followed by a RETURN To exit without updating your file enter Command mode and type a followed b
137. RMDEF Statement that defines your terminal 30 April 1981 opr FUNCTION Allows the AlphaMAIL Operator to maintain and manage the system s use of AlphaMAIL the Alpha Micro electronic mail system HINTS RESTRICTIONS The AlphaMAIL Operator creates and maintains the AlphaMAIL User Directory for his or her computer system The OPR program allows the AlphaMAIL Operator to build and maintain the User Directory to check the users mail boxes to receive messages and to distribute a message to multiple users and to specify how many days that message is to be on hold For information on using OPR refer to the AlphaMAIL User s Manual DSS 10000 06 The AlphaMAIL Operator works in the AlphaMAIL account DSKO L7 2 This account should have password protection to protect the account from unauthorized use OPR is ONLY for the use of the authorized AlphaMAIL Operator Damage to the AlphaMAIL message syStem can occur if anyone but the AlphaMAIL Operator is allowed access to OPR ix See the EMAIL reference sheet for information on how the general user may access AlphaMAIL FORMAT OPR OPERATION 1 Log into DSK0 7 21 which you can also specify as BOX Now type OPR followed by a RETURN OPR You now see the OPR main menu 30 April 1981 OPR Cont d Page 2 OPR Version 1 0 COMMAND CODES A User Directory maintenance C Check mail boxes y Distribute messages R R
138. RN when you are sure that the cartridge is DSKO and that all information that you want to save on DSK1 is backed up LOG DSKO L1 2 This command file will certify DSK1 and copy a system onto it The certification process destroys the contents of DSK1 When you are certain that everything is ready type a return 4 Now CPY410 certifies DSK1 by using the CRT410 command specifying a maximum of 15 bad tracks 5 After the certification CPY410 displays this message Starting COPY process 6 Now CPY410 uses the DSKCPY program to copy all files in all accounts from DSK to DSK1 7 When the copy process is done CPY410 returns you to AMOS command level Changed 1 May 1980 CPY410 Cont d Page 3 ERRORS we The certification program CRT4TU found more than 15 bad Device has exceeded maximum number of errors tracks on DSK1 CRT410 stops the certification process You can also see any of the error messages generated by the DSKCPY command See the DSKCPY reference sheet CHARACTERISTICS CPY410 is a command file in the System Command File library account DSKO 2 2 Destroys all data on DSK1 in the process of certification Uses the DSKCPY command to copy all files from logical unit DSKO to logical unit DSK1 Verifies the copy Changed 1 May 1980 cpy500 FUNCTION Copies a System Disk cartridge onto the fixed platter of a Hawk hard disk drive HINTS RESTRICTIONS CP
139. RRORS You may encounter one of the standard System error messages if you supply an invalid device specification For example File specification error PPN did not understand the device Specification you supplied For example you see this error message if you enter PPN followed by RETURN Cannot READ Devn device does not exist Check your spelling The system did not recognize the device Specification you supplied For example did you enter ASM1 instead of AMS1 CHARACTERISTICS Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level t 1 October 1979 print FUNCTION Allows you to send one or more files to a orinter HINTS RESTRICTIONS The PRINT command sends a print request to the Line printer spooler program the spooler places your request into a queue or waiting Line When a printer becomes available the spooler prints your file You may have several requests in the orinter queue waiting for available printers PRINT is a wildcard fite command For more information on using PRINT refer to Chapter 9 6 Printing a File PRINT in the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 PRINT recognizes ersatz devices and wildcard symbols Use the SET command to define the type of form to be mounted on a specific printer on the system See the SET reference sheet for information on setting forms FORMAT PRINT Printerspec to see if any print requests are currently in the queue of a specific printer or in the queues of a
140. Represents account that user of the DO file is currently logged into ERRORS Cannot Locate Filespec DO could not find the file you specified Check the extension of the file you want to use For example if DO says Cannot Locate REMAKE DO does your DO file REMAKE have a DO extension If not you must specify the extension on the DO command line Make sure that you are logged into the correct account DO Cont d Page 3 s CHARACTERISTICS Assumes a file extension of 00 dskana FUNCTION Analyzes the data on a disk re creating the disk bitmap and tracking down lost disk blocks Reports file errors inconsistent block counts and bad bitmap hash totals HINTS RESTRICTIONS You must be logged into account 1 2 to run DSKANA DSKANA reads every block on the disk It keeps track of what the bitmap should be and compares that to what it actually is then it rewrites the bitmap Should be run on a regular basis reclaims temporarily allocated disk blocks and cleans up bitmap Tells you if more than one file claims the same disk block if there are illegal block links in a file and if your bitmap has a bad hash total IMPORTANT NOTE DO NOT run DSKANA when other users are accessing the specified disk To see a summary of the DSKANA switches and modes enter DSKANA followed by a RETURN NOTE TO PHOENIX DRIVE USERS DSKANA checks the specified device for the file BADBLK SYS 1 2 This file is created by CRT410 the
141. S RESTRICTIONS You may not copy to an account if it is not in the project you are logged into unless you are logged in as System Operator You may copy files into your account from any other account regardless of project number You may use COPY to pack the disk if you use the PACK switch However do NOT pack the disk in this way while other users are accessing the disk ilespecs performs same function as TYPE Filespecs ilespecs performs same function a LOAD Filespecs Filespecs performs same function as SAVE Filespecs COPY understands the ersatz devices NOTE ON DISK BACKUP 1f you are not logged in as System Operator you may back up files in accounts that are within the same project For example COPY OSK2 C1 DSK1 100 1 E copies alt files on 0SK1 in Project 100 accounts over to the same accounts on DSK2 The wildcard PPN symbol 1 tells the system to copy the files over to their corresponding accounts on DSK2 instead of just the account you are logged into If you are logged in as System Operator you may back up all accounts regardless of project number COPY DSK2 DSK1 ED If you are logged into the System Operator s account 11 21 the COPY command uses the symbol as the PPN default on the teft side of the equal sign NOTE The file BADBLK SYS 1 2 is created by a disk certification Program for certain kinds of disk devices It contains a list of the bad blocks or tracks on t
142. S system The sheets are each in the same format and contain the same subheadings The purpose of this discussion is to guide you through the architecture of the sheets while you gain familiarity with them so that you can quickly access the information they contain We discuss each subheading individually Some of the subheadings do not appear in each reference sheet but are only used occasionally when needed These exceptions are labeled as needed Most of the subheadings appear on every sheet however so you can glance at any sheet and quickly Locate the topic you need 5 2 REFERENCE SHEET SUBHEADINGS Below we discuss the reference sheet subheadings The form this discussion takes is similar to that of an actual reference sheet FUNCTION Provides a brief statement of the purpose use and features of the command It reports the action that takes place when you use the command correctly REFERENCE SHEET FORMAT Page 5 2 HINTS RESTRICTIONS This narrative portion describes the action of the command how the command makes decisions and the consequences of the command It also suggests special uses of the command helps you determine what to expect when using the command and reminds you of other commands you must use first This section refers you to other Alpha Micro documentation for more information on the use and purpose of the command It also helps you interpret the results of the command and suggests further steps
143. SCHOLE TXTC310 2 Total of 2 files transferred 3 Remember that you can use wildcard file specifications For example suppose you want to back up all BAS files on the disk FILTAP BAS Gen 30 April 1981 o FILTAP Cont d Page 3 4 When you use the QUERY switch FILTAP asks for confirmation before each transfer Enter Y for yes or N for no do not type a RETURN after your answer Remember that the placement of the QUERY switch on the command Line can affect which files it applies to for example FILTAP MAC QUERY BAS TXT PRG NOQUERY LST GED Enter tape unit number 1 EN TERML MAC to MTUT TERML MAC C40 MAC to MTUT C40 MAC LSTSQR BAS to MTUT LSTSQR BAS Y NEW TXT to MTUT NEW TXT N STATUS PRG to MTU1 STATUS PRG NEW LST to MTUT NEW LST Y BMAC LST to MTUT BMAC LST Y Total of 6 files transferred You may enter a Control C at any time to prevent further transfers 5 If FILTAP cannot fit all of the files you specified on one tape it will permit you to continue the backup on another reel When the current tape is full FILTAP displays XTape is full please mount another tape then type RETURN to X continue or type Control C to abort copy If you wish to continue backing up files on another reel of tape wait for the current tape to finish rewinding mount a new reel of tape then type RETURN on your teminal the backup will continue on the new reel If you
144. SKCPY generates a hash total when using the Hawk fast copy mode do not use the O switch just type a RETURN Then enter the input drive HASHER RET Tnput drive HwWk1 RED Now you see 2ALL other users will be suspended while HAWK hash is running 1t return to continue or control T to abort If any other user is running on the system type a Control C to exit HASHER When you are sure no other users are on the system you may use HASHER again For example Changed 30 April 1981 HASHER Cont d Page 3 HASHER RET Input drive HWK1 GEN YALL other users will be suspended while HAWK hash is running Wit return to continue or control C to abort Hashing Locks Hash is 627 If you want HASHER to generate a hash total for a Hawk disk in the same way that DSKCPY generates a hash total when using the 0 copy mode include the O switch on the HASHER command line Remember to end the command line with a RETURN For example HASHER O Input drive HWK3 fer THashing 9696 blocks Hash is 432 ERRORS You may see the following HASHER error messages Invalid switch please use one or more of the following 70 use old slow copy method for the AM 500 You specified a Switch on the command Line other than 0 Enter the command line again driver not found HASHER couldn t find the device driver program for the specified device That means that the driver was not in system memory user memory
145. SMFIX accepts a wildcarded file specification If all of your ISAM files both the IDA and the IDX portions are on line at the same time you can rebuild all ISAM files on the system by logging into 11 21 and entering ISMFIX ALL o It is not necessary to specify an IDX extension because ISMFIX only processes IDX files and through them the appropriate IDA files ISMFIX processes all ISAM files it finds If ISMFIX encounters a primary index file but that file s data file is not on line and ready to access an error occurs You see a file not found error message and ISMFIX goes on to the next ISAM file DEFAULTS When you are logged into the System Operator s account 1 2 the default account specification is CJ that is When you are logged into an account other than 1 2 ISMFIX restricts itself to the account you are logged into Therefore if you are logged into 1 2 and you want to restrict ISMFIX to just that account be sure to specify account 1 2 on the command Line ISMFIX forces a IDX extension FORMAT ISMFIX Fi lespec Y where Filespec selects the files you want to rebuild ISMFIX Cont d Page 2 OPERATION 1 To rebuild a specific file enter ISMFIX followed by the specification of the file you want to rebuild Type a RETURN For example ISMFIX DSKO MAIL Y 2 ISMFIX Lists all restored indices as it re positions them in your ISAM file It also lists the relative record numb
146. TCH command so that the programs loaded into your memory partition will be deleted when you exit the command file You may use BATCH at AMOS command Level You will probably find it especially useful within a command file or DO file BATCH is a command file in the System Command File Library Account DSKO 2 21 FORMAT BATCH OPERATION 1 Use BATCH at AMOS command level by typing BATCH and a RETURN BATCH RET 2 Use BATCH from within a command fite by placing it at the front of the file ERRORS BATCH displays no error messages unless the programs it tries to Load have been deleted from the System Disk in which case you see the standard AMOS error message file not found CHARACTERISTICS BATCH is a command file in DSK0 2 21 Accepts no arguments or switches 30 April 1981 baud FUNCTION Changes the baud rate the data transfer rate that the system uses to communicate with your terminal HINTS RESTRICTIONS Works only with the AM 300 and AM 310 serial 1 0 boards Useful when changing from a CRT type terminal to a hard copy terminal Make sure that your terminal is able to communicate at the speed you specify to the BAUD command The baud rates that the system supports are 50 baud 75 baud 110 baud 134 5 baud 150 baud 200 baud 300 baud 600 baud 1200 baud 1800 baud 2400 baud 3600 baud 4800 baud 7200 baud 9600 baud 19200 baud FORMAT BAUD Baud rate specification 9 where Baud rate specificatio
147. TE followed by a RETURN For example or If your system contains an AM 120 board DATE also displays the day of the week For example Wednesday November 26 1980 At AMOS command level from account F1 2 1 To set the day of the year type DATE and the date in the form given in FORMAT above Type a RETURN For example DATE 10 21 84 ED P DATE 31 06 82 if European format mode has been set 2 If you want to specify European format use the E switch DATE 31 05 83 E RET 3 If your system contains an AM 120 board after you have set the system date DATE asks Do you wish to reset the AM 120 board also Enter Y or N followed by a RETURN If you enter N DATE sets the system date without changing the date stored by the AM 120 board If you answer Y DATE asks for the day of the week Enter day of week Mon 1 Tue 2 etc Enter the appropriate single digit that selects the current day of the week Then type a RETURN Within the SYSTEM INI file 1 To reset the system date from the AM 120 board every time the system is rebooted include the DATE command within your Changed 30 April 1981 DATE Cont d Page 4 system initialization command file before the final SYSTEM command For example SYSTEM TRM DVR DATE SYSTEM 2 If you wish DATE to display and accept the date in European format include the E switch If you wish DATE to automatically update the date and day of the week at
148. UNT program displays this field whenever a disk is mounted This field can be up to 40 characters Long 1 May 1980 LABEL Cont d Page 2 b Volume ID Enter up to ten characters as the Volume ID This field may be used by programs to determine if the proper disk has been mounted The XMOUNT subroutine which can be called from AlphaBASIC returns this field The MOUNT program also displays this field whenever a disk is mounted ce Installation Enter the name of your installation or company This field which may be up to 30 characters long is used when exchanging disks between different installations and companies d System Enter the name of the computer system that this disk is created on This field which can be up to 30 characters long is used when a particular installation has more than one computer system e Creator Enter the name of the person creating the disk This field may be up to 30 characters Long ERRORS You may see the following error messages when using LABEL Cannot INIT Devn device does not exist e device specification you gave when giving the LABEL command is not valid Check the spelling of the device specification you gave 2File specification error e format of your LABEL command line was not valid For example you typed LABEL followed by a RETURN Try again being sure to place a colon after the device specification CHARACTERISTICS Allows you to label a disk with descriptive infor
149. When used with LOOKUP and EXIT statements permits conditional branching May be used only within a command file or DO file 1 May 1980 hasher FUNCTION Generates a hash total for a specified disk HINTS RESTRICTIONS A hash total is a number that is computed based on the characteristics of a group of data the hash total thus uniquely identifies that group of data HASHER generates a hash total for a disk this number is based on the contents of the disk Therefore two disks only have the same hash total if they contain identical data HASHER is especially useful when you are making multiple copies of a disk You can use HASHER to generate the hash total of the source disk Then every time you use DSKCPY to make copies of that disk you can tell DSKCPY to generate a hash total for the disk copied to If the hash total for the source disk does not match the hash totals for the disks copied to a problem occurred during the disk copy NOTE FOR HAWK HARD DISK USERS Since you will often use HASHER to generate a hash total that you can compare against a hash total generated by DSKCPY you should remember that DSKCPY can generate tuo different hash totals for the same disk depending on whether you tell DSKCPY to use the fast copy mode or the slower 0 copy mode To be compatible with DSKCPY HASHER can also generate two different hash totals for a Hawk disk using either the DSKCPY fast copy mode or the DSKCPY 0 mode There
150. Y500 is a command file that formats and initializes DSKI Then it uses the COPY command to copy the contents of logical unit DSK0 to DSK1 It destroys all data on DSK1 before it copies the new data Over so before you use CPYSOO make sure you make a backup copy of alt data on DSK1 that you want to keep Because CPYSOO uses the COPY command instead of DSKCPY it is much faster than SYSCPY However unlike SYSCPY CPYSOO does NOT verify the disk copy The disk off of which the system is running is ALWAYS called DSKO DSK0 is usually the fixed platter When you reset the system or turn it on for the first time if the cartridge that is on the system contains account 1 4 and the files SYSTEM MONL1 4 and SYSTEM INIL1 4 the system recognizes that cartridge as a System Disk and therefore as DSKO NOTE If the Hawk disk drive contains a System Disk cartridge when you reset or turn on the system the system boots off that cartridge regardless of whether the fixed platter is also a System Disk When the system boots off a System Disk cartridge that cartridge is logical unit DSKO Because the CPYSOO command copies the contents of DSKO to DSK1 you can use it to update your fixed disk with a new software release by copying from the System Disk update cartridge to the fixed platter your old System Disk Remember when you mount the System Disk cartridge and reset the system the cartridge becomes DSKO and the fixed platter becomes
151. a disk enter MOUNT followed by a device specification then type a RETURN For example MOUNT DSK1 GD If MOUNT successfully mounts the disk and that disk has a label MOUNT Lists the Volume Name and Volume ID of the disk mounted For example MOUNT DSK5 GD Backup Disk 3 BACKUPO3 mounted MOUNT displays the disk label so that you can verify that you have mounted the proper disk lf you want to mount a disk but you know that the device containing the disk is not yet ready use the W switch MOUNT will now wait until the device is ready before mount ing the disk For example MOUNT HWK3 W Of course you will only use the W option if you expect the drive to be ready momentarily since your terminal is tied up until the device is ready and the disk can be mounted If you want to unmount a disk type MOUNT the device specification and a U Then type a RETURN For example MOUNT AMSO U GED To display a List of the disks mounted on the system type MOUNT followed by a RETURN MOUNT Now you see a list of the mounted disks MOUNT displays the Volume Name and Volume ID of each disk that contains a Label For information on Labeling a disk and on the Volume Name and Volume ID see the LABEL reference sheet in this manual For example Changed 1 May 1980 MOUNT Cont d Page 3 MOUNT EEN Disks mounted DSKO System Disk SYS001 DSK1 Payroll Data PAYROLLO1 Transfer Disk TI
152. a drive make sure that the controller and the diskette you use are good DIAG2 does NOT verify write operations and it does not destroy the data on your diskette If you use the SET DSKERR command before running DIAG2 DIAG2 reports all soft errors that occur otherwise it reports only hard errors For information on hard and soft errors and on hard and soft error messages see Section 4 0 Disk Diagnostic Tests in Disk Maintenance Procedures for the System Operator DWM 00100 40 in the System Operator s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet FORMAT DIAG2 Devn o where Devn is the specification of the device you are testing OPERATION 1 Type DIAG2 followed by a device specification then type a RETURN For example to test a disk in Drive Zero of a floppy device that handles disks in AMS format enter DIAG2 AMSO 2 DIAG2 waits until you tell it that you are ready Then it performs four different tests and lists any errors DIAG2 STD1 o Mit return when ready Test 1 track O read write Test 2 track 76 read write Test 3 random seek verify 500 times Test 4 speed seek tracks U and 76 10 times EXIT ERRORS 1 October 1979 DIAG2 Cont d Page 2 DIAG2 displays no error messages of its own but you may see some of the standard system error messages if you try to test a device that does not exist or is not mounted DIAG2 reports hard errors and soft err
153. a file extension of RUN 1 October 1979 FUNCTION Allows you to save memory modules in your memory partition as disk files HINTS RESTRICTIONS Memory modules bear the same name and extension as their corresponding files on the disk Use the MAP command or DIR MEM to find out what modules are in your memory partition SAVE will not save modules as disk files in accounts or on devices other than the ones into which you are currently logged SAVE understands the wildcard symbols and FORMAT SAVE Filespeci Filespec2 FilespecN Rename extens ion 9 where Filespecs select the modules you want to save as disk files DEFAULTS Nas SAVE assumes a file extension of If you specify just a filename SAVE saves all memory modules of that name regardless of their extensions OPERATION 1 Type SAVE followed by a List of Filespecs identifying the memory modules you want to save Then type a RETURN SAVE SYS PRG Y SCNWLD SYS LO aD RG SAVE displays a List of the memory modules being saved as disk files These files appear in the account into which you are currently logged 2 If you ask SAVE to transfer a copy of a module to your account and a disk file of that name already exists SAVE erases the original disk file and replaces it with a copy of the memory module 1 October 1979 SAVE Cont d Page 2 SAVE TLC Y ERASE TLC PRG SAVE TLC PRG In the example above a file named TLC
154. a thorough search procedure as it looks for the program or command file specified by the command Tt Looks in various accounts on the System Disk and on the device you are logged into For example if you enter RECALL GEN AMOS Looks first for a memory module by that name in system memory or in your memory partition If such a module is not there AMOS next looks for a disk file DSKO RECALL PRG 1 4 If that file is not there AMOS Looks for it in your account If the file is not there either AMOS assumes that the file must be a command file and looks for it in the System Command File Library account DSK0 2 2J as DSKO RECALL CMD 2 2 Next it Looks for RECALL CMD in your own account These are but a few of the steps in the command search procedure that AMOS follows For an exact outline of the Changed 30 April 1981 INTRODUCTION TO AMOS COMMANDS Page 2 2 AMOS command search procedure refer to Appendix B AMOS Command Ne Processing in the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 At the completion of its search if it still has not found the file specified by the command AMOS echoes the command back to you enclosed in question marks Then it displays the AMOS prompt to indicate that it is ready for a new command For example RECALL 2 1 COMMANDS TO BE USED WITH CAUTION This section is a quick reference to those commands which you should use with caution Some of these commands can destroy the contents of your disk
155. ack to themselves That is Block A points to Block B uhich points back to Block A An error was made in block allocation If you see any of these messages in the Listing of the blocks processed by DSKANA you have serious problems with the data on your disk Your best course is to delete the files affected run DSKANA again and restore the deleted files from your backup disk NOTE You do not see the messages above if you have not used the L or E option Aside from the block allocation and file errors that DSKANA itself reports you can also see the standard system error messages dealing with invalid device specifications In addition you can see Must be Logged into PPN 1 2 to run DSKANA You must log into the System Operator s account 1 21 to run DSKANA Cannot output to device being analyzed If you want DSKANA to write to an output file you may not specify that the file appear on the disk being analyzed Device write protected Please unprotect for retry type RN when ready Write enable your disk and type a RETURN DSKANA must be able to write on your disk to rewrite the disk bitmap BADBLK SYS has a bad hash code The information in BADBLK SYS is not complete If you want to see if anything else is wrong with the disk let the analysis continue otherwise type a Control C Copy all files off the disk and re certify it CHARACTERISTICS Performs a thorough analysis of the block Links of the specified de
156. ake sure that the HEX option is in effect before using MAP For information on changing the number base the system uses for your numeric displays see the SET reference sheet FORMAT MAP FilespecH Switches D where Filespec selects the memory module about which you want information Switches select various options see below DEFAULTS If you do not specify a filespec MAP assumes that you want information on all memory modules in your partition If you do not specify switches MAP assumes that you want full information on all memory modules in your partition The default switches are FSBHMU OPTIONS You may choose among several MAP options by including one or more of the following switches at the end of the command Line following a slash MAP assumes that each character after the slash up to the RETURN at the end of the command Line is a separate switch The MAP switches are 1 October 1979 MAP cont d IF IS B M Wu IR H Page 2 FREE Display number of free memory bytes available in decimal You must use with the S switch SIZE Display number of bytes in decimal of each module BASE ADDRESS Display octal base memory address for each module MODULES Display information about modules USER MEMORY Display information about modules that are in your memory partition RESIDENT MEMORY Display information about modules that are in system memory HASHMARK Disp
157. am e g BASIC or VUE that AMOS is executing AMOS PROMPT When you are at AMOS command level you see the AMOS prompt symbol which tells you that the operating system is ready for you to enter a command COMMAND LINE Whenever you enter a command to AMOS you include the name of the command optionally followed by file specifications and option switches The entire input line up to a RETURN is called a command Line FILE SPECIFICATION Data on a disk is organized into logicalty related groups catled files Whenever you want to identify a file to an AMOS command enter that file s specification DEFAULTS When you omit information from a command line AMOS has a set of information that it substitutes for the missing items For example if you do not tell AMOS what account a file belongs to it usually assumes that the file resides in the account you are currently logged into In this case the default account is your own NOTE Defaults vary among commands Check with the reference sheet for a specific command to see what defaults it uses In particular the special commands called wildcard file commands handle defaults differently than other commands on the system See Chapter 9 The Wildcard File Commands in the AMOS User s Guide for information on these commands WILDCARD A wildcard js a special symbol that appears in a file specification Wildcards enable a file specification to represent more than one file For example
158. am file If the program that you assembled with MACRO was made up of only one file that contains no internal or external symbol references MACRO automatically calls LINK for you as Phase 4 of the assembly to produce a program file Otherwise you must use LINK yourself to Link the 0BJ files that will make up the single PRG file LINK Links files together in the order in which you specify them on the LINK command line LINK does not produce a program file if one or more of the files you specify is not found in its assembled object 0BJ form NOTE You may use LINK to produce a symbol table file And you may use SYMBOL to produce a resolved executable program file See the SYMBOL reference sheet By using the appropriate option requests you can make SYMBOL and LINK perform exactly the same functions LINK supports the use of object file Libraries See the LIB reference sheet for information on library files For more information on MACRO LINK and SYMBOL see the AMOS Assembly Language Programmer s Manual DWM 00100 43 That manuat also contains information on Library optional and load map files FORMAT LINK switches X filespectC filespec2 filespecN HC switches RET where filespecs select the files you want to link and switch is an option request You may not specify an overlay or library file as the first filespec on the command Line Changed 30 April 1981 LINK Cont d Page 2 If you have too many file
159. ane per Line ending in a blank Line File 1 SALES File 2 Loading program and library dictionaries Processing SALES Linking in global func proc PROGRAM Transferring ti temporary file to new code file SALES completed For more information on PLINK and what each Line of the display means see the AlnhaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 001N0 08 ERRORS PL generates no error messages itself However you may see the standard PASCAL error messages For a list of those error messages see Appendix C of the AlphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 00100 08 CHARACTERISTICS Links the specified compiled file into an executable program Erases the file with the name you specify and the extension PCF Invokes th PASCAL Linker PLINK 30 April 1981 ppn u FUNCTION PPN displays a List of all of the project programmer numbers associated with the user accounts on a specific logical unit HINTS RESTRICTIONS The device that holds the Master File Directory you want to display must be mounted FORMAT PPN Devn Y where Devn selects the device that holds the accounts whose PPNs you want to see OPERATION 1 Type PPN followed by a legal device name type a RETURN for exanple a PPN DDS1 Y 2 The PPN command displays the project programmer numbers asscciated with all of the accounts on that disk PPN groups ther by project number i e all of the PPNs beginning with the same number are displayed as a group E
160. ant PALL 64K appears to be sharable memory Because of the way the address switches on the memory board are set up the system believes that the entire bank is supposed to be sharable i e that there is no user memory Check the memory board switches against the memory board documentation No switchable memory found MEMDEF Looks for the memory boards in the system If it can t find any memory at the 1 0 ports you have specified it is unable to access the memory on the system Check your memory board 1 0 address switches and make sure that the 1 0 port addresses in your MEMDEF statements are good CHARACTERISTICS Serves both as a system initialization command and as a user command As part of the SYSTEM INI defines memory banks however DOES NOT allocate memory to jobs To allocate memory to jobs on a bank switched system use the JOBMEM command Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level EXAMPLE When you use MEMDEF at AMOS command Level you see a representation of the memory banks on your system This display differs depending on the particular memory configuration of your system but a typical display might look something Like this 1 October 1979 MEMDEF Cont d Page 4 BANK BANK BANK OK amp K 16K 24K 32K 40K 48K 56K 64K I I MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BANK 0 T 2 M
161. arable device If you had more nonsharable devices you would enter them after the MTM entry If you have more device table entries than will fit on one Line you may include several DEVTBL command Lines in your SYSTEM INI These DEVTBL command Lines must follow one another directly with no intervening commands Changed 1 May 1980 DEVTBL Cont d Page 4 ERRORS No device table allocated You tried to use BL at AMOS command level but the system initialization command file for your system does not contain a DEVTBL command Line so the system does not have a device table Device driver xxx DVR not found The device driver DSK xxx bVRL1 6 was not found This is a warning message intended to inform you that the device driver is not in the default Library If you plan to load the device driver into your Own memory partition or system memory then you can disregard this message If not perhaps you misspelled the device name in the DEVTBL command Line CHARACTERISTICS Acts as both a user command and a system initialization command Returns your terminal to AMOS command level Changed 1 May 1980 FUNCTION Tests floppy disks by performing read write tests HINTS RESTRICTIONS This program tests a floppy disk device the disk controller board and the diskette in the drive for this test to be effective you must know for certain that two of these pieces of equipment are good for example to test
162. ard file command For more information on the use of DIR refer to Section 9 2 Finding Out What Files Are on the Disk DIR in the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 FORMAT DIR Listfilespec Filespect Filespec2 FilespecN Switches where Filespec is one or more file specifications that select the file or files for which you want a directory listing If you don t want to display the directory Listing on your terminal but instead want to write it into a file include a Listfilespec You may include one or more option requests Switches 1 October 1979 DIR Cont d Page 2 DEFAULTS If you don t include a Filespec on the DIR command Line DIR assumes that you want a directory Listing for all of the files in the account you are currently logged into If you include filenames but omit device specifications and PPNs DIR assumes the device and PPN you are currently logged into The default switch is WIDE 1 NOBASE The default file specification is The default Listfilespec e g if you say DIR Filespec is DIRECT LST in the account and device you are logged into OPTIONS You may request the following options by including a slash and the appropriate switch code in your DIR command Line DATA or D Just List complete Filespecs one per Line Operation switch KILL or K Delete and replace existing Listfile if it has same specifications as your Listfilespec Operation switch WIDE or W G
163. ard system error messages if you supply invalid device specifications For example Cannot READ Devn device does not exist Check your spelling The system does not recognize the device you specified Cannot READ Devn disk is not mounted Use the MOUNT command to mount the disk you want to access CHARACTERISTICS Displays physical disk records in numeric form on your terminal display Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 dskfil FUNCTION Tells you what disk records are used by the specified file HINTS RESTRICTIONS The numbers that you see are octal or hexadecimal if you have previously used the SET HEX command and give the physical disk addresses of the records in the fite FORMAT DSKFIL Filespec 5 where Filespec selects the file whose record numbers you want to see DEFAULTS Default file extension is PRG OPERATION 1 Enter DSKFIL and the specification of the file whose disk addresses you want to see then type a RETURN For example DSKFIL SWITCH TXT Q 2 Now you see a List of octal numbers These numbers tell you what physical records on the disk are being used by your file DSKFIL BYTE MAC O T164 1165 1166 2033 ERRORS You may see the standard system error messages when using this command the most common being File specification error DSKFIL did not understand your command Line e 9 you typed DSKFIL and a RETURN Retype
164. are set FORMAT FILTAP Filespeci switches Filespec2 switches Gey where Filespec specifies the files you want to back up onto tape and switches are option requests 30 April 1981 FILTAP Cont d Page 2 DEFAULTS The default file specification is and the account and device you are logged into The default switches are NOQUERY and APPEND The default magnetic tape drive device specification is MTU OPTIONS Use the switches below to select FILTAP options Each switch must begin with a slash remember that the placement of the switch on the command tine modifies its effect 7 QUERY or Q Ask user for confirmation before copying files file switch NOQUERY or NOQ Don t ask for confirmation before copying files default file switch APPEND or A Write files to tape at the end of existing files default operation switch NOAPPEND or NOA Write files starting with beginning of tape operation switch OPERATION 1 Type FILTAP followed by the specification selecting the files you want to back up onto tape then type a RETURN For example FILTAP MEMO TXT SCHOLE TXTL310 2 Now FILTAP asks you Enter tape unit number Enter the device code and unit number of the magnetic tape drive containing the tape reel you want to access The default device code is MTU 2 Now FILTAP tells you what files it is transferring For example MEMO TXT to MTU2 MEMO TXT SCHOLE TXTL 310 21 to MTU2
165. arge data Make data are Open Line old FUNCTION Compresses the upper level of an ISAM index file HINTS RESTRICTIONS ISAM Indexed Sequential Access Method is a method for organizing and accessing data An ISAM file is an index file data file combination The index file contains pointers to records in the data file ISAM PRG quickly finds data records by searching the index file instead of searching the data file itself NOTE Although you can call ISAM functions from within your BASIC or assembly Language programs you may not run the ISAM PRG program directly from AMOS command level For information on using ISAM refer to the ISAM System User s Guide DWM 00100 06 Rev A01 and the AlphaBASIC User s Manual DWM 00100 01 For the latest information on ISAM consult the document Important Notice for ISAM Users DWM 00100 36 Rev A01 in the AM 100 documentation packet Use the ISMBLD command to build the original data file index file combination See the ISMBLD reference sheet ISMCOM compresses the upper level of the ISAM index file This increases the speed with which you can access data in the ISAM file and recovers space in the index file FORMAT ISMCOM Filespec I where Filespec selects the index file you want to compress DEFAULTS ISMCOM assumes a file extension of IDX OPERATION 1 Type ISMCOM followed by the specification of the file you want to compress This file is the index
166. armed about the system occasionally temporarily allocates a disk block for some purpose and then fails to reclaim that block when finished with it Running DSKANA frees up the blocks Listed under this message by marking them free for use The following blocks were in a file but not marked in use You may next see a list of block numbers if you do not then there is nothing to worry about A List of block numbers following this message is an indication of something wrong for example the Linking structure of the disk has gone astray you must run DSKANA again using the L or E switches The second time you run DSKANA Look for the file error messages listed in ERRORS below so that you can figure out what is wrong with the disk The last pieces of information that DSKANA displays on your terminal are concerned with the bitmap and with file errors To perform a check on the validity of the disk bitmap every time the system updates the bitmap it computes a hash total and compares it with the previously stored value DSKANA also computes a bitmap hash total based on the blocks that it has processed if this value does not match the official bitmap hash total you see this message CBITMAP on disk had a bad hash total which lets you know that something was not quite right Whether the bitmap hash total is correct or not DSKANA always rewrites the bitmap and you see CRewriting BITMAPJ The Last Line of data in the terminal d
167. ary dictionaries Keiping global func proc SALES Processina COMPAR inking in global func proc MAX Transferring temporary tile to new code file SALES completed For more information on PLINK and what each Line of the display means see the AlphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 00100 08 ERRORS PU generates no error messages itself However you may see the standard PASCAL error messages For a list of those error messaaes see Appendix C of the AlphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 0010n 08 30 April 1981 PU Cont d Page 3 CHARACTERISTICS Updates a PASCAL program by Linking a specific module into the program file Invokes the PASCAL Linker PLINK Updates a PCF file by causing PLINK to Link a module to the PCF file 30 April 1981 FUNCTION Allows you to examine and modify locations in memory HINTS RESTRICTIONS If your system bank switches memory you may only examine and change locations in your own memory bank and in system memory DT understands only upper case letters ALL numeric input must ALWAYS be in octal even if the system is using hexadecimal for your numeric displays NOTE This is a very dangerous program to use because you can easily destroy the monitor in system memory Of course you can reload a valid copy by resetting the system The primary use for QDT is not to debug programs but to examine the contents of memory locations in the monitor or at the Locations used by the 1 0 ports I
168. ask for input from the user of the command file A special kind of command file called a DO file also allows the user of the file to specify text arguments which AMOS then substitutes into the DO file in the place of special parameter symbols Changed 30 April 1981 Ke CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION TO AMOS COMMANDS Each reference sheet in this manual gives you detailed information on the use of a specific command Before getting into the use of particular commands however it s a good idea to discuss exactly what we mean by the term command A command is simply a specification that selects a file on the disk that has been loaded into memory a memory module AMOS responds to the command by trying to locate the memory module and executing it If the module doesn t exist AMOS finds the file on the disk loads it into memory and then executes it The file selected by a command must be either a machine language program usually identified by a PRG file extension or a command file identified by a CMD or DO extension In other words when you type a command AMOS loads into memory the file specified by that command and executes it Because the programs specified by commands are not actually part of the operating system but are simply files on the disk you can add to the commands that AMOS recognizes by creating your own machine language programs and command files When you enter a command at AMOS command level AMOS performs
169. asterisk on the next Line prompting you to enter more file specifications You may enter as many lines of file specifications as you want as long as you end the preceding Line with a comma LIB displays several messages as it processes your object files For example Object File Librarian Version 1 0 Processing ADNUM OBJ Processing ROBIN 08J Processing WRTBIN OBJ Processing ASCCHK OBJ Processing SRCH5 0BJ Library file finished To see a listing of the contents of your library use the L switch For example LIB L NEWLIB sends the Listing to your terminal display To tell LIB to place the Listing in a disk file specify an output file and the L switch e g LIB L LIST NEWLIB To update a Library file 1 To update an existing Library file enter LIB the library file you want to modify an equal sign and the list of filespecs you wish to add and or delete For example LIB UTILIT UTILIT LIB NADOR GED or LIB UTILIT NADDR GED Both of these command Lines tell LI8 to take the existing Library UTILIT LIB and modify it by adding the object file NADDR to it You may specify a group of files by using the inclusion symbols and you may designate an exception by using the file restrictor symbol For example 30 April 1981 LIB Cont d Page 4 LIB NUMLIB FORMAT This command line tells LIB to process all of the object files in the library file NUMLIB but to delete the object file FORMAT
170. at precedes the local symbol enter a space then enter the local symbol For example in using the Search command LABEL 10 GEN where LABEL is the non local symbol that precedes the local symbol 10 For more information see the AlphaFIX User s Manual DWM 00100 69 NOTE To exit FIX enter Command Mode Now type a Q followed by a RETURN FORMAT FIX Filespec where Filespec selects the file that you want to debug DEFAULTS If you do not specify a file extension FIX assumes that the file is a PRG file Other defaults are set by the INI FIX initialization file Changed 30 April 1981 FIX Cont d Page 2 OPERATION 1 Type FIX followed by the specification of the file you want to debug Then type a RETURN For example FIX REMOVE GEN FIX loads the file into your memory partition unless it is already there It also attempts to locate the corresponding SYM file and load it into memory 2 FIX then enters Command Mode prints the FIX status and the AM 100 registers It then prompts you with a right angle bracket gt You may now enter FIX commands or press ESC to enter Display Mode 3 To exit FIX enter Command Mode and type a Q followed by a RETURN FIX will delete all memory modules it created including the program you were debugging and return you to AMOS command Level COMMAND SUMMARY Below is a partial List of the FIX commands refer to the FIX User s Manual for a full List of com
171. be loaded into system memory it is also serially reusable Creates an executable program file by linking and resolving intermediate 0BJ files Default extension is 08J for regular files and LIB for Library files Default switches are P and R Changed 30 April 1981 FUNCTION Invokes the LISP Language processor HINTS RESTRICTIONS LISP LISt Processing Language is a programming language used most often for applications that emphasize manipulation of string data e g relational data base programs or natural language simulation programs rather than programs that perform heavy numerical computation The basic structure of a LISP program and data is the List For information on programming in LISP see the manual AlphaLISP User s Manual DWM 00100 05 LISP PRG is an interpreter and is reentrant The System Operator may include LISP in system memory via the SYSTEM command in the system initialization command file NOTE To leave LISP after the LISP prompt enter EXIDO Remember to enter the parentheses FORMAT LISP D OPERATION 1 Type LISP followed by a RETURN LISP 2 If the file DSKO LISP LSPL1 4 is present on your system you see the question LOAD EXTENDED LIBRARY If DSKO LISP LSPL1 4 is not present on your system LISP does not ask this question and does not Load the extended Library Answer a Y for Yes or an N for No then type RETURN The extended Library is a Library of LIS
172. ber 1979 TRIDDT Cont d Page 2 TRIDDT COMMAND 8008 STATUS GOCO The status code that TRIDDT returns in the example above tells us that the addressed drive drive zero in this case is READY and ON LINE 3 To exit TRIDDT enter a Control C ERRORS UNKNOWN STATUS BYTE You see this error message if the Trident encounters a status byte from the AM 400 that it does not recognize CHARACTERISTICS Allows you to communicate with the Century Data 1150A Formatter to troubleshoot a Trident hard disk system Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 FUNCTION Performs initialization for Century Data T25 T50 and T200 hard disks HINTS RESTRICTIONS If you are using models 125 T50 or T200 of the Century Data Trident series of hard disks as peripheral disk drives that is you are not using these drives as your System Device you must use the TRIINI command every time you turn on or reset the system Century Data 1150A Formatter to initialize the If you do not use the TRIINI command the disk drive will not be able to achieve READY status i e a SYSTAT command shows the drive to be NOT READY discussion of the the documentation working with the FORMAT TRIINI Y OPERATION 4 1 Type TRIINI followed by a RETURN Nr TRIINI Y The TRIINI command initializes the 11504 formatter 2 TRIINI returns a numeric code that identifies the status of the formatter The message
173. brary account DSKO 2 2 Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 FUNCTION Allows you to wake up a job that has been put to sleep by the SUSPND command FORMAT REVIVE Jobname where Jobname specifies the job you wish to return to active status OPERATION 1 Type REVIVE followed by the name of the job you want to awaken then hit RETURN For example REVIVE J087 ERRORS CNONEXISTENT JOB You entered an invalid job specification For example you typed REVIVE followed by a RETURN or you misspelled the job name Check your spelling if it is correct use the SYSTAT command to see a List of valid jobs on the system CHARACTERISTICS Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 rewind FUNCTION Rewinds a magnetic tape unit operating under the control of the AM 600 HINTS RESTRICTIONS IMPORTANT NOTE DO NOT use REWIND when another job is using the tape unit Such an action causes unpredictable results You may specify one tape drive with a unit number of O to 7 e g MTUO or MTU5 The magnetic tape unit you access must be defined in the system device table See the DEVTBL reference sheet The program MTSTAT SYS must be in system memory Use the SYSTEM command within the system initialization command file to include MTSTAT SYS in system memory NOTE A magnetic tape is said to be at Load point when the metallic film at the start of the tape is posit
174. by returning you to AMOS command Level ERRORS If you supply an invalid device specification you can see several system error messages For example Cannot ACCESS Devn device does not exist AMOS does not recognize the device you specified Check your spelling and retype the command line Cannot ACCESS Devn disk is not mounted DSKPAK cannot read the disk because it is not mounted Use the MOUNT command 1 October 1979 DSKPAK Cont d Page 2 File specification error You probably forgot to include the device specification on the DSKPAK command line Retype the command line CHARACTERISTICS Packs the contiguous files on a disk together reducing fragmentation of open space on the disk Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 dump FUNCTION Displays on your terminal the contents of memory random and sequential disk files Master File Directories disk bitmaps user directories and disk blocks HINTS RESTRICTIONS DUMP accepts different kinds of arguments depending upon the kind of data you want to display Give DUMP numbers in the same number base usually octal that the system is currently using for your displays See the SET reference sheet for information on changing the system display base You may abbreviate the DUMP keywords e g DI instead of DIRECTORY DUMP is re ent nt and may be loaded into system memory by the System Operator F more
175. c tape Not for transferring data between Alpha Micro and non Alpha Micro computers for that purpose use the TAPE program Allows you to make one backup on multiple reels of tape Accepts wildcard file specifications Default file specification is and device and account you are logged into Default switches are NOQUERY APPEND Default magnetic tape drive device specification is MTU Writes date and time of backup to tape 30 April 1981 fix FUNCTION Symbolic debugger Allows you to examine and execute your assembly Language program and data structures in a controlled manner HINTS RESTRICTIONS FIX is a screen oriented debugger Its operation is very similar to the VUE screen editor It has two modes Display Mode and Command Mode In Display Mode you can examine your program and data areas and you may single step or proceed through portions of the program In Command Mode you may examine and modify the AM 100 registers examine data structures and set up the debugging environment You may toggle between the two FIX modes by pressing the ESCAPE key Both input and output values may be either in symbolic or numeric form If FIX finds a SYM file for the program you are debugging it will attempt to display all values in symbolic form Either octal or hex form may be used for numeric values use the SET command in Command Mode to change the current radix To access a local symbol specify the non local symbol th
176. cation CRT410 now intentionally writes a bad hash total to the BADBLK SYS file so that other programs know that the data in the file is incomplete and not to be trusted CHARACTERISTICS Communicates directly with the AM 410 so do not run at the same time as other programs which access devices that run under control of the AM 410 Use only on devices that run with the AM 410 You must be logged in as System Operator to certify a disk Creates account 1 2 then creates a file BADBLK SYS 1 2 that contains a List of all bad tracks on the disk Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level Changed 1 May 1980 date FUNCTION Sets or displays the system date in American or European format If your system contains an AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board DATE also reads and sets the clock calendar on the AM 120 If used from within the system initialization command file sets the System date from the AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board and optionally selects European date format and or automatic date rollover at midnight HINTS RESTRICTIONS To set the system date and to reset the date on the AM 120 board you must be logged into the System Operator s account 1 2 or must use DATE in response to a K command that appears before the final SYSTEM command in the system initialization command file You must use DATE from within the system initialization command file to set the system date from the AM 120 board
177. ch the job is attached 3 the device and account into which the job is Logged 4 the octal memory address where the Job Control Block for the job is located 5 the terminal status for that job 6 the last program run by the job before you used the SYSTAT command 7 the number of bytes of memory in decimal allocated for that job and 8 the octal memory address at which the job s memory partition begins including the bank number in which that partition resides if the system bank switches memory SYSTAT also tells you which devices are mounted on the system and how many blocks on those devices are free for use 2 If you wish a brief status display use the N switch This tells SYSTAT to omit the list of devices on the system and blocks free on those devices ERRORS SYSTAT generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS Returns your terminal to AMOS command level EXAMPLES A typical SYSTAT display might Look like this Status of AMOS Version 4 4 JoBt TERMI DSK4 310 2 023056 RN SYSTAT 50176 bytes at 0 35400 TER not logged in ytes at T JOB TERM2 DSK1 20 1 024166 TI VUE 48896 bytes at 2 40000 SPOOL NULL DSK0 1 2 024632 EW LPTSPL 4352 bytes at 3 167000 obs on system DSKO 26254 Blocks free locks free DSK2 17121 Blocks free DSK3 16542 Blocks free DSK4 20795 Blocks free DSK5 3642 Blocks free AMS not mounte AMS not mounted 8 devices on system Changed 1 May 1980 SYSTAT Cont d Page 3
178. cified because that job is not at AMOS command level or is not in terminal input mode 2Job has no terminal attached The job with which you want to communicate has not been attached to a terminal there is nothing on which to display your message Guarded You are trying to send a message to a job that is protected by a program that guards it from messages CHARACTERISTICS Requires that the job with whom you want to communicate be on the same system as your terminal not be guarded and be in terminal input mode or at AMOS command level Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 set FUNCTION You can use SET to choose various system terminal handling options for your terminal or to view the options previously set You can use SET to specify the type of form that ought to be mounted on a specific system printer Using SET you can also set the bits per inch rate for reading or recording a specific magnetic tape unit HINTS RESTRICTIONS SET sets various flaas in your job table so that each user of the system can choose different terminal handling options For example the default number base the system uses for numeric display is octal You can use the SET command to change the base that the system uses for your job s numeric displays by using the SET HEX or SET OCTAL commands You can also use SET to specify the kind of form you want mounted on a printer The PRINT command then checks to ma
179. command Line type 1 TRMDEF 2 a terminal name 3 the name of the interface driver program the terminal uses 4 the name of the terminal driver program the terminal uses 5 the maximum terminal Line width 6 the size of the terminal input buffer and 7 the size of the terminal output buffer Separate the items on the TRMDEF command Line with commas For example TRMDEF TERMS AM300 2 6 SOROC 160 100 100 The next few paragraphs discuss the elements of the TRMDEF command line Terminal name A one to six character name you want to assign to the terminal This is the name used by the ATTACH and PRINT commands and any commands that specify the TRM device Changed 1 May 1980 TRMDEF Cont d ERRORS Page 3 Interface Type of 1 0 board to which the terminal is connected For example this might be an AM 300 or a PS3 This telts the system what kind of interface driver program to load in for the terminal ALL terminal interface drivers must be in account DSK0 1 6 and have a file extension of IDV After the Interface enter an equal sign and the number of the port on the interface to which the terminal is connected For example AM300 2 tells the system that the terminal is connected to port 2 on the AM 300 interface board The AM 300 board also allows you to include an optional code that selects the terminal baud rate If you include tne optional buad rate code place it after the 1 0 port number Separate
180. command above defines a bitmap area of 39 words for device AMS The two logical units that will be sharing this bitmap are drives zero and one that is AMSO and AMS1 2 Each logical unit of a physical device may have its own bitmap area For example you could split the command above into BITMAP AMS 39 0 BITMAP AMS 39 1 3 You must have one BITMAP command in your system intialization command file for each type of disk device defined in the DEVTBL commands ERRORS System memory not allocated monitor memory will be used You tried to place a bitmap in suitchable system memory but BITMAP was not able to find any such memory It therefore placed the bitmap in the area of memory reserved for the monitor thus increasing the size of your monitor CHARACTERISTICS Acts both as a user command and as a system initialization command Changed 30 April 1981 bmvr FUNCTION Programs 2708 type EPROM on a CROMEMCO BYTESAVER PROM programmer board EPROMs are Erasable Programmable Read Only Memories HINTS RESTRICTIONS Programs only one PROM at a time Program must not be greater than 1K in size or it will not fit in the PROM Enter the PROM address in the number base that the system is using for your numeric displays usuatly octal Type SET followed by a RETURN to see if the system is using octal or hexadecimal for your numeric displays FORMAT BMVR Filespec o PROM ADDRESS PROM address Y where Filespec
181. conventionally do not contain printable ASCII characters and you may not look at them This file is probably a machine language program or a data file USERNAME not in the User Directory You tried to send a message to someone but EMAIL does not recognize the user ID you addressed the message to Check with the AlphaMAIL Operator for an up to date list of all AlphaMAIL users FILENAME not found An error occurred when EMAIL transferred a message Check with the AlphaMAIL Operator CHARACTERISTICS EMAIL is the interface to the AlphaMAIL System Your memory partition must be at least 32K to run EMAIL and the disk must not be write protected EMAIL is re entrant and re usable To exit to AMOS Level from EMAIL use the X command To see the EMAIL main menu again use the command 30 April 1981 erase FUNCTION Deletes one or more files from the disk HINTS RESTRICTIONS You may use the standard wildcard symbols in your file specifications CERASE is a wildcard file command Refer to Section 9 4 Erasing Files ERASE in the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 for more information on using ERASE NOTE ERASE recognizes the ersatz devices for example ERASE BAS BADGER SBR and the special device MEM MEM must be defined in your system device table See the DEVTBL reference sheet Examples of special uses ERASE MEM Filespecs performs the same function as DEL Filespecs ERASE BAK M
182. cord Display the previous location Display location zero in the record that is display the first two bytes of data in the record No operation Cancel current command line and display XXX followed by a TAB Rewrite the modified record and exit Exit without updating record DSKDDT error message is a backspace question mark and a tab s that DSKDDT didn t understand your command lso see some of the standard system error messages that result nvalid device specification For example Cannot READ Devn device does not exist C specif Canno heck your spelling AMOS does not recognize the device you ied For example did you enter DKS1 instead of DSK1 t READ Devn disk is not mounted D SKDDT can t read the device because it is not mounted Use the MOUNT command to mount the disk 1 October 1979 OSKDDT Cont d Page 3 0 CHARACTERISTICS Allows you to examine and modify disk records Fixes most disk errors by rewriting the record and so recomputing the Cyclic Redundancy Check The CRC is a computed value based on the numeric data in the record it is used to verify the contents of the record Returns your terminal to the AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 dskdmp FUNCTION Displays physical disk records on your terminal in numeric form HINTS RESTRICTIONS The system internally represents all data in numeric form The DSKDMP display shows you the data in the
183. d that is can be used for input as well as output if it has a video display via a CRT or other video display system or is a hard copy printer type terminal how much to offset the CRT screen cursor from home when positioning it and whether the terminal takes the row or the column coordinate first and the number of rows and the number of columns on the CRT screen If you are using NEWTRM to build a hard copy terminal driver NEWTRM goes from this point to final processing NEWTRM Cont d Page 3 ERRORS c In the third group of questions NEWTRM asks what special functions are implemented by the terminal and how the driver can access them These questions ask about function characters delays between function characters characters to discard and the function key Leadin code In this group NEWTRM asks you a repetitive set of questions about 28 separate commands These commands are the TCRT commands supported by Alpha Micro The terminal driver built by NEWTRM will support any or all of these features which your terminal implements NOTE If you wish to implement other commands you must modify the source file NEWTRM creates to contain those commands d The fourth group correlates your terminal s function commands if any to the Alpha Micro text editor called AlphaVUE first you enter the decimal ASCII value transmitted by a function key on your terminal then you enter the actual VUE control character you want
184. d SAVE reference sheets For more information on MONGEN refer to the document Generating System Monitors DWM 00100 31 in the System Operator s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet DEFAULTS The default device and account specification for the monitor file is DSK0 1 4 The default system monitor is DSKO SYSTEM MONL1 4J The default device and account specification for the disk driver is DSKO 1 6 The default disk driver file extension is DVR FORMAT MONGEN OPERATION 1 Type MONGEN followed by a RETURN MONGEN 2 MONGEN now asks you for the specification of the system monitor you want to modify INPUT MONITOR NAME 1 October 1979 MONGEN Cont d Page 2 Enter the file specification of the monitor program you are going to use If you want to use DSKO SYSTEM MONL1 41 you may enter just a RETURN because that file specification is the default The default monitor device and account is DSK0 1 41 MONGEN Locates the specified monitor and loads it into your memory partition Be sure that you have enough memory to accommodate the monitor and disk drivers as well as the MONGEN program itself usually at least 16K of memory 3 Now MONGEN asks for the specification of the disk driver you want to insert into the monitor NEW DISK DRIVER NAME Enter the file specification of the correct disk driver program You may NOT enter just a RETURN The default device and account specificat
185. d then asks you for a password If you do not want the account to have a password enter just a RETURN Any password you enter must be six characters or less Change the password of account p pn If the account exists SYSACT asks for a new password 0 6 alphanumeric characters Delete account p pn If the account exists and it has no files SYSACT deletes it Exit to monitor SYSACT rewrites the MFD incorporating your changes before it takes your terminal back to AMOS command levet Display a List of the SYSACT commands Initialize disk Erases the data on the disk including the contents of files and directories Initializes bitmap SYSACT asks you to confirm this command before it will initialize the disk Initializing the disk clears all files enter Y to confirm Unless you enter a Y and a RETURN SYSACT will not initialize the disk instead it says XNo initialization performed and prompts you for another command _ Display a List of all of the accounts in the MFD and their passwords For example L GED 1 2 71 6 noB Account already exists You ve tried to create an account that already exists Use L to see what accounts already exist in the MFD Account does not exist You ve tried to delete an account that doesn t exist or you ve tried to change the password of a nonexistent account Changed 1 May 1980 SYSACT Cont d Page 3 Illegal account PPN format is P PN P octal O to 377 You
186. display a list of all of the topics for which help is available The second format tells HELP to display the file that contains the information on the requested topic The HLP file bears the name of the topic about which it contains information OPERATION 1 Type HELP followed by a RETURN to see a list of the available topics For example HELP Help is available for APPEND BAUD copy DEL ERASE__ LOG u 1 October 1979 HELP Cont d Page 2 2 HELP first lists the HLP files in account DSK0 7 13 then it prints a blank Line and lists the HLP files in the project Library account for the account you are currently logged into Last it prints a blank line and lists the HLP files in the account you are logged into Type HELP followed by the name of a specific topic to see the text file associated with that topic HELP VUE 2 Now the screen clears and you see one or more screensful of information on the topic you have chosen ERRORS The only time that HELP generates an error message is if you ask it for information on a topic that it knows nothing about in that case it says I m sorry I can t help you Then it displays a list of the topics for which help is available CHARACTERISTICS Displays a list of topics about which it knows information and when asked for a specific topic displays the text file that contains the information on that topic Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 Octobe
187. display your old or your new password as you type them ERRORS You can encounter the following error messages 2Cannot WRITE Devn write protected You tried to change the password of an account on a write protected disk Try again but first write enable the disk evn is the specification of the device holding the write protected disk Bad password Either you entered your old password incorrectly or when asked to verify your new password you made a typing mistake In either case PASS does not change your old password Try again CHARACTERISTICS Protects system security by not displaying your old or new password Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 pc FUNCTION Compiles a PASCAL program by invoking the AlphaPASCAL compiler CMPILR HINTS RESTRICTIONS PC is a command file which makes the AlphaPASCAL compiler CMPILR easier to use in many applications It first invokes CMPILR giving it a filename you specify Then it tells CMPILR that you want the diagnostic display on the screen as CMPILR compiles the PASCAL program You may enter a complete file specification including the device specification filename extension and proiect programmer number of the PASCAL file you wish to compile For more information on compiling a PASCAL program refer to the ALPhaPASCAL User s Manual OWM 00100 07 FORMAT PC Filespec REN DEFAULTS If you omit the device and account
188. dn t load TODCNV TIME couldn t find TODCNV PRG in system memory in your memory partition or in the disk account DSK0 1 4 Check your System Disk to make sure that it contains TODCNV PRG 1 41 You may also see this message if there is not enough room in your memory partition to load TODCNV You can use the MAP command to see what modules are in your memory partition if there are modules in your memory that you don t need make more room by using the DEL command to delete them Or check with the System Operator to see if you can expand the size of your memory partition Improper time format You entered the time of day in an illegal format For example you may have used slashes instead of colons Look at the FORMAT section above for information on the proper TIME command line format Piease enter Y or N You have entered an invalid response to the question Do you wish to reset the AM 120 board also Enter only a Y or an N You must be logged in to 1 2 to reset the date You may only use TIME to set the time if you are logged into 1 21 or if you are using TIME in response to a K command that appears before the final SYSTEM commmand in your system initialization command file CHARACTERISTICS Displays the time of day in AM PM format If you are logged into 1 2 you can use TIME to change the system time of day using military format or AM PM format Also allows you to reset the time stored by the AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Co
189. ds to AMOS the command Line you ve previously saved 1 October 1979 U Cont d Page 2 3 Io save more than one command line at a time Make copies of the U PRG program under different names then you can use those programs to save command lines too For example if you make a copy of U PRG under the name A PRG you can save an AMOS command line by typing A Command L ineo The command Line is now temporarily saved in the memory module A SCS To invoke it type EN You may copy U PRG under any name you choose the new program builds a memory module to hold the command Line you save that has the same name as the program with an SCS extension ERRORS LNO PREVIOUS COMMAND You ve typed U and a RETURN but you have not previously saved a command Line U has no command Line to repeat back to you CHARACTERISTICS You can save as many command Lines as you wish by making copies of U PRG under different names then using those copies of the program When you turn off or reset the system or when you erase all modules from your memory partition the command Lines you ve saved disappear The U command returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 Y FUNCTION Creates and edits text files HINTS RESTRICTIONS VUE is a screen oriented text editor You see the text you are editing displayed on the screen and move the screen cursor to the location in your file that you want to change
190. e D Display data in decimal Takes either argument specifying how many locations to translate or an argument that gives the expression to translate e g xD or exp D Display data in octal Uses same format as D command H Display data in hex Uses same format as D command Display data in current location in unpacked RADSO s Display data in current location as two ASCII characters H Display data in current location as two eight bit bytes A Display a string of ASCII characters in current location or at location of symbolic argument String ends with a null byte B Define new symbol Value attached to symbol is Last location examined e g tag x Examine register contents Takes register argument followed by equal sign e g XRO C Exit DDT RUBOUT Cancel current Line of input ERRORS If DDT does not understand a command it displays a symbol Compare your command with the instructions in the AMOS Assembly Language Programmer s Reference Manual DWM 00100 43 Section 9 4 to see if the format you used was correct You can also see these error messages Filespec NOT FOUND DDT wasn t able to find the file you specified Check your spelling and make sure you specified the correct device and account CAN T SINGLE STEP THROUGH SVC You cannot use the X command to single step through a supervisor call You must skip over the call by placing a breakpoint after the call and its arguments Then us
191. e default Optional elements of a command Line When these symbols appear in a sample command Line they designate elements that you may omit from the command Line Underlined characters indicate those characters that AMOS prints on your terminal display For example throughout this document you see an underlined dot which indicates the prompt symbol that the operating system prints on your terminal when you are at AMOS command Level Carriage return symbol The RET symbol or curly arrow marks the place in your keyboard entry to type a RETURN i e hit the key Labeled RETURN For example LOGOFF ED tells you After an AMOS prompt type LOGOFF and a RETURN Indicates a Control character As you enter characters from the keyboard directly to AMOS the system usually displays these characters on your terminal If you type a Control C you see a C on your terminal display Refer to the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 for more information on Control characters Changed 30 April 1981 u INTRODUCTION TO THE MANUAL Page 1 3 1 3 CONCEPTS Below we define several of the terms that appear frequently in the command reference sheets that follow For more information on system concepts read Part I Getting Started in the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 Ve AMOS COMMAND LEVEL When you are at AMOS command level you are communicating directly with AMOS the Alpha Micro Operating System and not with a progr
192. e AMOS User s Guide for a full description of a banner page An operation switch NOBANNER or NOB Don t print a banner page An operation switch HEADER or H Print a page header at the top of every page of the Listing Page headers give the name of the file being printed the date and the current page number A file switch NOHEADER or NOH Don t print page headers A file switch FORMFEED or FF Print a final form feed at the end of each Listing A file switch NOFORMFEEb or NOF Don t print a final form feed at the end of each Listing A file switch LPP n Maximum number of Lines to print on each page If HEADER is set PRINT prints a form feed when it outputs a full page and then it prints a page header A file switch WIDTH n or WI n The page width in characters PRINT uses this value in printing page headers WIDTH value must be between 80 and 132 inclusive A file suitch Changed 30 April 1981 PRINT Cont d Page 3 WAIT or WA If you try to enter more print requests into a printer queue than PRINT can handle PRINT discards the extra print requests The WAIT option tells PRINT not to discard the extra print requests but to reinsert them into the queue as PRINT finishes processing earlier requests This option ties up your terminal while it waits for room to be made in the queue An operation switch FORMS x or FO x Tells PRINT the form on which you want to print
193. e DATE in these formats or must be using the DATE command as response to a K command which appears before the final SYSTEM command in the system initialization command file You may use the fourth format from within your system initialization command file to set the system date from the AM 120 board and may optionally specify switches that select European format for date display and automatic date rollover at midnight DEFAULTS If the system initialization command file has not specified European date format the default display mode is American format You may use the E switch to change the display mode to European format if you are logged into 1 21 OPTIONS You may select the following options by specifying the appropriate switches E Tells DATE to display the date in European format and that all subsequent date entries will be in European format Must be logged into 1 21 to use E R Automatic rollover Tells DATE to automatically increment the date and day of the week at midnight for example at 24 00 01 October 5th becomes October th and Tuesday becomes Wednesday Uses an extra 350 bytes of system memory for a module named DATROL SYS You may only use the R switch when you use DATE from within the system initialization command file before the final SYSTEM command Changed 30 April 1981 DATE Cont d Page 3 OPERATION At AMOS command level when logged into any account 1 To display the date type DA
194. e execution You can resume execution of that command file by using the CONT command May return your terminal to AMOS command Level if you choose to abort command file execution 1 May 1980 FUNCTION Allows you to change your account password HINTS RESTRICTIONS PASS cannot change the password of an account on a write protected disk so make sure that the correct device is write enabled A password must be six characters or less in length PASS does not check the Length of the password that you enter Remember that PASS cuts your password off at the sixth character To use PASS you must be logged into the system under the PPN whose password you want to change FORMAT PASS D2vn Y where Devn is the specification of the logical unit that contains your account DEFAULTS Nur PASS assumes he logical unit you are currently Logged into OPERATION 1 Type PASS optionally followed by a device name Then hit RETURN For example PASS DSK1 2 PASS asks you for your old password and your new password Then it asks you to verify your new password in other words to type your new password again PASS Old password New password Verify password EXIT PASS now changes your password displays the EXIT message and take you back to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 PASS Cont d Page 2 3 So that your password remains a secret to other users PASS does not
195. e external Library cannot be run with an older version of that Library or with a completely different Library instead you must re link the Program with the current external library you want to use Error messaces may also take the form Message in Function or proredure at IPC xxx within Filespec where Message indicates the error that occurred Function or procedure indicates the function or procedure in which the error occurred IPC xxx indicates the Interpreter Program Counter number i e the place in the program at which the error occurred Lastly FRUN gives the Filespec the file specification of the program you were executing For example 2SQRT x where x lt D in PROGRAM at IPC 64 within TEST PCF kir For a List of the possible error messages see the section titled Error Handling Procedures and Variables in Chapter 14 of the AlphaPASCAL User s Manual You may also see standard AMOS monitor messages For example Cannot OPEN filespec file not found PRUN cou not 1nd the program file you specified Make sure that you are logged into the proper account and device Check the section titled DEFAULTS above for information on the default device and account specifications used by PRUN Cannot OPEN filespec device does not exist You included a device specification in your file specification but that device does not exist Make sure that you have correctly specified the device e q make sure t
196. e files it tells you both the old and the new names of the files At the end of the process it tells you how many files were renamed 2 If you use the QUERY option RENAME asks you to confirm the renamings To request confirmation of each renaming place the option directly after the RENAME Command to request confirmation of the renaming of a particular file place the Q option after the specification of that file RENAME Q BASTXT WRKFIL WRKFIL BAS to BASTXT BAS Y WRKFIL RUN to BASTXT RUN Y WRKTXT TXT to BASTXT TXT2N WRKTXT LST to BASTXT LST Y Total o files renamed AMRKTXT RENAME FTX x TXT LST Q Y REPORT TXT to REPORT FTX TABLE TXT to REPORT FTX REPLST LST to REPLST FTX Y TABLST LST to TABLST FTX Y Total of 4 files renamed Answer the question mark with a Y for YES or an N for NO do not type a RETURN after your answer You may type a Control C to stop further renamings and return to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 G RENAME Cont d Page 3 ERRORS Cannot find DSKO SCNWLD SYSL1 4J or MEM SCNWLD SYS RENAME needs this file to process wildcard symbols in file specifications The system can t find the file or you do not have enough room in your memory partition to Load the file Specification error RENAME doesn t understand the format of your command Line the symbol points to the Location of the item that confused it Cannot READ Devn device does not exist
197. e head load time edit the SYSTEM INI with one of the system text editors At any point after the last SYSTEM command enter HEDLOD followed by the number of clock ticks you want the AM 200 to keep the heads loaded after each data transfer For example HEDLOD 1800 C 1 October 1979 HEDLOD Cont d Page 2 The example above tells the system to keep the disk drive heads loaded for 1800 clock ticks 30 seconds when the real time clock is operating at 60 Hz after each data transfer ERRORS HEDLOD generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS HEDLOD is both a user command and a system initialization command The use of HEDLOD in the system initialization command file requires that the CLKFRQ command also be in the SYSTEM INI Returns the terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 help Nx FUNCTION Displays text files on your terminal that contain information about the system HINTS RESTRICTIONS The HELP command operates in two modes 1 to tell you what files containing information on the system are available HLP files and 2 to display a specific HLP file on your terminal HELP Looks first for the specified HLP file in the System HELP File Library DSKO 7 1 next it searches in your project library account Cyour proj 01 and if unsuccessful there it looks on the device and account that you are currently logged into FORMAT HELP D or HELP Topic IS The first format tells HELP to
198. e memory board if it is Lit this indicates that the system halted because of a double bit memory error If frequent double bit memory errors occur you may want to replace the memory board at fault MEMERR generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS Should be included in your SYSTEM INI if you are using Piiceon 32K word memory boards Signals double bit memory errors by halting the system Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level memory FUNCTION Allocates memory to your job HINTS RESTRICTIONS IMPORTANT NOTE Do NOT use the MEMORY command on systems that use memory management that is systems that bank switch memory unless your job is in Bank Number Zero of that system To allocate memory on a bank switched system use the JOBMEM command See the JOBMEM reference sheet You may not increase your memory allocation beyond its current amount unless you first use the MEMORY O command If you allocate yourself zero memory the first time you try to run a command or program AMOS will reassign to you as much free memory as it has available for your memory partition You cannot increase your memory allocation if the other users on the system have already been altocated the rest of memory that is you cannot take for yourself memory that has already been allocated elsewhere ALL memory Locations in your job s memory partition must be contiguous That is if you want to allocate 16K more memory to your job 1
199. e operating system skeleton monitor DSKO SYSTEM MONL1 41 into memory SYSTEM MON then brings up the system under the control of your system initialization command file SYSTEM INI Once the system is up and running you see the AMOS prompt ERRORS WNGLOD generates no error messages However if it does not find SYSTEM MONL1 41 and SYSTEM IN1 1 4 the start up procedure fails 1 October 1979 WNGLOD Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Boots the system from an AMS or STD format Wangco floppy disk if the Wangco disk drive is the System Device Returns your terminal to AMOS command tevel if the system resets successfully 1 October 1979 wng210 FUNCTION Bootstrap loader program for a system that uses the Wangco floppy disk as the System Device running under the AM 210 floppy disk controller HINTS RESTRICTIONS The WNG210 program when contained on a 2716 PROM allows the system to boot off a System Disk on a Wangco floppy disk when a hardware reset occurs that is when you hit the RESET button The program is also in account DSK0 1 4 of the System Disk You may use WNG210 at AMOS command level to reset the system if your System Device is a Wangco floppy disk drive The memory partition of the job that uses the WNG210 command MUST be in Bank Zero if your system bank switches memory For information on bank switched systems refer to the document Memory Management Option DWM 00100 10
200. e the P command to skip to that location At that point you can continue single stepping 200T INTERNAL BUSERR A bus error occurred within the DOT program itself This error was not caused by your program BUSERR AT MONITOR PC nnnn A bus error occurred but was not caused by DOT Your program is probably at fault The number that appears in the message tells you what memory address was Loaded into the Program Counter when the error occurred Changed 30 April 1981 DDT Cont d Page 5 CHARACTERISTICS Allows you to set breakpoints modify and examine contents of registers program locations and absolute memory addresses Changed 30 April 1981 FUNCTION Erases modules from your memory partition HINTS RESTRICTIONS When you load a file into memory from the disk e g a program that copy in memory is called a module DEL erases such modules from your memory partition NOT from the disk You may use the wildcard symbols and in your file specifications FORMAT DEL Filespeci Filespec2 Filespechn 9 where Filespec1 Filespec2 is a list of valid file specifications that select the modules you want to erase from your memory partition DEFAULTS DEL assumes a file extension of OPERATION 1 Type DEL followed by one or more file specifications then type a RETURN For example DEL CREATE D CREATE PRG CREATE SYM DEL erases from your memory partition the modules selected by your s
201. e using Remember to make note of the size of the data records you write to tape and the number of records you write per tape block when you read the data back to a disk file you will need that information You can read one file after another on the magnetic tape by using TAPE several times in a row without rewinding the tape You can also use the SKIP command to skip over files See the SKIP reference sheet NOTE Some tapes contain a one block header file at the front of each file You can skip over this header block by using TAPE once or via 1 October 1979 TAPE Cont d Page 2 the SKIP command To rewind tapes use the REWIND command See the y REWIND reference sheet If at any time you make a mistake in answering TAPE questions you may type a Control C to exit TAPE and return to AMOS command level FORMAT TAPE Y OPERATION 1 Type TAPE followed by a RETURN TAPE Y 2 Now the screen clears and TAPE begins to ask a series of questions clearing the screen after each display This is the magnetic tape program It can copy files from disk to tape or it can copy files rom tape to d sk ES Which do you want to do 1 copy a file from disk to tape Y 2 copy a file from tape to disk Type the number of the option you wish Answer Enter the appropriate number followed by a RETURN to select the function you want to perform You may only enter a 1 or a 2 any other answer will cause TAPE to displa
202. eceive mail H Holding message maintenance E Display statistics EPO Operator only Display command menu x Return to AMOS OPR gt 2 Select one of the functions listed in the menu by entering the appropriate command code after the OPR prompt symbol OPR gt then type a RETURN For example to look at or change the AlphaMAIL User Directory use the A command OPR gt A RET Now you see the Directory maintenance menu Most of the OPR commands will cause a new menu to be displayed along with the prompt symbol for that particular portion of OPR For example the Directory maintenance menu looks Like this ACT Version 1 0 COMMAND CODES L List User Directory P Print User Directory A Add new account to User director D user name Delete this user s account from Director user name Modify this user s account in Director Verify User Director Display command menu Return to OPR main menu Return to AMOS x o ACT gt To return to the OPR main menu from any OPR submenu enter a Q followed by a RETURN For example ACT gt Q 30 April 1981 U OPR Cont d ERRORS Page 3 3 To exit from OPR or any OPR submenu enter an X followed by a RETURN For example OPR gt X GET OPR now returns you to AMOS command Level Below are some of the error messages you can see when using OPR Invalid command Type for help At any time you may ask ORP to re display the current menu by entering a followed by
203. elects the portion of the command file you want to branch to The optional comment must begin directly after the Argument That is there must be no space between the end of the Argument and the semicolon that begins the comment The Argument must not end with trailing blanks arguments must end either with a RETURN or a semicolon which designates the start of a comment The label referenced by Argument must exist in a later portion of the command file The label uses this format LABEL or LABEL The label must be the only thing on its command Line If the label does not begin with a semicolon it is not a comment therefore it must be an executable command file element e g a program name or a command file specification NOTE If the label is a comment the Argument on the GOTO command line that referenced it must not begin with a semicolon even though the label does 1 May 1980 GOTO Cont d Page 2 You may begin a label with a semicolon spaces or spaces followed by a semicolon these are all ignored when GOTO compares the Argument to the label it selects Remember that if a Label begins with a semicolon you must not place any spaces between the semicolon and the characters that make up the rest of the label That is NOFILE is a valid label but NOFILE is not OPERATION 1 At the place in your command file where you want to transfer control enter GOTO followed by the argument that is the name of t
204. emory You ve specified a valid bank number but it is not addressed for the memory addresses you ve requested Check the addressing of your memory boards and the MEMDEF statements in your SYSTEM INI Requested allocation would overlap job JOBNAM You must be careful not to allocate a memory address to one job that is already allocated to another JOBNAM specifies the job whose memory partition is being overlapped CHARACTERISTICS Used in systems that bank switch memory Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 FUNCTION AL Lows you to determine the priority of your job to change that priority and to examine and change the priorities of other jobs HINTS RESTRICTIONS In a timesharing environment each user receives a certain number of real time clock ticks before the CPU moves on to another job If you increase this unit of time called a quantum for a particular user you speed up his job and consequently slow down the jobs of the other users on the system Increasing the number of quanta the CPU spends on a job is called increasing the job s priority You should not change your job s priority or the priority of other jobs on the system unless there is a very good reason for it indiscriminate changes in job priorities can cause you to be unpopular with other users on the system The maximum priority is 65535 the minimum priority is zero The JOBPRI command value tells the system to add that many cl
205. enames that begin with numbers come after filenames that begin with letters IMPORTANT NOTE Do not use DIRSEQ while other jobs are accessing the disk FORMAT DIRSEQ Devn 2 where Devn specifies the logical unit containing the directories you want to alphabetize DEFAULTS Ko If you do not supply a device DIRSEQ uses the device you are currently Logged into OPERATION 1 Type DIRSEQ optionally followed by a device specification type a RETURN DIRSEQ SMD1 D 2 DIRSEQ orders the entries in the directories on the disk When it is finished it displays an AMOS prompt DIRSEA I Use the DIR command to see a display of your alphabetically ordered account directory ERRORS DIRSEQ generates no error messages of its Own but you may see some of the standard system error messages For example 1 October 1979 DIRSEQ Cont d Page 2 Cannot INIT Devn device does not exist The system cannot find the specified device Check your spelling To see a list of the valid system devices type DEVTBL followed by a RETURN Cannot READ Devn disk is not mounted The system cannot read the specified device because it is not mounted Use the MOUNT command to mount that logical unit CHARACTERISTICS Alphabetizes all directories on a specified disk DO NOT use DIRSEQ on a disk while other jobs are accessing that disk Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 do
206. endix numbers ERRORS Below we List the TXTFMT error messages you are encounter For a full List of TXTFMT error messages TXTFMT User s Manual Changed 30 April 1981 chapter and most likely to refer to the TXTFMT Cont d Page 3 Illegal command X TXTFMT did not recognize a command X that you had in the text file For example TXTFMT SRCFIL FNX Processing SRCFIL FNX 1llegal command CHEPTER TXTFMT inserts the illegal command into your LST file so that you can locate the problem Check your spelling XLine too long remainder of line ignored TXTFMT found a line in your text file of more than 300 characters It ignored everything past the 300th character You can also see the usual SyStem error messages For example Cannot OPEN Filespec file not found You tried to format a file that does not exist Check your spelling Make sure that you specified the proper account and device CHARACTERISTICS Produces a formatted LST file does not change the input files Changed 30 April 1981 FUNCTION Displays a text file on your terminal screen HINTS RESTRICTIONS If the file display covers more than one screen page type a Control s to freeze the display type a Control to release the display Type a Control C to interrupt the display TYPE works only on sequential files Use TYPE only on files in which the data is in ASCII form i e files with the extensions TXT LST BAS MAC
207. enerate directory Listing in four columns Operation switch WIDE n or Win Generate directory listing in n columns Operation switch HASH or H Displays a hashmark for each file computed value based on characteristics of the file serves to help you distinguish between file versions File switch CONTIGUOUS or C Displays a C next to the extension of contiguous files The directory display thus can tell you which files are sequential and which are random contiguous Operation switch BASE or B Displays the base disk address of the file or base memory address if you say DIR B MEM A file switch NOBASE or NOB Turns off B switch A file switch FULL or F Same as saying HASH BASE CONTIGUOUS OPERATION 1 Type DIR optionally followed by a Listfilespec and an equal sign if you want the directory listing in a file and one or more file specifications You may include one or more switches Type a RETURN For example DIR VRTUAL PRGL110 91 DPL PRGLI e 2 DIR displays directory Listings for the files you specified See EXAMPLES below It gives you the following information 1 October 1979 dirsac FUNCTION Alphabetizes the entries in all of the directories on a given logical unit HINTS RESTRICTIONS Alphabetizes ALL directories on a disk NOTE By alphabetizing we mean that DIRSEQ arranges the directory entries in order based on their ASCII values This means that fil
208. eports back with some statistics b 1 October 1979 Sorted n records This statistic tells you how many logical records SORT processed n Runs SORT tells you how many passes it made through the data to sort the file If the entire file fits into memory SORT performs the sort in memory and you see 1 RUN if your file is too large to fit into memory all at one time SORT performs the sort on the disk a modified poly phase merge sort and you see that SORT performed its sort in more than one Run n Key comparisons m per record SORT tells you how many comparisons it made while doing the sort an indication of how out of order the file was hh mm ss Elapsed time n ms per record Elapsed time rather than compute time taken by the file sort Elapsed time will be affected by the number of other users on the system and on the type of processing they are doing NS SORT Cont d Page 3 ERRORS You can see the following error messages when using SORT Enter A or D SORT wants to know whether you want to sort the key in ascending A or descending D order based on the ASCII values of the characters in the data record You must enter an A or a D Insufficient memory for sort SORT must be able to fit at least five of your data records into memory to perform a sort if it cannot you see this message Record size must be gt 0 Key size must be gt 0 Key size must be less than record size SORT c
209. equential or Linked file L or a random or contiguous file C Finally TAPDIR gives the date and time of the backup For example in the display above TAPDIR tells us that the file NBSORT MAC is the second file on the tape that it was originally backed up from DSK0 140 1 that it contains 4 disk blocks that it is a linked file and that it was backed up May 14th at 14 52 25 At the end of the directory display TAPDIR tells you how many files were Listed in the display 30 April 1981 TAPDIR Cont d Page 3 4 To create a disk file containing the directory display specify a Listfile For example TAPDIR ALL C DAT E Enter tape unit number MTU4 GEN creates the file DIRECT LST in the account and device you are logged into that contains a directory display for all DAT files on the tape in drive MTU4 NOTE If your printer has been defined on your system as a terminal you may send the display directly to a printer by using an output specification of TRM Printer name where printer name is the name assigned to the printer by the TRMDEF command in the system initialization command file ERRORS Cannot find DSKO SCNWLD SYSC1 4 or MEM SCNWLD SYS The TAPOIR program needs this file to be able to process wildcarrd symbols in you file specification This message can indicate that SCNWLD SYS does not exist ot that you do not have enouugh memory to load the file into your partition Cannot READ D
210. er The initial tape density at the time of system start up is 1600 BPI OPTIONS The current options that you may choose are CTRLC Enable Controt C the user interrupt command NOCTRLC Disable Control C the user interrupt command OCTAL Display all non decimal numeric displays in octal HEX Display all non decimal numeric displays in hexadecimal ECHO Display terminal input NOECHO Silence terminal input DSKERR Report soft disk errors and retries that occur NODSKERR Silence reports of soft disk errors and retries VERIFY Verify every write operation by re reading the data and making sure it has a correct checksum This does not compare the written data with data in memory Only supported by the AM 500 and AM 410 NOVERIFY Don t verify write operations GUARD Don t allow other terminals to send messages to your terminal via the SEND command NOGUARD Allow other terminals to send messages to your terminal FORMS Specify the kind of form to assign to a specific printer BPI Sets the magnetic tape unit bits per inch rate for data reading or recording on tape Remember These options are only set for the job that used the SET command OPERATION 1 Type SET followed by a RETURN SET Current settings are OCTAL ECHO DSKERR NOVERIFY NOGUARD CTRLC SET displays the options currently in effect Changed 30 April 1981 SET Cont d Page 3 ERRORS 2 To change the SET options type SET followed by an
211. error messages see Appendix C of the AlphaPASCAL User s Guide DWM 00100 08 CHARACTERISTICS Creates an executable PCF file by compiling and Linking a single source PAS file Invokes tte PASCAL compiler CMPILR Causes one PASCAL program to be compiled Causes CMFILR to send diagnostic information to your terminal display Erases the PCF version of the specified file Invokes the PASCAL Linker PLINK Links the compiled version of the specified file into a resolved executable program fite 30 April 1981 pcu FUNCTION Compiles and updates a PASCAL program by invoking the AlphaPASCAL compiler CMPILR to compile a specific module and invoking the AlphaPASCAL Linker PLINK to Link the module into the program file HINTS RESTRICTIONS PCU is a command file which makes the AlphaPASCAL compiler CMPILR and the AlphaPASCAL Linker PLINK easier to use when compiling a single module and updating a program file You supp y PCU with the name of the module you want to compile and Link fo lowed by the name of the PCF file you want to Link the module into PCU invokes CMPILR giving it the module name you specify PCU tells CMPILR that you want the diagnostic display on the screen as CMPILR compiles the module PCU invokes PLINK giving it the filename of the PCF file you specify as its code file PCU tells PLINK to update the PCF file PCU tells PLINK not to change the standard library code file for the PCF f
212. ers of the indices 3 You can supply wildcarded file specifications For example ISMFIX DSK5 L110 10 4 If all of your ISAM files are on line you can rebuild them all by Logging into 1 2 and entering ISMFIX ALL O ERRORS An error occurs if both the IDA and IDX portions of an ISAM file are not on line when you run ISMFIX on that ISAM file You see a file not found error message If you include a wildcarded PPN symbol LJ in your Filespec but are not logged into 1 2 you see a Protection violation error message if ISMFIX tries to re write a file that is not in the project you are logged into As ISMFIX re positions re discovered indices ISAM errors can occur In this case you see the standard ISAM error messages For example if ISMFIX relocates a key that you had already re inserted in the index file yourself you get a duplicate key error message You might also see an index file full message If you get an ISAM error your best course is to re build the ISAM file from scratch CHARACTERISTICS Understands the wildcard symbols 1 and ALL You must use ISMFIX on all ISAM files that were processed with 4 2 ISAM jobmem FUNCTION Allows you to determine what memory addresses are allocated to a job and allows you to change that allocation For use in memory management systems that is systems that bank switch memory HINTS RESTRICTIONS If you are not familiar with bank switching me
213. es Those pages for which no originals exist are to be inserted into the manual in proper alphabetic order these are new reference sheets for AMOS Version 4 5 Replace Original Page Revised Pages Title page ii with Title page ii Page iii with Page iii Page v with Page v Pages 1 1 throuah 1 5 with Pages 1 1 through 1 5 Page 2 1 2 2 with Pages 2 1 through 2 4 Pages 6 1 through 6 5 with Pages 6 1 through 6 5 APPEND reference sheet with APPEND reference sheet new BATCH reference sheet BITMAP reference sheet with BITMAP reference sheet new CAL120 reference sheet COM reference sheet with COM reference sheet COMPIL reference sheet with COMPIL reference sheet COPY reference sheet with COPY reference sheet CREATE reference sheet with CREATE reference sheet DATE reference sheet with DATE reference sheet DDT reference sheet with DDT reference sheet DO reference sheet with DO reference sheet DSKANA reference sheet with DSKANA reference sheet DSKCPY reference sheet with DSKCPY reference sheet new EMAIL reference sheet ERASE reference sheet with ERASE reference sheet FILDMP reference sheet with FILDMP reference sheet new FILTAP reference sheet FIX reference sheet with FIX reference sheet FIXDVR reference sheet with FIXDVR reference sheet FMT200 reference sheet with FMT200 reference sheet FMT210 reference sheet with FMT210 reference sheet FMT400 reference sheet with FMT400 reference sheet FMTSOD reference sheet with FMT500 reference sheet HASHER
214. es in the AMOS User s Guide The command itself generates the second type of error message These messages take different forms depending on the command but usually begin with a special symbol such as a question mark a square bracket a percent sign etc A short paragraph follows each error message These sentences discuss the reasons for the appearance of the error message and give suggestions for recovering from the error CHARACTERISTICS Summarizes in several brief statements the unique features of the command States which accounts or devices are affected by the command REFERENCE SHEET FORMAT Page 5 4 Any warnings that appeared in HINTS RESTRICTIONS are restated here Tells you where your terminal is returned to after use of the command For example this section may say Returns your terminal to AMOS command level EXAMPLES as needed For clarity we may include the subheading EXAMPLES if further elaboration on command use seems necessary The section contains a series of definitions followed by examples and occasional comments u CHAPTER 6 THE AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE SHEETS 6 1 INTRODUCTION The rest of this manual consists of reference sheets that briefly summarize the use of each command on the system We have organized these sheets alphabetically to help you access them quickly Below is an alphabetically ordered list of all AMOS commands Me also provide a functional summary of
215. es not understand your device specification Check your spelling Did you type DKS1 instead of DSK1 for example File specification error You did not supply a proper file specification on the DUMP command Line For example you see this message if you type DUMP followed by a RETURN Check the FORMAT section above for information on the valid formats of the DUMP command CHARACTERISTICS Displays on your terminal the contents of memory sequential and random disk files disk blocks disk bitmaps disk Master File Directories and disk user file directories Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level Changed 1 May 1980 FUNCTION dystat Video monitor real time display that gives information about system status HINTS RESTRICTIONS To use DYSTAT your system must have a memory mapped board video display Both DSKO TODCNV PRGL1 4 and DYSTAT must be in system memory Change the SYSTEM INI file to include SYSTEM TODCNV SYSTEM DYSTAT FORMAT DYSTAT Base mem addrs 1 0 port 2 where Base mem addrss is the beginning address of RAM associated with the video board and 1 0 port is the 1 0 port into which the video board is connected DEFAULTS The default Base mem addrss is 174000 octal The default 1 0 port is 177710 octal OPERATION 1 Type DYSTAT Coptionally followed by the memory addresses and the 1 0 port associated with the video board then type RETURN
216. ese symbols followed by a command that opens a location enter you into register mode Leave register mode by using the R command To exit type a Control C DDT now returns you to AMOS command level FE Your modified program is still in memory To save the debugged program use the SAVE command for example SAVE DSKO CREATE PRG NEVER save a program that contains breakpoints Running such a program could result in severe problems COMMAND SUMMARY RETURN Line Feed se se P X or Open location or register can take numeric or symbolic argument e g n tag or req Close a location can take numeric or symbolic argument specifying data to place in location e 9 nRETURN tagRETURN Open next Location Display value in octal can take symbolic or numeric argument Open previous location Open location indirectly Open absolute location indirectly Enter absolute mode Start program at relative address zero DOT waits for one tine of input after the G cnmmand which it passes to the program and then it executes the program Set or List breakpoints Can take numeric or symbolic argument e g 8 nB tag B tag nB Clear breakpoints Can take symbolic or numeric argument e g C nC tag C tag nC Proceed from a breakpoint Execute single instructions Valid only after a breakpoint has been reached Changed 30 April 1981 DOT Cont d Page 4 R Enter program relative mod
217. esses make sure that the addresses you give are within your memory partition and that the starting address is smaller than the ending address END OF PASS n ERROR COUNT IS x the end of every pass through memory DIAG4 tells you the number of the pass and the number of errors it found ERROR AT ADDRESS nnnnnnn WAS Data SHOULD BE Data When DIAG4 finds an error it tells you the memory location that contained the error nnnnnn Then it tells you the data that it found in that Location Data and the data that should have been there Data2 this gives you an idea of what memory chip is bad CHARACTERISTICS In addition to usual memory testing it performs a leak down test on dynamic memory Tests only the memory partition of the job running DIAG4 Returns your terminal to AMOS command level if you type a Control C 1 October 1979 ding FUNCTION Rings the terminal belt HINTS RESTRICTIONS DING is useful in a command file for telling you that an input is expected or that a process is finished FORMAT DING no where n is the number of times you want to sound the terminal bell OPERATION 1 To ring your terminal betl type DING then give the number of times you want the terminal bell to ring Type a RETURN For example DING 52 2 You will most often use the DING command in command files to let the user of the command file know that an event is finished or that he or she is expected to enter input For
218. evn device does not exist Cannot READ Devn device 7S not mounted You tried to copy to or from a device that is not listed in the DEVTBL command in your SYSTEM INI does not have a driver in area 1 61 of the System Disk is not file structured or is not mounted Devn is the device you specified XNo file oriented device corresponding to Devn is mounted You specified a device but left o the unit number TAPDIR cannot find a logical unit that matches your specification Try mounting the device Tape is not file structured e tape you are trying to read was not written by the FILTAP program The TAPDIR program can only read tapes written by FILTAP Check to make sure you have mounted the correct reel of tape More than one output specification You may not supply more than one output specification Device full There is no more room on the disk No such files TAPDIR was unable to find any files matching your input specification 30 Aprit 1981 TAPDIR Cont d Page 4 CHARACTERISTICS A file oriented tape directory program that displays a directory of a tape that was written by FILTAP Allows you to specify wildcard file specifications Sends display to your terminal a disk file or a printer Default Listfilespec is OIRECT LST in the account and device you are logged into Default input file specification is and the account and device you are logged into The device and account portions of
219. ffer E Exit Exit without updating EG Exit and go The commands below take a numerical argument The argument selects which text the command will affect For example for command Y the command may take the following forms Y No argument Affects the first character after the text pointer or from the first character to the end of the Line depending on the command nY Affects next n characters or Lines depending on the command Y Affects character or line just behind pointer nY Affects previous n characters or lines just behind the text pointer depending on command OY Affects from beginning of Line up to text pointer or moves pointer back to start of current Line depending on command 1 October 1979 EDIT Cont d Page 3 i The commands C Character advance K Kill Lines R Reverse character advance 7 Delete characters Line advance Type Lines 7 Save Lines in auxil iary buffer xro 1 ERRORS You can see the usual system messages if you supply an invalid file specification For example Cannot OPEN Filespec file not found You did not specify a valid file Check your spelling Remember if you want to create a new file you have to start it first by using the MAKE command 2File specification error The system does not understand your EDIT command Line For example you entered EDIT followed by a RETURN i e you did not include a file specification
220. file portion of an ISAM file Now type RETURN For example ISMCOM DATA IDX 2 1 October 1979 ismcom ISMCOM Cont d Page 2 2 ISMCOM now prints a warning about file access and then tells you the compression factor it is planning to use If the compression factor ISMCOM is going to use is not acceptable you can now enter another one ISMCOM now computes the ACTUAL compression that will be accomplished if it uses your value and gives you the chance to enter a new value For example ISMCOM MAIL IDX I NOBODY else may use this file while I m processing it 1 am planning to compress each block to at least 90 percent full If that is not acceptable enter the percentage you desire 765 It will actually work out to be 80 percent full If i p y i that is not acceptable enter the percentage you desire 2 If the actual compression value that ISMCOM computes is acceptable to you enter a RETURN when it asks you for your own compression factor Otherwise enter a new compression factor and ISMCOM will compute the actual compression that it can achieve using that value Do not enter the percent sign even though you are talking about percentages When you enter a compression factor that will achieve the result you want type a RETURN the next time ISMCOM asks you for a compression factor NOTE A compression factor of 100 will cause a block split the next time a top level index is created The number
221. file user to AMOS command Level 1 May 1980 filcom FUNCTION Allows you to compare the contents of two files HINTS RESTRICTIONS All numeric displays are in octal or hexadecimal if you have previously used the SET HEX command FORMAT FILCOM Filespecl Fitespec2 N where Filespecl and Filespec2 specify the two files you want to compare FILCOM stops the comparison when it reaches the Nth difference between the two files DEFAULTS The default file extension is PRG If you do not specify N FILCOM compares every byte in the two files OPERATION 1 Type FILCOM followed by the specifications of the two files you want to compare Separate the two Filespecs with a comma Now enter the number of differences a decimal number at which you want the comparison to stop Hit a RETURN FILCOM DSKREDL1 41 DSKREDL100 31 5 OQ 2 Now you see a display that Lists one Line for each data mismatch between the two files Each line of the display gives the following information 1 the address of the mismatch in number of bytes from the front of the file 2 the specification of the first file 3 the data in the first file at that position 4 the specification of the second file and 5 the data in the second file at that position For example FILCOM CRLF MAC WRKFIL MAC 32 pj CRLF MAC 000000 WRKFIL MAC 000204 2 CRLF MAC 133700 WRKFIL MAC 010527 6 CRLF MAC 000116 WRKFIL MAC 000054
222. fore before using HASHER on a Hawk disk you must decide whether you want the hash total computed via the fast copy technique or the O method The fast copy method is the default to specify the 0 method use the 0 switch on the HASHER command Line 1f you generate a hash total using the fast copy method no other users may run on the system while the hash total is eing calculated See the DSKCPY reference sheet for more information on the two DSKCPY copy modes for the Hawk device FORMAT HASHER switch GE where switch selects a special mode for Hawk devices Changed 30 April 1981 HASHER Cont d Page 2 DEFAULTS If you omit the optional 0 and you have specified a Hawk hard disk HASHER assumes that you want the hash total computed via the technique DSKCPY uses when operating in Hawk fast copy mode The 0 switch has no effect when computing the hash total for other disks OPERATION 1 To generate a hash total for a floppy disk or Phoenix hard disk first enter the command HASHER HASHER GED Now enter the specification of the device that contains that disk when you see Input drive PHO1 CE As HASHER works you see CHashing nnnn blocks where nnnn is the number of blocks on the disk When it is finished you see Hash is nnn where nnn is the computed hash total 2 To generate a hash total for a Hawk disk enter HASHER If you want this hash total to be computed in the same way that D
223. g UTILIT LIB GETADR Base 1373 Size 292 bytes Program and Map files finished Program size 1055 bytes If any errors occur during Linking LINK tells you so for example Program file finished 4 errors exist Program size 1055 bytes ITem eur t Sere ER IST FP PrOgram5120 1052 bytes You can see the following error messages while using LINK Command error There is something wrong with your command Line For example you tried to use LINK without specifying a file on which to work Fatal error Insufficient memory You must increase the size of your memory partition there was not enough room to perform the procedure you specified Undefined switch x ianored LINK did not recognize the switch x you specified Refer to the section OPTIONS above for information on the valid LINK switches Changed 30 April 1981 LINK Cont d Page 4 Fatal error Overlays of code are not permitted Next expected address is xxxx Overlay code address 15 xxxx Your program is trying to overlay previous code Check your MAC programs to make sure that your overlay references are correct xxxx undefined An external symbol is undefined This is a very common error You have referenced a symbol which has not previously been defined e 9 you have made a reference to a label that does not exist Make sure that an EXTERNed symbol in one segment is defined by an INTERN statement in another segment Fatal err
224. ge packet for the AMOS System Commands Reference Manual if it does not show a revision level you will want to order the first change page packet part number DWM 00100 62 so that you can bring your manual completely up to date This change page packet contains 1 Updating instructions 2 Anew title page for the manual indicating the current revision level of the manual Revision A02 3 The manual pages we have changed Each page that was changed contains a legend at the bottom of the page that reads Changed 30 April 1981 We have marked with change bars vertical black Lines in the left margin those portions of each page that have changed Each page that is new for this revision of the manual contains the legend 30 April 1981 1 0 UPDATING INSTRUCTIONS To make the update process easier we suggest that you put your AMOS System Commands Reference Manual in a three ring binder notebook If the pages of the manual are secured with a staple remove the staple First remove the title page from this change page packet and exchange it for the title page in the AMOS System Commands Reference Manual CHANGE PAGE PACKET 2 AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE MANUAL Page 2 Now insert and replace sheets as described in the next section List of Change Pages 2 0 LIST OF CHANGE PAGES Below is the List of change pages in this packet Remove the original pages listed below and replace them with the revised pag
225. h ESS ROOD dn fate D9R2 MDO PRGLT 4 2 The E switch tells DSKANA not to display the account directories filenames and extensions and block numbers of the disk as the analysis proceeds unless an error occurs You do see a List of the PPNs as DSKANA reads through the disk For example DSKANA DSK3 E GED TBegin analysis of DSK32 TE z Block 0 block reserved for system use only in DSK3 READ PRG 1 4 120 1 Changed 30 April 1981 DSKANA Cont d Page 5 To place the DSKANA output into a file de ERRORS Whether or not you use the L or E switches you can tell DSKANA to create a file containing the information that DSKANA usually displays on your terminal screen Include a file specification followed by an equal sign on the DSKANA command line For example DSKANA DSKO ERROR TXT DSK1 L ser If the specified fite already exists DSKANA deletes it before beginning the disk analysis The first line of the file includes the date of the analysis For example Disk Analysis List file on 4 17 80 When DSKANA is finished you may display the file by using the TYPE command or you may print it via the PRINT command There are a number of file error messaaes that you can see if something is wrong on the disk You only see these messages if you use the L or E switches Block used in previous file Last block in the file where this message appears also exists in a previous file The system made an error
226. hat the format enable switch on the AM 200 is set to EN As it formats FMT200 writes over any data currently on the diskette FMT200 does not require that you mount a diskette before formatting it After formatting a diskette use the SYSACT command to initialize the diskette unless you are going to use DSKCPY to make a Literal image of another diskette on the newly formatted diskette FORMAT FMT200 Devn where Devn specifies the device holding the diskette you want to format OPERATION 1 Type FMT200 followed by the specification of the device holding the diskette you want to format Then type a RETURN For example FMT200 ST01 GD The command above tells FMT200 to format the diskette in prive One of the floppy device that uses the STD driver program and therefore to use the STD format Changed 30 April 1981 FMT200 Cont d Page 2 ERRORS 2 Now you see the message BEGIN FORMATTING 3 When FMT200 is finished you see the message EXIT 4 FMT200 now returns you to AMOS command level You may see the following error messages when using FMT200 Unit number must be 0 3 You specified a bad unit number Invalid device The device you specified is not a floppy disk device or is not compatible with the AM 200 Floppy Disk Controller CError code x on track nl A media drive or controller error occurred For information on the error codes refer to the hardware documentation accompanying
227. hat you did not type DKS1 instead of DSK1 If you are sure you are specifying the device correctly check with the System Operator to see why the device is not available 30 April 1981 PRUN Cont d Page 4 CHARACTERISTICS PRUN execu es compiled and Linked PASCAL programs Assumes the default extension PCF If you omit an account and device specification from your fiie specification PRUN searches in the account and device you are logged into your protect Library account and the PASCAL Library account DSK0 7 5 PRUN is re entrant and serially re usable 30 April 1981 Rs Pu FUNCTION Undates a PASCAL orogram by Linkina a specific module into the program file HINTS RESTRICTIONS Invokes the AlphaPASCAL Linker PLINK to link a module into a program PU is a command file which makes the AlphaPASCAL Linker PLINK easier to use in many applications when Linking a single module into a program You supply PU with the name of the module you want to update followed by the name of the PCF file you want to Link the module into PU invokes PLINK giving it the name of the PCF file you specify as its code file PU then tells PLINK to update the PCF file PU tells PLINK not to change the standard library code file for the i PCF file while updating it Nr For more information on updating a PASCAL program refer to the AlphaPASCAL User s Manual DWM 000100 07 FORMAT PU Moculespec Filespec Ge
228. he AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 For information on special devices turn to Section 6 1 1 1 Special Devices of that manual FILE SPECIFICATIONS Page 3 2 Filename A one to six character file name AMOS usually considers upper and lower case letters in a filename to be the same but some programs require that you enter filenames as all upper case WARNING If you enter more than six characters AMOS may not depending on the command you are using process any extension or PPN that follows the name Extension Zero to three characters that follow the filename and give information to the command about the contents of the file The filename and extension are separated by a dot For information on the various extensions recognized by the system refer to Chapter 6 Identifying Files to AMOS in the AMOS User s Guide Cp pn Project programmer number Identifies the account in which the file resides When it is part of a file specification always enclose the PPN within square brackets For information on PPNs refer to Chapter 5 Identifying Yourself to AMOS in the AMOS User s Guide An example of a typical file specification SMDS PROJCT TXTL100 2 where the device specification SMDS tells AMOS that the file resides on logical unit SMDS of the physical device SMD the filename PROJCT identifies the file the extension TXT further identifies the file and tells AMOS that it contains text data and the PPN 100 2 s
229. he Label you want to branch to For example GOTO NOFILE 2 At a later point in your command file designate the portion of the command file you want to branch to by placing the appropriate Label on the Line before that section For example NOFILE lt Couldn t find that file enter RETURN to create it gt 3 You will probably want to use the GOTO command together with the LOOKUP and EXIT commands to perform conditional branching within the command file For example LOOKUP INSTAL MAC Couldn t find file GOTO NOTFOUND If couldn t find file GOTO NOTFOUND error routine If did find it assemble it TRACE ON MACRO INSTAL LINK INSTAL SUB1 SUB2 INSTAL PRG EXIT Returning you to AMOS command Level NOTFOUND lt If you want to create the file type a RETURN gt PAUSE Otherwise type anything else H VUE INSTAL MAC Y 1 May 1980 GOTO Cont d Page 3 ERRORS If the label you supply is not a valid comment or executable command file element GOTO resumes executing the command file after the label If GOTO is not able to find the specified label you see Label mot found and you are returned to AMOS command level This message means that you did not supply a valid argument and or label Make sure that your argument matches the Label you want to branch to and that the Label and arguments are in proper form CHARACTERISTICS Allows transfer of control within a command or DO file
230. he disk Next you must establish the account structure on the disk by using SYSACT to add PPNs to the disk s MFD The project programmer number that you assign to the user is in the form of two numbers each of which may range from O to 377 octal The first number of the PPN is the project number numbers 1 through 77 are reserved by Alpha Micro for system use The second number jis the programmer number Accounts whose PPNs share the same project number are said to be in the same project users may transfer files into another account from his own if both accounts share the same project number If while using SYSACT you decide that you ve made a mistake leave SYSACT by typing a Control C instead of using the SYSACT exit command the changes you ve made will not get written out to the Master File Directory FORMAT SYSACT Devn where Devn is the specification of the logical unit whose MFD you want to modify OPERATION 1 Type SYSACT followed by the specification of logical unit whose MFD you wish to modify Type a RETURN For example SYSACT DSK1 GD Changed 1 May 1980 SYSACT Cont d Page 2 The SYSACT prompt symbol is an asterisk If you forget the SYSACT commands type an H SYSACT will List them for you See below COMMAND SUMMARY COMMAND SUMMARY The SYSACT commands A p pn p pn D p pn ERRORS Add account p pn to the disk If the account does not already exist SYSACT adds it an
231. he first address you assign to the next job in the bank may not be less than 14000 which is 13776 2 If the next job s memory partition were to begin at 13776 or 13777 the two jobs would be sharing a word of memory FORMAT JOBMEM Jobname Y 1 October 1979 JOBMEM Cont d Page 2 or JOBMEM CJobname Bank StartAddress EndAddress 2 Use the first format to find out what memory is allocated to your job omit Jobname from the command Line or the memory allocation of another job specify the Jobname Use JOBMEM in the second format to allocate memory to your own job omit the Jobname or to another job specify the Jobname Where Jobname The name of the job for which memory is to be allocated if omitted JOBMEM uses your job as the default Bank The number of the memory bank containing the memory being allocated to the job StartAddress The beginning address of the memory block being allocated to the job EndAddress The ending address of the memory block being allocated to the job DEFAULTS If you omit a jobname JOBMEM assumes the name of your job OPERATION 1 To find out what memory is allocated to your job type JOBMEM followed by a RETURN For example JOBMEM 2 CURRENT MEMORY ALLOCATION IS 0 32370 177376 The message above tells you that your memory partition is from address 32370 to address 177376 in bank number zero the first bank of the system 2 To find out what memory is al
232. he more common ISMBLO error messages you see End of input file in middle of record may You loaded an ISAM file with data from a sequential data file but the parameters you gave to ISMBLD when you originally created the file did not exactly match the data in the data file e g the record size in the data file is not the same as the size specified to ISMBLD ISBXFL Index file full you You did not specify enough additional index blocks when you built the ISAM file When you loaded the ISAM file with data index was not large enough to hold the necessary entries ISBAFL Data fite full You did not specify enough records when you built the file When you loaded the ISAM file the data file was not enough to hold all of the data Duplicate secondary key Left out xxxxx You tried to use ISMBLD on a secondary index file the xxxxx is already in an index file Attempt to add duplicate key xxxxx You tried to add duplicate data xxxxx to a data file sure that you have not tried to load data twice from the same fite CHARACTERISTICS Assumes a SEQ file extension for the data file from which you loading data Assumes you want to build an ISAM file in Exclusive Mode unless you use the N switch Checks to see if the file you specify on the ISMBLD command already exists to decide whether to build a new file or load an one Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 the ISAM l
233. he qlobal cross reference generator GLOBAL and the dynamic symbolic debugger DDT FORMAT MACRO filespect switches GD where filespec selects the source file you want to assemble and the optional switches selects the MACRO options you want to use DEFAULTS MACRO assumes a file extension of MAC Unless you specify one of the Listing switches MACRO does not provide an assembly listing If you omit device and account specifications MACRO Looks for the specified file in the device and account you are logged into Changed 30 April 1981 MACRO Cont d Page 2 OPTIONS You may select one of the options below by specifying the appropriate option request switch at the end of the MACRO command Line You may specify multiple switches by entering them after a single symbol at the end of the command line B text Generate a bottom footer title on every page of the Listing using the rest of the text on the command lin as the title B must be the last switch on the command Line C Include conditionals in the assembly listing Conditionals are usually suppressed E Write to the assembly Listing only those Lines that contain an error H List binary code in hexadecimal instead of octal form in the assembly listing AL Generate a listing file by calling Phase 3 during the assembly Creates the output file with the same name as your source file but a LST extension 10 Use the current object file by omitting asse
234. hecks to see that you are giving it reasonable data If you see any of these messages it probably means that you made a typing error Key and record size must be at least one byte in length and since the key is an element of the record the key must be smaller than the record Entire key must be within record Tf the start position in the record of the key the length of the key 1 is beyond the end of the record you see this message The minus one comes from the fact that the first position in the record is a one and not a zero SORT thinks that the record size you gave was too small or that the key size was too big You can also see several system messages For examples 2Cannot DELETE Filespec write protected You have tried to sort a file on a write protected disk SORT cannot replace your unsorted file with the new sorted file because it can t write on the disk Write enable your disk and try again 2Cannot OPEN Filespec file type mismatch You see this message if you try to sort a random file that is a file that has been allocated contiguously on the disk You may only sort sequential files CHARACTERISTICS Sorts logical records in a sequential file in ascending or descending order Allows you to specify up to three keys on which to sort Replaces your original file with a new sorted file Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 srccom FUNCTION Compares two sequential
235. hod for copying between Hawk devices OSKCPY optionally generates a hash total for the backup disk when it has finished the disk copy This feature is especially useful when you are making multiple copies of a disk the hash total displayed at the end of the disk copy should be the same for each disk copied The hash total gives you an extra way to verify that the copies made are identical to the master disk since two disks will only have the same hash total if their contents are identical For information on generating a hash total for a disk without using DSKCPY see the HASHER reference sheet in this manual FORMAT DSKCPY Switches ner where Switches select optional DSKCPY features DEFAULTS If you enter just the unit numbers of the disks you want to copy between instead of a full device specification DSKCPY asumes that you changed 30 April 1981 OSKCPY Cont d Page 2 are copying betw en DSK devices For example if you enter 1 and 0 as the input and output drives DSKCPY assumes that you want to copy from DSK1 to DSKO If you are copying between Hawk hard disks and do not use the 0 Switch DSKCPY automatically uses the Hawk fast copy mode No other user may run on the system while DSKCPY is using the fast copy mode to backup Hawk disks OPTIONS You may select the following options by specifying the appropriate switch codes 7H Generates a hash total for the copied disk If you use the
236. hose devices You must never destroy or alter the contents of a BADBLK SYS 1 2 fite To protect the integrity of a device s certification data COPY will not overwrite Changed 30 April 1981 COPY Cont d Page 2 the file BADBLK SYS 1 2 on that device However note that ERASE will erase the BADBLK file COPY is a wildcard file command Refer to Section 9 5 Copying Files COPYO in the AMOS User s Guide CowM 00100 35 for more information on the use of COPY FORMAT COPY Newfilespect Oldfilespeci OldfilespecN Switches RET where Newfilespec is the specification of the file you want to create Oldfilespec is the one or more files you want to copy and Switch is an option request DEFAULTS The initial default Oldfilespec is and the account and device you are logged into The default Newfilespec is and the account and device you are logged into unless you are logged into 1 2 in which case it is and the device you are logged into The default switches are DELETE NOQUERY NOPACK OPTIONS Use the switches below to select COPY options Precede each switch with a slash Remember that the placement of the switch on the command Line modifies its effect QUERY or Q Ask user for confirmation before copying files file switch NOQUERY or NOQ Don t ask for confirmation default file switch DELETE or D Copy over to an existing file thus deleting it default file switch
237. ibrary account DSK0 7 51 OPERATION 1 To execute a compiled and Linked PASCAL Program enter PRUN followed by the specification of the program file you want to execute then type a RETURN For example PRUN SALARY FEN Now PRUN displays this messaae AlphaPascal v2 0 and the executes your program 2 If you wish to interrupt execution of your Proaram type a Control C You now see elp Now you may enter one of four codes Q R or B Then type a RETURN For example Interrupt Interrupt Helo ED Q Quit B Backtrace asume Interrupt Help Q GD A tel s PRUN to display a list of the codes you may enter If you enter Q PRUN returns you to AMOS command level an R causes PRUN to resune proaram execution and a A tells PRUN to backtrace your program To backtrace a proaram means to list in the order called all procedures and functions invoked during program execution up to the ooint of interruption with the last called procedure or function listed first for more information on backtracina see Chapter 4 of the AlphaPASCAL User s Manual 30 April 1981 PRUN Cont d Page 3 No ERRORS You may see several error messages when using PRUN The most serious of these messages has to do with library version checking Wrong version of xxxx for use with yyyy where xxxx is the external Library and yyyy is the PCF file you want to execute A program that was Linked with on
238. ile 1 May 1980 triddt FUNCTION Troubleshoots a Trident system by allowing you to communicate with the Century Data 1150A Formatter HINTS RESTRICTIONS Before trying to use TRIDDT read the Installation and Operating Instructions for the AM 400 System that accompanies the AM 400 Hard Disk Interface and read the Century Data 1150A Formatter manual For information on the error and status codes returned by the Formatter and a List of TRIDDT commands refer to Section 3 Functional Description of the document Trident 1150 Formatter Performance Specification Bulletin No 346 This document is available from Alpha Micro and should be included with each Trident system ALL TRIDDT commands and status codes are in hexadecimal so be sure to use the SET HEX command before using TRIDDT These commands and Statuses are those values the system usually uses to transfer data and information between the computer system and the Century Data Formatter FORMAT TRIDDT Y OPERATION 1 Type TRIDDT followed by a RETURN TRIDDT O 2 Now TRIDDT asks you for a command COMMAND Enter the appropriate TRIDDT command For example the 80 command is a sixteen bit command whose Lower byte contains zeros in bits 7 4 Bit 3 of that command contains a zero if we are checking formatter status or a one if we are checking drive status To request information on drive status then enter an 8008 after the command prompt For example 1 Octo
239. ile DEFAULTS DO assumes a file extension of DO DO Cont d Page 2 OPERATION 1 Type DO followed by the specification of the DO file and optionally a list of arguments required by that file If the fite does not have a DO extension you must specify the extension Type a RETURN For example DO WRITE TXT RECRD1 RECRD2 GD The command above tells the system to execute the file WRITE TXT as a DO file The system substitutes the two text arguments RECRD1 and RECRD2 for parameter symbols in the DO file SYMBOL SUMMARY Besides all valid system commands command file special symbols and file specifications DO files can contain the following symbols n where n is a number between 0 and 9 inclusive These symbols are the parameter symbols into which DO substitutes the arguments you specify on the DO command Line D The D symbol identifies the default parameter List D must begin in the first character position on the first Line of the DO file Follow it with the List of default text items you want DO to substitute for the parameter symbols if no arguments appear on the DO command Line Separate the items with spaces Null parameter symbol Useful in argument list on DO command Line for specifying which parameter symbols associate with which arguments and in default parameter list Current device symbol Represents device that user of the DO file is currently logged into p Current PPN symbol
240. ile while updating it You may enter a complete file specification including the device specification filename extension and project programmer number of the PASCAL module you wish to compile for more information on compiling and updating modules refer to the AlphaPASCAL User s Manual 0WM 00100 07 FORMAT PCl Modulename Filename FED where Moculename is the name of the module you want to update and Filename is the name of the PCF file you want to Link the module to DEFAULTS If you omit the device and account specifications CMPILR and PLINK assume the device and account you are logged into If you omit the extensior CMPILR and PLINK assume an extension of PAS 30 April 1981 PCU Cont d Page 2 OPERATION 1 Type PCU followed by the specification of the module you want to compil2 followed by the name of the PCF file you want to Link the module to Then type RETURN For example CU COMPAR SALES Ger The file you specify must be a compilable PASCAL program PCU now invokes the AlphaPASCAL compiler CMPILR which proceeds to compil the program PCL causes CMPILR to display some diagnostic status messages so you see something like this PUN CMPILR AlphaPascal v2 0 Source file name COMPAR Diagnostic file name lt return gt for terminal AlphaPascal Compiler Version 2 0 lt 0 PROGRAM lt 3 7 Lines 2 seconds 149 48 Lines minute o compilation errors
241. in the AM 100 documentation packet You may use WNG210 to boot from double or single sided diskettes that are in single or double density AMS format FORMAT MNG210 GEN OPERATION 1 Type WNG210 followed by a RETURN WNG210 GEN The system now resets itself by reading a copy of the WNG210 bootstrap program into system memory and executing it 2 Once invoked the WNG210 program reads the operating system skeleton monitor DSKO SYSTEM MON 1 4 into memory SYSTEM MON then brings up the system under the control of your system initialization command file SYSTEM INI 3 Once the system is up and running you see the AMOS prompt ERRORS WNG210 generates no error messages However if it does not find SYSTEM MONL1 4 and SYSTEM INIC1 4 the start up procedure fails 1 May 1980 WNG210 Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Boots the system from a Wangco floppy disk if th Wangco disk drive is the System Device and runs under control of the AM 210 floppy disk controller Returns your terminal to AMOS command level if the system resets successfully 1 May 1980 FUNCTION Allows you to position the screen cursor on your terminal display HINTS RESTRICTIONS To be able to use the XY command your terminal driver the program that takes care of the screen positioning functions of your terminal must allow use of TCRT screen calls Use the XY command at the AMOS command Level either directly or within a c
242. ink an updated module to the PCF file Invokes the PASCAL compiler CMPILR Causes one PASCAL module to be compiled Causes CMPILR to send diagnostic information to your terminal display Invokes the PASCAL Linker PLINK 30 Aprit 1981 pdifmt FUNCTION Transforms a ext file into a program design document HINTS RESTRICTIONS The purpose o PDLFMT is to transform a program design into a formatted design document POLFMT produces a final document that contains 1 table of contents 2 formatted design listing 3 reference trees and 4 a cross reference Create a text file using one of the system text editors Insert the PDLFMT commands in that file After exiting the text editor you can invoke PDLFMT to format your file NOTE A demonstration file TLGRAM PDL is in account DSK0 1 41 To use it enter PRINT TLGRAM POL P PDLFMT LGRAM 2 PRINT TLGRAM 9 PDLFMT transforms TLGRAM PDL into TLGRAM LST For information on using PDLFMT refer to the document Program Design Language Formatting System DWM 00100 26 in the AM 100 documentation packet FORMAT PDLFMT Filespec D where Filespec selects the file you want to format DEFAULTS PDLFMT assumes a file extension of PDL OPERATION 1 Use one of the text editors to create a text file that contains your program design Insert into that file the PDLFMT commands that mark the various document components See below for a List of the PDLFMT commands
243. ion Blocks Cancel End of Medium Special Sequence Escape File Separator Group Separator Record Separator Unit Separator Page A 2 THE ASCII CHARACTER SET Page A 3 PRINTING CHARACTERS ou 20 CHARACTER SP Space Exclamation Mark Quotation Mark Number Sign Dollar Sign Percent Sign Ampersand Apostrophe Opening Parenthesis Closing Parenthesis Asterisk Plus Comma Hyphen or Minus Period Slash Zero One Two Three Four Five Six Seven Eight Nine Colon Semicolon Less Than Equal Sign Greater Than Question Mark Commercial At Deo V d Av 00 NO 0 BRUNO Or THE ASCII CHARACTER SET A B C D E F 6 H I J K L M N 0 P Q R S T U V W x Y z t J oa eru arn aonan 4 Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Upper Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Case Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Letter Opening Bracket Back Slash Closing Bracket Circumflex Underline Accent Grave Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower Lower
244. ion is DSKO C1 6 The default file extension is DVR 4 MONGEN asks for a name to be given to the new monitor NEW MONITOR NAME Enter a one to six character name the default extension is MON This name is now the name of the new monitor 5 You can now test the new monitor by using the MONTST program or you can save the monitor as a disk file by using the SAVE command For example SAVE TRISYS MON 2 Remember that MONGEN does not affect the running monitor either in memory or on the System Disk Nor does MONGEN test the new monitor it merely builds a new monitor as a module in your memory partition ERRORS INPUT MONITOR Filespec NOT FOUND DISK DRIVER Filespec NOT FOUND MONGEN could not find the specified monitor or disk driver fite Make sure that you included the correct account and device specification You can also see several system messages if your device specifications are invalid For example 1 October 1979 MONGEN Cont d Page 3 Cannot READ Filespec device does not exist Cannot READ Filespec disk not mounted Make sure that your file specifications contains valid device specifications Check your spelling If you see the disk not mounted message use the MOUNT command to mount the devices you want to access CHARACTERISTICS Generates a new monitor by overlaying the disk driver program with a new disk driver Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979
245. ioned at the read head FORMAT REWIND Devn o where Devn is the magnetic tape unit you want to rewind OPERATION 1 Make sure the tape you want to rewind is mounted 2 Type REWIND followed by the specification of the magnetic tape unit you want to rewind Then type RETURN For example REWIND MTU6 3 You now see one of the following REWIND messages a Tape is rewinding now Js message is the most common and indicates that the tape is in the process of rewinding The rewind will be finished in a moment b Tape is already rewinding You are trying to rewind a tape that is already in the process of rewinding The rewind will be finished in a moment 1 October 1979 REWIND Cont d Page 2 Tape cannot be rewound it is at Load point The tape has already been rewound or has never been moved from its initial position at Load point REWIND returns you to AMOS command level while the tape is Still rewinding ERRORS You can see the following system error messages File specification error REWIND did not understand your command Line e g you typed REWIND followed by a RETURN Re type the Line Cannot OPEN Devn device does not exist REWIND did not recognize the magnetic tape unit you specified Make sure that the device you specified is defined in the system device table See the DEVTBL reference sheet You can also see the following REWIND error message Tape cannot be rewound
246. ions Changed 30 April 1981 APPEND Cont d Page 3 File specification error You did not enter a file specification in proper form For example you see this message if you enter a null file specification APPEND RET Any of the standard system error messages may occur For example 2 Cannot OPEN Filespec file not found AMOS cannot find the file you specified Make sure that you entered the correct account and device specification or that the extension you allowed by default is that of an existing file Cannot OPEN Filespec protection violation You tried to create a file in an account not in the project you are currently logged into For example you are logged into DSKO 100 11 but tried to create a file in DSKO 40 11 Make sure that you are logged into the same project as the account in which you are trying to create the new file CHARACTERISTICS Assumes null file extensions Does not create a file in an account outside of the project you are currently logged into Assumes the extension of the newfilespec for the first oldfilespec Assumes for each subsequent oldfilespec the actual or assumed extension of the previous oldfilespec Changed 30 April 1981 ascdmp FUNCTION ASCOMP displays the data in physical disk records on your terminal display in ASCII form HINTS RESTRICTIONS ASCOMP tries to display all of the data in a record in ASCII form if you ve asked it to look a
247. ior 7 to the final SYSTEM command You may not use the R switch when you use DATE at AMOS command level Error occurred during GETMEM in roll over setup There was not enough memory available to be able to allocate the date rollover module in system memory Therefore no date rollover at midnight will occur Check with the System Operator CHARACTERISTICS Sets and displays the system date in American or European format The default format is American If your system contains an AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board DATE makes available some extra features such as automatic date rollover at midnight day of the week and so on DATE is not re entrant but is re usable Changed 30 April 1981 ddt FUNCTION Symbolic debugger Allows you to examine and modify your assembly Language program in memory as it executes HINTS RESTRICTIONS NOTE DDT echoes Escapes as dollar signs In the discussions that follow we represent an Escape with a symbol For example when you see the characters 8 you know that you are supposed to type an Escape followed by a B DDT does not use RETURNs as command delimiters DDT automatically expands the program you are examining to accommodate patches Because DDT runs in terminal image mode the standard AMOS Line editing commands do not work when you are in DDT For example a RUBOUT does not erase the last character instead a RUBOUT cancels the entire current command
248. is the specification of the file containing the program that you want to burn into the PROM PROM address is the octal address of the PROM that is to be programmed DEFAULTS BMVR assumes a file extension of PRG and it assumes the device and PPN that you are logged into OPERATION 1 Type BMVR followed by a file specification then type a RETURN AVR o 2 BMVR asks for the address of the PROM For example BMVR PERLOD O PROM ADDRESS 160000 Y 3 BMVR now programs the PROM by writing the specified file onto it 64 times 1 October 1979 BMVR Cont d Page 2 4 BMVR verifies the PROM by comparing the orogram and the contents of the PROM If the PROM looks OK BMVR tells you so and exits BMVR PERLOD Y PROM ADDRESS 160000 PROM VERIFIED OK ERRORS THIS PROM NEEDS TO BE ERASED BMVR has detected some data on the PROM If a PROM is erased all bits are set nnnn VERIFICATION ERRORS When BMVR compared the original program and the contents of che PROM it found some differences The number of verification errors is nnnn PROGRAM WILL NOT FIT IN PROM The program was larger than IK and so would not fit in the PROM CHARACTERISTICS Programs 2708 type EPROMS The program you want to place in the PROM must not be larger than 1K Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 cal120 FUNCTION Allows you to calibrate the AM 120 time of day clock oscillator HINTS RESTRICTIONS
249. isk If HWKLOD doesn t find SYSTEM MON 1 4 or if it does find SYSTEM MON but no SYSTEM INI the bootup start up procedure fails 1 October 1979 HWKLOD Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Boots the system from a CDC Hawk hard disk if that disk is the System Device Returns your terminal to AMOS command level if the system resets successfully 1 October 1979 ibmepy FUNCTION Transfers a copy of a file from an IBM 3740 diskette prepared on an IBM data entry station to an AMOS device HINTS RESTRICTIONS IBMCPY does not convert the file into one of the formats used by AMOS files it simply transfers the data from the diskette to an AMOS device as is except for translating the characters from EBCDIC to ASCII IBMCPY reads IBM 3740 diskettes in which the data is arranged in 80 byte records IBMCPY assumes that the IBM diskette is mounted on device IMG1 You must have a valid copy of the image driver IMG DVR in area 1 61 of your System Disk and you must have IMG defined as a valid device on your system See the DEVTBL reference sheet for information on defining devices FORMAT IBMCPY Filespec 2 where Filespec is the name in IBM format of the file that you want to Copy OPERATION 1 Type IBMCPY followed by the name of the file on the IBM diskette that you want to copy Type a RETURN For example IBMCPY DATAO9 Y 2 IBMCPY reads the file from the IBM diskette and copies it over
250. isplay tells you how many file errors were detected If no file errors were seen by DSKANA as it read the disk you see No file errors Changed 30 April 1981 DSKANA Cont d Page 4 Otherwise DSKANA tells you how many file errors were detected 5 file errors detected The messages listed in ERRORS below tell you what kinds of file errors occurred Frequent file errors can indicate hardware problems To see these error messages you must run DSKANA with the L or E switches If you want to see more information about how DSKANA is progressing as it analyzes your disk or if DSKANA has reported file errors on your disk and you want to find out where the errors occurred use the L or E switches 1 To use the L switch enter DSKANA followed by the specification of the device that contains the disk you want to analyze Then enter t followed by a RETURN For example DSKANA HWK3 L You now see all of the information discussed in the paragraphs above plus you also see a List of all PPNs account directories filenames and extensions and disk block numbers for the specified disk As DSKANA progresses through the disk you might see a display that looks something Like this Begin analysis of DSK5 1 47 Directory 143 354 712 1126 4010 AMSOR LI 7 APPEND PRG 51 If DSKANA finds an error you see where on the disk it occurred For example Block 1703 block creates endless Loop in file DSK5 MDO PRGL1 4 Emme Sc
251. ists any errors it finds and is then ready for you to modify the record Use the DSKDDT commands Listed below To see the contents of the first location type a slash To see the contents of the next location type a line feed DSKDDT displays two bytes of data at a time The DSKDDT display might look something like this PSKDDT DSK1 202 2 00452 4 44510 The number on the left of the slash is the RELATIVE disk location within the record that you want to examine That is given that you are examining record 202 the display above 1 October 1979 DSKDDT Cont d COMMAND SUMMAR nnn nnn NNN Line feed RETURN RUBOUT E C ERRORS The only This mean You may a from an i gt Page 2 tells you that the first two bytes in record 202 are 00452 the second two bytes are 44510 and the the third two bytes are 52040 After you finish using the DSKDDT commands type E to exit DSKDDT DSKDDT then rewrites the record and takes your terminal back to AMOS command level Y Where nnn is the disk location you want to examine This number is the relative position of the location from the front of the record For example 6 displays the contents of the sixth and seventh bytes in the record where nnn is the relative disk location you want to examine entered in octal and NNN is the octal data two bytes with which you want to replace the contents of nnn Display the next two bytes of data in the re
252. it LOG 123 4 Logged into DSK0 123 41 aution other jobs same PPN The next thing that LOG does is look in area 7 2 of the System Disk for a file named MAIL JNK If it finds it LOG displays the first Line of the file on your terminat LOG 34 7 GD Logged into DSK0 34 73 SYSTEM WILL BE DOWN FRI 7 8 AM FOR MAINTENANCE The last thing LOG does is look for a command file in your account named START CMD If it finds the file LOG automatically runs it for you This is useful if you want to do something like run a business program every time you log into the system but not when you use LOG to transfer between accounts Once you are logged into the system you can use LOG to transfer yourself to other accounts on other disks Type LOG followed by the device and PPN that specifies the account to which you wish to transfer then type a RETURN Changed 1 May 1980 LOG Cont d Page 4 LOG 123 5 RET Transferred from DSKO 100 1 to DSK0 123 51 ERRORS Disk not mounted The disk on which LOG is searching for the account is not mounted Command format error LOG did not recognize the characters that followed LOG as being in the proper format for device or PPN specifications Account number invalid LOG doesn t recognize the PPN you ve supplied Make sure that you ve specified the correct device and that the PPN is in the proper form Nonexistent device You ve tried to find an account on a device that L
253. it from the 1 0 port number by a colon e g AM300 2 6 The default AM 300 baud rate code is 19200 baud For a List of the baud rate codes used by the AM 300 and AM 310 interface drivers see The System Initialization Command File DWM 00100 09 in the System Operator s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet Terminal Type of terminal This tells the system what kind of terminal driver program to load in to access the terminal The terminal driver programs must be in account DSKO 1 6 and have file extensions of TDV In width Specifies the maximum number of characters per Tine before the system starts to discard characters In buffer Specifies number of characters system will store in input buffer before discarding characters Also known as type ahead buffer Sometimes the system cannot process characters as quickly as you type them The in buffer holds characters till the system can get around to them Out buffer Specifies size of the terminal output buffer the buffer that holds the characters that the system sends to the terminal TRMDEF generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS Serves both as a system initialization command and a user command One TRMDEF statment MUST appear in the SYSTEM INI for each terminal you use on the system Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level Changed 1 May 1980 txtfmt mi FUNCTION Formats text files as directed by TXTFMT command
254. it is at Load point The tape has already been rewound CHARACTERISTICS Requires the magnetic tape unit you access to be defined in your system device table MTSTAT SYS must be in system memory 1 October 1979 rndreci FUNCTION Performs a random read disk diagnostic test HINTS RESTRICTIONS RNDRED randomly selects a disk track and performs a seek and read operation on a random record on that track It Lists any read errors that it finds Runs until you type a Control C or reset the system Does not harm the data on the disk FORMAT RNDRED Devn e where Devn specifies the device you want to test OPERATION 1 Type RNDRED followed by the specification of the logical unit you want to test Type a RETURN For example RNDRED AMS1 2 RNDRED displays no data unless a read error occurs in which case it displays the appropriate error message ERRORS You can see the standard system error messages that result from an invalid device specification For example Cannot READ Devn device not mounted The device you want to test is not mounted and RNDRED cannot read data on the disk until you mount it using the MOUNT command CHARACTERISTICS Does not harm the data on the disk you are testing Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level when you type a Control C 1 October 1979 run FUNCTION Runs compiled BASIC programs HINTS RESTRICTIONS Invokes the runtime package por
255. ke sure that the form type specified by the user is the same as the type of form you have defined with SET for that printer See the PRINT reference sheet for information on the PRINT FORMS option You can set the density at which data is read or recorded by a magnetic tape unit to either 800 or 1600 bits per inch BPI using the SET BPI command This command sets a flag in MTSTAT SYS indicating the desired density The density is actually set at the time of the next 1 0 operation by the magnetic tape unit driver NOTE An error occurs if you try to read a magnetic tape when a SET BPI value is in effect which is different than the BPI at which the tape was recorded FORMAT SET RED to display the current options or SET Option GEN where Option tells SET which flag to modify in your job table or SET FORMS Printer name Form name BEN where Form name specifies the kind of form you want to assign to a specific printer specified by Printer name or Changed 30 April 1981 SET Cont d Page 2 SET BPI Devn NNNN where Devn is a device specification that selects a magnetic tape unit drives O through 7 NNNN is the desired tape density of either 800 or 1600 bits per inch DEFAULTS The system comes up with the following options as the default OCTAL ECHO NOVERIFY NOGUARD NODSKERR CTRLC The default form type for a specific printer is set by the printer initialization file for that print
256. l error Expression stack error M An error occurred hen SYMBOL evaluated some expressions in your files You should never see this error message it indicates an internal error Fatal error Expression stack overflow You exceeded the number of nested expressions that SYMBOL can handle Try to find the exceedingly complex expression in your source file and simplify it CHARACTERISTICS SYMBOL is re entrant and may be loaded into system memory it is also serially reusable Creates a symbol table file by Linking and resolving intermediate 08J files Default extension is 0BJ for regular files and LIB for library files Default switches are S and R Changed 30 April 1981 sysact FUNCTION Use SYSACT to add or delete user accounts on a specific disk add or change account passwords or initialize a disk HINTS RESTRICTIONS You must be logged into account 1 2 to run SYSACT SYSACT works by modifying the Master File Directory of a specific disk The MFD contains a list of all accounts on that disk listed by their Project programmer numbers and the password if assigned associated with each one You may add or delete user accounts by adding or deleting Project programmer numbers and add or change passwords If a disk has never been used before you must first format the disk or certify it in the case of hard disks that run under control of the AM 410 controller Then use SYSACT to initialize t
257. l for a Hawk hard disk HASHER can compute the hash total using either the DSKCPY fast copy method or the DSKCPY 0 method If you use the Hawk fast copy mode the default no other users may run on the system until HASHER is finished Changed 30 April 1981 VA heclloci FUNCTION You may optionally use the HEDLOD command in the system initialization command file to set the head load time for the AM 200 floppy disk controtler You may also use HEDLOD at AMOS command level to tell you the head load time set in the SYSTEM INI HINTS RESTRICTIONS When it appears in the system initialization command file the HEDLOD command sets the number of real time clock ticks that the AM 200 keeps the disk drive heads loaded after a data transfer The HEDLOD command must appear after all SYSTEM commands in the SYSTEM INI The HEDLOD command only affects disk drives that run under control of the AM 200 floppy disk controller and that support software control of head load timing Persci disks only FORMAT HEDLOD or HEDLOD nD where n selects the number real time clock ticks that the AM 200 keeps the disk drive heads loaded after a data transfer OPERATION 1 Type HEDLOD followed by a RETURN to find out the head load time set by the SYSTEM INI for floppy disk drives that run under the control of the AM 200 and that support software controlled head load timing HEDLOD I CURRENT HEAD LOAD TIMER IS O CLOCK TICKS 2 To define th
258. lay hashmarks for each memory module The default switches are FSBHMU OPERATION 1 To see what modules are in your memory partition type MAP followed by a RETURN MAP You see a list of the memory modules currently in your partition Each Line of the display contains this information 1 module name 2 extension 3 size in bytes decimal 4 octal base address the memory address where the module begins and 5 hashmark an identifying code unique to that module The last Line of the display tells you how many bytes are free in your memory partition and gives the octal memory address of the first free memory Location For example CREAT PRG 566 033722 167 536 542 221 XCHG PRG 101 035022 513 543 124 555 QUBLI PRG 335 037024 435 713 521 434 FREE 48416 040736 The second Line of the MAP display above tells us that the memory module XCHG PRG is in memory that it takes up 1016 bytes that it begins at memory location 035022 and that its hashmark is 513 543 124 555 The last line of the display tells us that we have 48 416 bytes free and that the first free memory location is at address 040736 1 October 1979 MAP cont d Page 3 2 To see information about a particular memory module include a filespec on the MAP command Line For example MAP LOG LOG PRG 1016 030522 432 672 122 411 3 To see information about modules in system memory instead of your own partition use these switches RS
259. le of CLKFRG 60 3 After the system is up and running you can use CLKFRG to change the frequency previously set in the SYSTEM INI Enter CLKFRG followea by the number that selects the frequency being applied to the clock Line Type a RETURN For example CLKFRQ 50 Y ERRORS CLKFRQ generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS You must include CLKFR in the SYSTEM INI file CLKFRQ is both a user command and a system initialization command Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level x 1 October 1979 com FUNCTION Processes a file based on its extension HINTS RESTRICTIONS COM is a 00 file in the system Command File Library Account OSKO 2 2 It searches for a specified file and then invokes the appropriate processor For example if the specified file is a BAS file a BASIC program COM invokes COMPIL to compile the file You may find COM especially useful as a command file element FORMAT COM Filespec where Filespec specifies the file you want to Process You may not specify an extension and the file must be in the account you are logged into The file may appear on a different device however in which case you would include a device specification DEFAULTS If you omit the device specification COM assumes the device you are Logged into COM begins to search for the file in the foltowing order 1 Is it a MAC file If yes assemble it with MACRO 2 Is it a BAS file If yes compile
260. le finished Phase 4 Program file finished Program size 60 bytes MACRO produces a 0BJ file of the same name as the file you specified on the MACRO command Line You may modify this output file name by using the OBJNAM pseudo opcode in your source file If MACRO does not automatically call Phase 4 to create an executable PRG file you must use the linkage editor LINK or SYMBOL You can see the following error codes in your assembly Listing Branch address was out of the 127 word range Boundary error a word operand was on an odd byte address Conditional statement syntax error Duplicate user symbol Symbol was defined more than once Illegal character in source Line Missing term or operator in operand or expression Numeric error which indicates a digit out of the current radix range An expression which had to be resolvable on the first pass of the assembly could not be resolved Questionable syntax This is a general catch all error code Register error a register expression was not in the range of 0 7 Source line or operand terminated improperly Undefined user symbol durina Pass 2 Value of an absolute parameter was out of its defined range Assembler system error please notify Alpha Micro zzeocoo v xec Changed 30 April 1981 MACRO Cont d Page 4 You may see the following error messages during the program assembly Invalid control parameter value You used the V
261. le itself NOTE Although you call ISAM functions from within your BASIC or assembly language programs you may not run the program ISAM PRG itself directly from AMOS command Level For information on using ISAM and ISMDMP refer to the document ISAM System User s Guide DWM 00100 06 Rev A012 and the AlphaBASIC User s Manual DWM 00100 01 For the latest information on ISAM consult the Important Notice for ISAM Users DWM 00100 36 Rev A01 in the AM 100 documentation packet ISMDMP works in one of two modes 1 it displays the structure of an ISAM index file on your terminal or 2 it writes the data in an ISAM data file into an ordinary sequential file The purpose of ISMDMP in display mode is to aid in debugging programs that use ISAM Much of the information in the display is of help only to the experienced systems programmer and some of the information is of use only to programmers working on the actual ISAM program itself Dumping data to a sequential file can be useful for data backup FORMAT ISMDMP Filespect N Q where Filespec selects the ISAM data or index file you want to dump and N selects the Counted Update mode option DEFAULTS The default extension of the ISAM file that you want to dump is IDX The default extension of the file that will contain the data in the ISAM file is SEQ 1 October 1979 ISMDMP Cont d Page 2 OPTIONS You can prevent ISMDMP from using Exclusive Open mode by inc
262. ling then ask the System Operator for a list of the valid printers set up for the Line orinter spooler Changed 30 April 1981 PRINT Cont d Page 5 If you have more than one printer defined for use with the spooler Program you can see a List of all of the printers by typing PRINT No files in print request PRINT was not able to find the files you specified Check the command Line again and make sure that the device and account specifications are correct Invalid argument for COPIES OPIES only understands numbers make sure that you did not inadve tently type a letter Invalid argument for LPP You gave a non nwmeric argument to the Lines per page switch or the format of your command was incorrect Invalid argument for WIDTH You gave a non numeric argument to the page width switch or the format of your command was incorrect CHARACTERISTICS PRINT is a wildcard file command It understands ersatz devices Allows you to specify specific printer form type number of copies banner page page header form feed handling lines per page page width and whether to delete the file after it is printed Changed 30 April 1981 prun FUNCTION Executes compiled AlphaPASCAL oroarams HINTS RESTRICTIONS PRUN is the runtime portion of the AlphaPASCAL lanquade orocessor It executes your program hy interpreting the PCF file created by the AlphaPASCAL Linker Use PRUN only on programs that have previously bee
263. ll printers PRINT Filespect Filespec2 FilespecN Switch Switch ED to print one or more files on the printer that has the least number of blocks waiting in the queue to be printed or on the default printer set by the System Operator A Switch is an option request PRINT Printerspec Fitespec1C Filespec2 Fi LespecN Switch Switch where Printerspec specifies the particular printer on which you wish to print the file s selected by Filespec DEFAULTS The defzult Printerspec is the printer with the Least number of blocks waiting in the queue to be printed unless the System Operator has used the DEFALLT command in the spooler parameter file to define another printer default Changed 30 April 1981 PRINT Cont d Page 2 The default switch settings depend upon the specific printer being used The defaults for each printer are set by the System Operator The default Filespec is a null name and LST extension The initial default device and account is the account and device you are currently logged into OPTIONS You may select one or more of the options below by including the appropriate switches on the PRINT command Line COPIES n or C n Number of copies you want to print A file switch DELETE or D Delete the file after it is printed A file switch NODELETE or NOD Turn off the D switch A file switch BANNER or B Print a banner identifying page at the front of the Listing See th
264. lly generates a hash total for the disk copied to May NOT be run while anyone is accessing the disks being copied between Assumes a device code of DSK If used on Hawk hard disks DSKCPY may be used either in fast copy mode with no other users running on the system or in a slower copy mode which allows other users to run on the system Other devices floppy disk drives and Phoenix hard disk drives may not use the Hawk fast copy mode Changed 30 April 1981 FUNCTION dskddit Allows you to examine and change data directly on the disk HINTS RESTRICTIONS Useful for restructuring files and correcting ERROR 10 conditions The record number you enter to DSKDDT must be in the number base the system is currently using for your numeric displays usually octal See the SET reference sheet for information on setting the display base The numbers you give to DSKDDT to tell it which disk locations you want to examine and the replacement data for those locations must be in octal regardless of the number base the system is using for numeric displays FORMAT DSKDDT DevnsRecord I where Devn is the device containing the record you want to see and Record is the number of the disk record you want to examine and change OPERATION 1 2 Type DSKDDT followed by a device specification and a record number then type a RETURN For example DSKDDT DSK1 147 9 DSKDDT reads the record specified l
265. located to another job type JOBMEM the name of that job and a RETURN For example JOBMEM JOB4 CURRENT MEMORY ALLOCATION IS 1 40000 177376 3 To allocate memory to your own job type JOBMEM a bank number and starting and ending memory addresses type a RETURN 1 October 1979 JOBMEM Cont d Page 3 JOBMEM 2 140000 177376 4 To allocate memory to another job type JOBMEM a jobname a bank number and starting and ending memory addresses type a RETURN JOBMEM BG23 0 140000 177376 ERRORS 2Memory allocation format error JOBMEM doesn t understand the format of your command Line For example did you leave out the colon after the bank number 2Non existent job You ve specified a job that doesn t exist Run SYSTAT to see a List of the jobs on the system Non existent bank number plait Ea E You ve given JOBMEM a bank number larger than the total number of MEMDEF statements in your SYSTEM INI That is you ve specified a bank that has not been defined Allocation overlaps monitor or system memory The monitor memory is used by the operating system and the system memory is sharable by all users you must not allocate any of this memory to a user partition You must either reduce the amount of system memory or change your user memory allocations Illegal memory range end is below base Ending address must be greater than starting address Allocation is not within requested bank s defined m
266. lso use TRACE to C switch the current state of the trace flag regardless of what that state may be Note that the standard command file symbols S R and 3 lt gt work with TRACE in the same way that they worked with T an earlier predecessor of the TRACE command FORMAT TRACE Argument where Argument tells TRACE to turn the trace flag on or off or to Switch its current state DEFAULTS If you do not include an argument on the TRACE command line the command is ignored If no T or TRACE command appears in the command file the trace flag is off 1 May 1980 TRACE Cont d Page 2 OPTIONS TRACE takes one of three arguments ON Turns the trace flag on OFF Turns the trace flag off SWITCH Switches that is reverses the current state of the trace flag OPERATION 1 Place the TRACE command anywhere in your command file where you want to affect the status of the trace flag For example Command file to compile BASIC programs Want user to see that we are using compiler TRACE ON COMPIL ARTBL COMPIL IDXGL COMPIL OEMENU TRACE OFF 3 Don t want user to have to see cleanup ERASE BAK COPY 110 07 0LD x BAS ERRORS TRACE displays no error messages If you do not supply the proper argument the TRACE command is ignored CHARACTERISTICS Uses three arguments ON OFF and SWITCH to turn on turn off or switch state of command file trace flag May only be used in a command file or DO f
267. lt Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 FUNCTION When you use it within the system initialization command file JOBS defines the jobs that can run on the system At AMOS command Level JOBS tells you the name of your job HINTS RESTRICTIONS At the time of system initialization the JOBS command in the SYSTEM INI file tells the system what jobs can run on the system For information on using JOBS within the SYSTEM INI refer to Section 2 2 allocating Jobs The JOBS Command in the document The System Initialization Command File DWM 00100 09 Rev A01 in the System Operator s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet When it begins to process the SYSTEM INI file at the time of system bootup the system automatically attaches the first job Listed in the JOBS command tine and the terminals defined by the first TRMDEF command The rest of the process of system initialization takes place under control of that job You must explicitly attach all other jobs and terminals that you want to use on the system via the ATTACH command The JOBS command must be the first command in the SYSTEM INI file after the optional T command Once the system is up and running the JOBS command takes on another function it tells you the name of your job There are some functions that you might want to perform on the system e g attaching jobs to terminals that require that you know the name of your j
268. luding a N switch on the command Line For example ISMDMP MAIL N 2 tells ISMDMP to use Counted Update mode instead of Exclusive Open mode For information on Counted Update mode and Exclusive Open mode refer to Important Notice for ISAM Users in the AM 100 documentation packet OPERATION 1 Type ISMDMP followed by the specification of the ISAM file whose contents you want to see Type a RETURN For example ISMDMP ADDRSS 2 2 Now ISMDMP asks you Output tos If you want to see a display of your index file structure type TTY followed by a RETURN If you want to dump the contents of the data file portion of your ISAM file to a sequential file enter a file specification For example Output to DATA SEQ 3 If you enter a file specification ISMDMP writes the data in the ISAM data file to the specified file ISMDMP tells you how many data records it wrote to the file For example Output to LABELS TXT 2 15 records dumped You can now use TYPE or PRINT to display the file 4 If you enter TTY to the output prompt ISMDMP displays the structure of your index file on your terminal screen 1 October 1979 ISMDMP Cont d Page 3 The display might look something Like this Size of data record 67 Size of dir entry 30 Size of dir block 302 Size of key 25 Type of key 0 Entries per dir block 10 Record key position 1 Blocking factor 7 IDA freelist pointer 0000000000517 IDA freecoun
269. ly accepts record numbers in the base that the system is using for your numeric displays usually octal Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 attach FUNCTION Attaches that is Links a job to a terminal or tells you what jobs and terminals are attached on the system HINTS RESTRICTIONS When the system is reset or powered up it automatically attaches the first job and the first terminal defined in your SYSTEM INI Except for that special case however the system does not automatically attach any jobs and terminals If you want a job to be able to use a terminal for input and output you must explicitly attach the job and the terminal by using the ATTACH command If you want to attach a job and a terminal that are already linked to other units the ATTACH command will go ahead and detach the job and the terminal from their previous attachments Then it will attach the freed job and terminal to each other This is the only way that you can detach jobs and terminals i e by attaching them to something else If you want to attach a terminal to a job that is logged into an account ATTACH asks you for the password of that account if one exists before it attaches the specified job and terminal You can attach your terminal to a job but be careful that the job has some memory allocated to it or you will not be able to ask for most AMOS system commands A typical use for the ATTACH command migh
270. m TRM1 is attached to JOBl The Terminal Definition Block for TRM1 appears at memory address 025574 this address can be of use to system s programmers the general user may ignore it The type of interface driver being used by TRM1 is the program that drives the AM 300 board TRM1 is connected to port 1 TRM1 uses the terminal driver program for a SOROC terminal The three terminat parameters specify the size in bytes of the terminal s input buffer type ahead buffer and output buffer Note that QUME in the example above is not attached to a job in fact it is a printer Also the terminal named NULL is defined as a pseudo terminal A pseudo terminal i e a terminal that uses the PSEUDO interface driver is not an actual hardware device but is a software simulation of a terminal A pseudo terminal allows you to use jobs that don t require terminal 1 0 without tying up a real terminal The job that runs the Line printer spooler program for example generally uses a pseudo terminal In the SYSTEM INI file 1 Before AMOS can transfer data between the system and a terminal AMOS must know that the terminal exists what driver program to use to access the device what kind of terminal it is etc The TRMDEF statement performs this terminal definition process The TRMDEF statements must appear directly after the JOBS statement in the SYSTEM INI Insert one TRMDEF statement for each terminal you want to define To enter a TRMDEF
271. make a Literat image of DSKO onto DSK1 DSKCPY verfies that copy by checking the backup disk against the original IMPORTANT NOTE Do NOT use on devices that run under control of the AM 410 The Phoenix disk contains information about bad blocks on that disk the BADBLK SYS 1 2 file making a Literal copy of that disk transfers over that information to a device to which it does not apply SYSCPY writes over all data on DSK1 so make sure that DSK1 is a blank or scratch disk FORMAT SYSCPY o OPERATION 1 Make sure that DSK1 is a blank or scratch disk If you are using a Hawk based system make sure that you are not running off the cartridge or you will erase all data on the fixed platter To see if you are running off the cartridge instead of the fixed disk type SYSTEM followed by a RETURN If you are running off the cartridge you see SYSTEM IS RUNNING FROM CARTRIDGE DISK If you do not see this message enter SYSCPY followed by a RETURN SYSCPY Y 2 You see the message Insure scratch disk on drive 1 and hit RETURN Type RETURN after you have made sure that the scratch disk is in drive number one 1 October 1979 SYSCPY Cont d Page 2 3 Now you see A Begin copy and verify of system disk from drive 0 to drive 11 4 SYSCPY now uses the DSKCPY command to make a literal image of DSKO onto DSK1 When the copy is complete you see Duplication completed Verification completed N
272. mand or DO file where you want to 2 check for the existence of a file To abort the command file if the specified file does not exist do not use the symbol For example DO file to copy a file into an archive account NOTE user of file must be logged into a Project 200 account NN If file does not exist abort command file so we don t copy everything into the archive account instead 0 is the parameter supplied by the user of the DO file when the DO file is invoked NN LOOKUP 0 That file does not exist try again COPY DSK4 200 34 0 To continue execution of the command file if the specified file does not exist include the DO file to print a file LOOKUP 0 That file does not exist no file printed GOTO NOTFOUND Oops file not found Print the file PRINT 0 EXIT Your file has been printed NOT FOUND lt If you would Like to create the file type a RETURN gt PAUSE If don t want to create it type anything but a RETURN VUE 0 Y For information on the EXIT PAUSE and GOTO statements see the reference sheets for those commands 1 May 1980 LOOKUP Cont d Page 3 ERRORS If it is mot able to find the specified file LOOKUP displays the message if any that appears on its command Line if that message does not exist LOOKUP displays the appropriate AMOS error message For example Cannot OPEN DSKO LABDAT TXT file not found CHARACTERIST
273. mands Display Mode CONTROL J Move cursor down one instruction CONTROL K Move cursor up one instruction CONTROL T Move cursor down a page 24 instructions CONTROL Move cursor to current PC location CONTROL P Toggle Breakpoint CONTROL X Proceed to Breakpoint RETURN Single step Command Mode S Search for symbot Q Leave FIX R Modify register HELP Display menu SPEC Set up command string 60 Execute AMOS command ERRORS If FIX does not recognize one of your commands in Command Mode it displays the message What Changed 30 April 1981 FIX Cont d Page 3 CHARACTERISTICS Allows you to set breakpoints modify and examine contents of registers display and execute an assembly language program Changed 30 April 1981 fixdvr FUNCTION Configures a floppy disk driver for a specific combination of floppy disk format disk drive and disk controller HINTS RESTRICTIONS Because of the large number of possible permutations of floppy disk formats drives and controllers it is no longer possible to provide a separate disk driver program for each combination For information on the large number of floppy disk formats now available refer to the documents Disk Drivers and Formats DWM 00100 32 and Configuring Floppy Disk Drivers TDWM 00100 47 in the AM 100 documentation packet You MUST use FIXDVR to configure floppy disk drivers for each combination of format drive and controller you have on you
274. mation Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level X May 1980 lib FUNCTION LIB is an object file Library generator It combines Separate 0BJ files into one Library LIB file You may also use LIB to update an existing LIB file HINTS RESTRICTIONS A Library file gives you a way to make available to all programmers on the system a standardized set of machine language routines It also keeps you from having to rewrite the same utility routines again and again for multiple programs At the time that you link your object files into an executable program using LINK or SYMBOL you may include the specification of a Library fite on the command line If the other files specified on the command Line make use of a symbol defined in the Library file LINK or SYMBOL will process the routine within the Library file that defines that symbol Linking it into your program file NOTE Each object file that is placed into the Library file should be a separate routine because when your program references a symbol in the Library file LINK or SYMBOL Links in the entire object file required to resolve the reference For example if the Library file UTILIT LIB contains the object files GETNUM SUBT REAL and BINWRT and your program references a routine contained in the GETNUM file LINK or SYMBOL Links in the entire object file GETNUM from UTILIT LIB even if that file contains more than one routine For more information on Library files
275. mbly Phases 1 and 2 IR Generate a symbol cross reference which appears at the end of the regular assembly Listing IT Display the assembly Listing on your terminal instead of writing it to a disk file INta X A lows you to specify a value on the MACRO command Line that can be examined during the assembly process a identifies the type of value specified and X is the value See Chapter 9 of the AMOS Assembly Language Programmer s Manual for more information on this switch X List in your assembly Listing all macro expansions Macro expansions are usually suppressed OPERATION 1 Type MACRO followed by the specification of the file you want to assemble Then type a RETURN For example MACRO MATH MAC RED If you want to select one or more of the MACRO options specify the appropriate switches at the end of your command line after a single symbol for example MACRO MATH RD Changed 30 April 1981 C MACRO Cont d Page 3 2 ERRORS As it assembles your file MACRO reports on the status of the assembly process It tells you what errors occurred how large your program is whether it is COPYing from any copy files and if any symbols have been automatically EXTERNed For example MACRO SAVTXT MAC L GED Macro Assembler Version 1 1 Processing SAVTXT MAC Phase 1 Copying from DSKO SYS MACL7 7 Work area 39162 bytes 3614 used Phase 2 Object file finished Phase 3 Listing fi
276. me 2 1 5 Commands for Experienced Users In addition to the commands above the commands below are dangerous if used by inexperienced users especially ATTACH DSKDDT FORCE JOBMEM JOBPRI MEMORY QDT SLEEP SUSPND 2 2 PRIVILEGED COMMANDS This manual contains a reference sheet for every command on the system It is important to emphasize that not all commands can or should be used by the general user of the system You must be logged into the system as System Operator i e in account DSKO C1 2 in order to use several of the commands discussed in this manual That account is usually protected with a password Changed 30 April 1981 INTRODUCTION TO AMOS COMMANDS Page 2 4 Many of the commands e g a disk formatting program can be very destructive to disk files if used recklessly Therefore the System Operator may want to transfer to DSKO 1 2 those programs that he wants to reserve for the use of privileged personnel e g JOBPRI JOBMEM FMTSOO etc It is the responsibility of the System Operator to restrict the use of dangerous commands to those users knowledgeable enough to handle them wisely 2 3 WILDCARD FILE COMMANDS The reference sheets for several of the AMOS commands mention that those commands are wildcard file commands These commands are a special group of commands that even though they perform vastly different functions alt handle file specification wildcards and defaults in the same way Because
277. memories That is it writes a block of ones into memory waits for a while and then returns to that block to see if the ones are still there This checks to make sure that the memory locations have held their charge FORMAT QDIAGA Q DEFAULTS If you do not specify beginning and ending memory addresses DIAG4 uses the smallest and largest addresses in your memory partition OPERATION 1 Type DIAG4 followed by a RETURN DIAGA Q 2 DIAG4 asks you for the starting and ending memory address of the block of memory you want to test DIAG4 then repeats these addresses back to you DIAGA Y What starting address 140000 D What ending adress 177576 2 Starting address Starting address 140000 Ending address 177376 END OF PASS 1 ERROR COUNT IS O END OF PASS 2 ERROR COUNT IS O c 1 October 1979 DIAG4 Cont d Page 2 3 If you do not specify a starting or ending address that is you type a RETURN after each question DIAG4 assumes that you want to test your entire memory partition and it uses the minimum and maximum memory addresses in your memory partition 2 DIAGA Q What starting address Mhat ending address Starting address 55034 Ending address 177376 C 4 Each time DIAG4 cycles through memory it Lets you know that it has completed a pass END OF PASS 34 ERROR COUNT IS 0 5 To end the test type a Control C ERRORS BAD RANGE OF ADDRESSES You did not supply proper memory addr
278. message frequently you may have hardware problems There are also several AM 500 hard disk controller hard error messages that it is possible but extremely unlikely that you would ever see If any of these do occur please contact Alpha Micro Could not find DEVTBL entry for disk mount This error message reflects an almost impossible set of circumstances affecting the device table Please submit to Alpha Micro on a standard Software Performance Report the details of your use of DSKCPY if you ever see this message Sector not found during disk copy drive N block X where drive N is a decimal number an oc Ts an octal or hexadecimal number This can only happen when you are using the fast copy mode of DSKCPY or HASHER on a Hawk hard disk system The contents of a disk sector have become unformatted Verify if there is a problem by using REDALL to diagnose the disk and report any read errors See the REDALL reference sheet for more information about disk diagnostic tests 2CRC error during disk copy drive N block X where drive N is a decimal number and block X is an octal or hexadecimal number This can only happen when you are using the fast copy mode of DSKCPY or HASHER on a Hawk hard disk system The Cyclic Redundancy Check device on the AM 500 board has detected a problem in data transmission First verify if there is a problem by using REDALL to diagnose the disk and report any read errors See the REDALL reference shee
279. midnight use the R switch For example SYSTEM TRM DVR DATE E R SYSTEM 3 Note that the R option is only available when you are using the DATE command from within the SYSTEM INI file ERRORS You may see the following error messages when using DATE System date has not been set You may not display the date until an initial date has been entered using the DATE command Use format MM DD YY You did not enter the date in the Proper format refer to the FORMAT section above DATE is using American format for date entry and display so enter the date as month day year for example DATE 12 31 85 Ref Use format DD MM YY You did not enter the date in the proper format refer to the FORMAT section above DATE is using European format for date entry and display so enter the date as day month year for example DATE 31 11 82 GD Day of week must be 1 7 You did not enter a number between 1 and 7 inclusive when DATE asked for the day of the week Please enter Y or N You may only enter Y or N to the question Do you wish to reset the AM 120 board also You must be logged into 1 2 to reset the date Changed 30 April 1981 DATE Cont d Page 5 You must be logged into the System Operator s account 1 2 or must use DATE in response to a K command that appears before the final SYSTEM command in the system initialization command file The R option is valid only within the SYSTEM INI file pr
280. mory on the Alpha Micro System see the documents Memory Management Option DWM 00100 10 and Setting Up Multiple Piiceon 64K Memory Boards DWM 00100 34 in the System Operator s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet We will not discuss here the mechanics of setting up a bank switched system but briefly bank switching memory allows you to access more than 64K of memory on your system although each individual user is still Limited to a maximum of 64K JOBMEM expects you to enter memory addresses in the number base the system is currently using for your numeric displays usually octal For information on changing the display base from octal to hexadecimal refer to the SET reference sheet NOTE The first 16K of memory cannot be allocated to the bank switchable area It is reserved for the monitor Second 16K Of memory 40000 77776 octal or 4000 7FFE hex Third 16K of memory 100000 137776 octal or 8000 BFFE hex Fourth 16K of memory minus Last 256 bytes A for the 1 0 ports 140000 177376 octal or COQO FEFE hex IMPORTANT NOTE You may not allocate to a job the Last 256 bytes of the 64K address space That means that the highest memory address you can allocate to a job is 177376 The memory addresses 177400 177777 are reserved by the system for the 1 0 ports Make sure that memory addresses for different jobs do not overlap For example if the last address you assign to one job is 13776 t
281. n octal to which the printer is going to be connected ENTER OCTAL PORT ADDRESS OF INTERFACE 0 377 6 FIXMTM now modifies the driver and returns a message that tells you the configuration of the new driver For example FIXMTM returns you to AMOS command level ERRORS If FIXMTM cannot find the file MTM DVR it tells you CANNOT FIND MULTITERM DRIVER MTM DVR BE SURE YOU ARE LOGGED IN UNDER 1 6 AND TRY AGAIN Either MTM DVR is missing in account DSKO 1 6 or you are not logged into D K0 1 61 CHARACTERISTICS Requires that you be logged into DSK0 1 61 Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 fmt200 FUNCTION Formats diskettes used in floppy disk devices that run under the control of the AM 200 Floppy Disk Controller board HINTS RESTRICTIONS IMPORTANT NOTE When you run FMT200 your job must be the only job running on the system FMT200 selects the format to use based on the device specification you provide For example if you have previously configured a floppy disk driver named AMS DVR for a Persci device that uses AMS format the device specification of AMSO tells FMT200 to use AMS format to format the diskette in Drive Zero of that device For information on configurina floppy disk drivers see the document Configuring Floppy Disk Drivers in the System Operator s Information section of the AMOS Software Update Documentation Packet Before formatting make sure t
282. n compiled via the CMPILR program and then linked via the Linker PLINK See the PC PCL PL PU and PCU reference sheets for information on command files that help you to easily compile and Link PASCAL programs PRUN PRG is re entrant the System Operator may load it into system memory PRUN will not execute a program that is not compatible with the current external Library That is you may not run a program that was Linked with a ce tain external library with an older version of that library or with a completely different library instead you must re link the program with the current library To interrupt Program execution type a Control C For more information on interruoting program execution ser OPERATIONS below NOTE To connile a PASCAL program a PAS file enter RUN CMPILP GEN Now the compiler CMPILR asks you a series of questions concerning your progran file For full information on compiling and Linking programs see Chapter 4 of the ALphaPASCAL User s Manual DWM NN100 08 FORMAT PRUN ilespec Ger where filesnec selects the PCF file you want to run 30 April 1981 PRUN Cont d Pade 2 DEFAULTS y PRUN uses the default extension PCF Tf you do not specify a device and account PRUN Looks for the specified file in the device and account you are logged into next it looks in your proiect Library account P N Finally it searches for the file in the System PASCAL L
283. n is the baud rate at which you want your terminal to run e g 1200 baud OPERATION 1 Type BAUD followed by a legal baud rate then type a RETURN For example BAUD 300 Y ERRORS Baud rate nnnnn is not a legal baud rate You have specified an invalid baud rate try again making sure that the baud rate is correct CHARACTERISTICS Works only with the AM 300 and AM 310 1 0 boards Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 bitmap FUNCTION As part of the system initialization command file defines the disk bitmap areas used by the operating system At AMOS command Level BITMAP tells you what memory locations are used by these bitmap areas HINTS RESTRICTIONS A bitmap is a storage allocation map that tells the system which disk records are free and which are in use You can only use BITMAP to allocate disk bitmaps from within the system initialization command file You must have one BITMAP command in the SYSTEM INI for each type of disk device defined in the system device table See the reference sheet for DEVTBL Every time you add a new type of disk device to the system you must add a new BITMAP command to the SYSTEM INI file ALL logical units of one physical device may share the same bitmap area or each may have its own Place all BITMAP commands before any SYSTEM commands The size of the bitmap area depends on the device For example the 10 megabyte Hawk a hard disk
284. nal to a job and that job is logged into an account that has a password ATTACH asks you for the password before attaching the job and the terminal For example ATTACH MULTRM JOB3 GED PASSWORD Nonexistent terminal You tried to attach a job to a terminal that is not defined in a TRMDEF Command in your SYSTEM INI You can type TRMDEF followed by a RETURN to see a complete List of ali of the terminals defined on the system Changed 1 May 1980 ATTACH Cont d Page 3 Nonexistent job You tried to attach a terminal to a job that is not defined in the JOBS command in ycur SYSTEM INI Use the SYSTAT command to see a list of the jobs defined on the system Account not found on Login disk for specified job You attempted to attach a terminal to a job that is logged into an account which no longer exists on the device This can happen if while the job is logged into the account the disk that the account is on is removed from the device or the account is deleted from the disk using SYSACT Bad password You aid not specify the correct password CHARACTERISTICS Allows you to dqetach a terminal from a job by attaching it to some other job Returns your terminal to AMOS command level Changed 1 May 1980 badbik FUNCTION BADBLK allows you to see the contents of the file BADBLK SYSL1 21 HINTS RESTRICTIONS A disk certification program analyzes a disk and identifies bad disk blocks or tracks
285. nd creating an empty disk record for that file Before editing a new file with EDIT create the file using the MAKE command FORMAT MAKE Filespec P where Filespec selects the name device and account you want to assign to the new file DEFAULTS V MAKE assumes an extension of MAC and the device and account into which you are currently Logged OPERATION 1 Type MAKE followed by the specification of the file you want to create Then type a RETURN For example MAKE SRCFIL BAS e 2 When MAKE is finished you see the AMOS prompt ERRORS If you do not include a file specification on the MAKE command Line that is you type MAKE followed by a RETURN you see File specification error CHARACTERISTICS Assumes an extension of MAC Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 map LU FUNCTION Allows you to see what modules are in your memory partition and in system memory Also provides information about those memory modules HINTS RESTRICTIONS When you load disk files into your memory partition those copies in memory are called memory modules A memory module retains the same name and extension as its corresponding disk file You may not use MAP to see information about memory modules in other users partitions MAP displays memory addresses in the number base the system is using for your numeric displays usually octal If you want MAP to display these memory addresses as hexadecimal numbers m
286. nd MUST be in Bank Zero if your system bank switches memory For information on bank switched systems reter to the document Memory Management Option DWM 00100 10 in the AM 100 documentation packet You may use PERLOD to boot either from an AMS or STD format diskette FORMAT Re PERLOD OPERATION 1 Type PERLOD followed by a RETURN PERLOD O The system now resets itself by reading a copy of the PERLOD bootstrap program into system memory and executing it 2 Once invoked the PERLOD program reads the operating system skeleton monitor DSKO SYSTEM MONL1 4J into memory SYSTEM MON then brings up the system under the control of your system initialization command file SYSTEM INI 3 Once the system is up and running you see the AMOS prompt ERRORS PERLOD generates no error messages However if it cannot find SYSTEM MONC1 43 and SYSTEM INIL1 4J the start up procedure fails m 1 October 1979 PERLOD Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Boots the system from a Persci floppy disk if the Persci disk drive is the System Device Boots either from an AMS or STD format diskette Returns your terminal to AMOS command level if the system resets successfully 1 October 1979 iu FUNCTION Links a PASCAL program by invoking the AlphaPASCAL Linker PLINK HINTS RESTRICTIONS PL is a command file which makes the AlphaPASCAL Linker PLINK easier to use in many applications If a PCF version of the file
287. new file CPMCPY uses the CPM extension CPMCPY assumes that the file you are copying contains ASCII data OPTIONS If you want to copy a file that contains binary data rather than data in ASCII form use the B switch on the command Line For example CPMCPY DSKO CRDR PRGL1 4 A CROR ASM B Y 1 October 1979 CPMCPY Cont d Page 2 OPERATION Y 1 Type CPMCPY followed by the AMOS specification of the new file you want to create Then type an equal sign followed by the C PM specification of the file on the C PM diskette Type a RETURN For example CPMCPY AMS1 FORMS CPM A FORMS ASM e 2 You now see a message that looks something like this Begin transfer 83 Records read 20 Records written Transfer completed ERRORS You may see any of the standard system error messages that can result from invalid device specifications In addition if CPMCPY cannot find the specified C PM fite you see Begin transfer CPM file not found in directory search CHARACTERISTICS lt Transfers data in either binary or ASCII form To use CPMCPY you must have IMG DVR in DSKO 1 6 and the IMG device must be defined in your system device table Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 m FUNCTION bisplays the directory of a C PM diskette HINTS RESTRICTIONS CPMDIR uses the IMG DVR driver to access the data on the C PM diskette make sure that you have a valid copy of that program in area 1 6 of
288. ng it 2 Once invoked the TRILOD program reads the operating system skeleton monitor DSKO SYSTEM MONL1 43 into memory SYSTEM MON then brings up the system under the control of your system initialization command file SYSTEM INI 3 Once the system is up and running you see the AMOS prompt ERRORS TRILOD generates no error message but if it does not find SYSTEM MONL1 4 and SYSTEM INIC1 4J the start up procedure fails TRILOD only tries to boot off surface Zero iu 1 October 1979 TRILOD Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Boots the system from surface Zero of a Century Data Trident T25 T50 or T200 hard disk if that disk is the System Device Does not operate if the drive is write protected Returns your terminal to AMOS command level if the system resets successfully I Ww 1 October 1979 triset FUNCTION Initializes the Century Data 1150A Formatter to handle the specific mix of Century Data hard disks on your system HINTS RESTRICTIONS The AM 400 Hard Disk Subsystem allows you to run different Century Data hard disks under control of a single Century Data 1150A Formatter For example you can run T 25 T 50 T 80 T 200 and T 300 drives on the same system in any mix so Long as you do not exceed the maximum of four drives per formatter With the optional 1150A expansion you may use eight drives with one formatter NOTE If you do mix drives you may reference only one type of drive as DSK
289. nit Commands FILTAP REWIND SET SKIP TAPE TAPDIR TAPFIL 15 System Initialization Commands BITMAP CLKFRG DEVTBL HEDLOD JOBS KILL MEMERR PARITY QUEUE SYSTEM TRMDEF 16 System Information Commands ATTACH BITMAP CLKFRG DATE DEVTBL DYSTAT HEDLOD HELP JOBMEM JOBPRI JOBS MEMORY PPN QUEUE SET SYSMEM SYSTAT SYSTEM TIME TRMDEF Changed 30 April 1981 THE AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE SHEETS Page 6 5 17 ISAM Commands ISMBLD ISMCOM ISMDMP ISMFIX 18 Debugging Commands CAL120 DDT DSKDDT QDT QDT TRIDDT 19 Bootstrap Loader Commands coc210 HWKLOD ICMLOD PERLOD SMDLOD TRILOD T80LOD WNGLOD 20 Trident Hard Disk Initialization Commands TRIINI TRISET T80INI 6 4 THE COMMAND REFERENCE SHEETS The next section of the manual consists of the command reference sheets themselves one for each command on the system For information on the format of these sheets refer to the previous chapter Reference Sheet Format changed 30 April 1981 append FUNCTION APPEND takes the contents of one or more source files and places the combined contents into a single destination file HINTS RESTRICTIONS You may use APPEND to combine sequential files of any type You can append data onto the end of a file by specifying the same specification for the new file as one of the old fites you are combining e g APPEND BOOK TXT BOOK TXT BIBLIO TXT APPEND does not change the contents of the old files unle
290. nt requests in the queue you see The queue is empty 2 Tc send files to the printer that has the least number of blocks in its queue or to the default printer set by the System Operator simply type PRINT followed by the specifications of the files you want to print PRINT LST Rer HEADER LST MNPAK LST DSKCLR LST Total of 3 files 134 blocks in printer request 3 f you wish to send files to a specific printer type PRINT followed by the name of the printer you want to use an equal sian and your List of filespecs PRINT QUME BACKUP S CFIL RET BACKUP MAC BACKUP TXT SRCFIL LST SZCFIL LST Total of 4 files 78 blocks in printer request You may see any of the standard system error messaaes that result from invalid device and account specifications In addition you may encounter tiese messages LPTSPL Please mount form Form name on Printer name The Spooler Operator Tob sees this message if you sperify a form typ that is not defined as being mounted on the printer e g FORMS has been set to NORMAL but you type PRINT TI810 TRIE MAC FO CHECKS LPTSPL Please mount form CHECKS on T1810 The Spoo er Operator job makes sure that the form CHECKS is indeed on the printer then uses the SET command to inform PRINT that the forms have been changed SET FORMS T1810 CHECKS 0utput printer not found You specified a printer that PRINT does not recognize Check your spel
291. nto your system initialization command file although you may use it at AMOS command tevel For information on editing the system initialization command file see The System Initialization Command File in the System Operator s Information section of the AMOS Software Update documentation packet See Software Installation Instructions for the AM 710 Memory Board in the System Operator s Information section of the AMOS Software Update documentation packet for more information on PARITY and memory board error handting FORMAT PARITY 1 0 port1 1 0 port2 I 0 portN where I 0 port1 through I 0 portN give the 1 0 port addresses you have assigned to the AM 710 memory boards in your system NOTE This I 0 port address is three digits for octal numbers or is two digits for hexadecimal numbers Only enter hex numbers if you have used the SET HEX command for your job OPERATION 1 Use one of the system text editors to edit the SYSTEM INI fite Place the PARITY command after the MEMERR command For example 30 April 1981 PARITY Cont d Page 2 MEMERR PARITY 101 102 103 2 If yos have more 1 0 port addresses than will fit on one command Line you may follow the first PARITY command with as many others as you need For example PARITY 101 102 103 PARITY 104 105 106 3 Note that Am 710 memory boards require the presence of the MEMERR command as well as the use of the PARITY command If your system contains only AM 710 memor
292. ntroller board From within the system initialization command file TIME allows you to set the system time from the AM 120 board NOTE Some features require that your system contain an AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board Uses the TODCNV PRG program TIME is not re entrant but is re usable Changed 30 April 1981 trace FUNCTION TRACE allows you to turn the command file trace flag on and off within a command file thus affecting what command file elements the user of the command file sees HINTS RESTRICTIONS May appear only in a command file or DO file When the command file trace flag is on the user of command file can see all of the contents of the command file as the file is processed the user does not see all of the contents if the trace flag is off Even when the trace flag is off certain special items in the command file can be seen by the user of the file e g messages to the user program Output etc if you use the R S and lt gt symbols For information on setting up command files see Chapter 8 Command Files and DO Files im the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 For a more detailed discussion of the command file trace flag see New Features of Command Files and DO Files DWM 00100 63 in the User s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet TRACE allows you to turn the trace flag on or off at any time within the command file as many times as you want You may a
293. o does provide terminal drivers for many popular terminals which can be found in the system disk account 1 6 Creating a terminal driver program or even modifying one has always required a great deal of programming experience and skill Using NEWTRM you can create a terminal driver for any terminal you choose implementing all the features built into that terminal No particular expertise is required NEWTRM builds the terminal driver in a standard format by asking you a number of questions about the features of the terminal Refer to the user s or operator s manual for the terminal to find the information NEWTRM asks you about the terminal s features and capabilities Also refer to the document Building a Terminal Driver The NEWTRM Program in the System Operator s Information section of the AMOS Software documentation packet for more information on NEWTRM and how to find and enter the terminal s various parameters in response to its questions NEWTRM uses the following files Do not erase or modify them DSKO NEWTRM PCF 7 53 DSKO TDV1 MACC 1 63 DSKN ECHO MACL1 61 OSKO TOV2 MACL1 41 DSKO TABDEF MACL 1 63 DSKN VARDEF MACL1 61 FORMAT NEWTRM OPERATION 1 Log into the system Device Driver Library account LOG DSKO 1 6 ED 30 April 1981 NEWTRM Cont d 2 Type NEWTRM followed by a RETURN NEWTRM GET 3 NEWTRM gives you a set of instructions Terminate alt input Lines with carriage ret
294. o memory Use the Unyank command to write out the front part of the file to disk Then you can use the Yank command to bring in more text Line over 510 characters tong You cannot enter a text Line of more than 510 characters Use the Control B command to break up the Line Disc write protected please unprotect it VUE cannot transfer your edited file to the disk Write enable the disk and try again Changed 1 May 1980 VUE Cont d Page 4 If for some reason VUE cannot transfer your file to the disk it names the module in memory IMAGE VUE You can use SAVE to save the module as a file in the account and device you are logged into then you can edit it You see the message MEMORY IMAGE STORED IN MEM IMAGE VUE NOTE IMAGE VUE contains no Line feeds When you re VUE the file after you have saved it via SAVE VUE re inserts line feeds in the Proper Places in the file CHARACTERISTICS Screen oriented text editor Creates backup file with BAK extension Returns your terminal to AMOS command level Changed 1 May 1980 FUNCTION Allows you to delay the execution of any programs by your job until another job completes its current task HINTS RESTRICTIONS A job s task is said to be completed when that job enters one of the following states terminal input sleep or external wait status FORMAT WAIT Jobname e OPERATION 1 Type WAIT the name of the job for whom you want to wait
295. o use You must now supply blocking information to TAPE Note that when writing data from a disk file to tape this information is optional in that case TAPE has a default record size and blocking factor that it can use However when writing from tape to a disk file you MUST supply blocking information TAPE asks you the size of the data records in bytes including record delimiter characters and the number of data records in each tape block These values were established when you first wrote the data onto the tape TAPE now tells you how many characters it is going to read per tape block For example You are reading 1000 characters in a tape block If this number is not satisfactory e g it is zero you made a mistake in answering the earlier TAPE questions Type a Control C to exit TAPE and return to AMOS command level Then try using TAPE again TAPE now asks you how many tape blocks you want to read When you enter this value remember that TAPE will read fewer blocks than that if 1 it finds an end of file marker or 2 it reaches the end of the tape TAPE Cont d Page 5 TAPE now asks you to type RETURNs when the tape is Loaded and when the drive is on line After TAPE reads the data from the tape it displays a message that tells you how many tape blocks were read and how many errors yere encountered For example There were 200 blocks written or read There were errors ERRORS You can see the
296. ob To find out what jobs are defined on the system type SYSTAT followed by a RETURN The Left most column of the SYSTAT display Lists the jobs defined by the JOBS command in the SYSTEM INI FORMAT JOBS y or JOBS Job1 Job2 JobN where Jobl JobN are one to six character names that define the jobs that will run on the system 1 October 1979 JOBS Cont d Page 2 OPERATION At AMOS command Level 1 Type JOBS followed by a RETURN JOBS tells you the name of your job For example JOBS YOUR JOB NAME IS JOBS Within the SYSTEM INI 1 Type JOBS followed by a list of the jobs you want to allocate on the system Each job name is one to six characters in length For example JOBS JOB1 PRINTR JOB2 OPRTR SPARE SPOOLR 2 If you have more jobs than will fit on one Line you may use as many JOBS command lines as you want as long as they all appear before the first TRMDEF statement NOTE Each job you allocate takes up about 150 words of system memory 3 Remember to allocate memory and attach a terminal to a job before you try to use that job See the JOBMEM MEMORY and ATTACH reference sheets ERRORS JOBS generates no error messages CHARACTERISTICS JOBS is both a user command and a system initialization command The JOBS command must be the first command in your SYSTEM INI after the optional T command Returns your terminat to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 kill a FUNCTION Allow
297. ock ticks to the standard quantum for the specified job If the JOBPRI command has not been used to increase a job s priority the priority for that job is zero FORMAT JOBPRI Jobname Priority amp where jobname is the name of the job whose priority you want to change and priority is the number of clock ticks you want to add to the job s quantum DEFAULTS If you omit both the Jobname and the Priority JOBPRI assumes that you want to know the current priority of your job If you omit just the Jobname JOBPRI assumes that you want to change the Priority of your job If you omit just the Priority JOBPRI assumes that you want to know the Priority of the job you ve specified 1 October 1979 Page 2 JOBPRI Cont d OPERATION 1 Type JOBPRI followed by a RETURN to find out your job priority J0BPRI CURRENT PRIORITY IS 0 2 To find out the priority of a job other than your own type JOBPRI the name of the job and a RETURN For example JOBPRI ROBIN CURRENT PRIORITY IS 100 priority number and a RETURN to change your 3 Type JOBPRI a job s priority JOBPRI 1000 4 To change the priority of another user s job type JOBPRI the name of the job a priority number and a RETURN For example JOBPRI DUKE 1000 ERRORS no error message except NONEXISTENT JOB if it JOBPRI generates cannot find the job you ve entered on the command Line CHARACTERISTICS Uses your jobname as the defau
298. ocking factor the number of data records in each tape block TAPE now displays a message that tells you how many characters will be written in each tape block For example You are writing 20000 characters in a tape block If this number is not satisfactory e g it is zero you have made a mistake in answering the TAPE questions Type a Control C to return to AMOS command level and try using TAPE again Now TAPE is ready to write to the tape You see Is the tape Loaded Type return if it is Make sure that the tape has been physically Loaded on the tape drive and that the tape is at load point i e the metallic film at the start of the tape is positioned at the read heads Type a RETURN when you are ready TAPE now displays this message Is the drive on T TAPE Cont d Page 4 Make sure that the drive is on line If the drive is ready to write type a RETURN TAPE now transfers your file to the tape When it is finished you see a message that tells you how many blocks were written and how many errors were encountered For example There were 100 blocks written or read There were errors 5 If you asked to copy data from tape to a disk file TAPE asks you a series of questions c 1 October 1979 TAPE asks for a file specification give the AMOS specification of the file you want to create and a device specification give the specification of the tape drive you want t
299. ocks in the queue use one of the system text editors to edit DSKO SYSTEM INIL1 4 Before any SYSTEM commands add one QUEUE command followed by the number of blocks that you want to add For example QUEUE 15 The example above adds 15 eight word blocks to the 20 blocks initially assigned to the queue this generates a queue of 35 blocks 1 October 1979 QUEUE Cont d Page 2 ERRORS No queue blocks allocated No queue blocks are currently available for use CHARACTERISTICS QUEUE is both a user command and a system initialization command QUEUE returns your terminal to AMOS command Level when you use it as a user command 1 October 1979 FUNCTION Performs a random write read test on disk media HINTS RESTRICTIONS NOTE RAZA destroys the data on the disk you are testing RAZA tests your disk by randomly writing and reading data on it therefore do not test a disk that contains data you want to keep If you tell RAZA to test DSKO it destroys your System Disk and you cannot boot the system from that disk again until you copy new system software over to it from another disk FORMAT RAZA Y OPERATION 1 Type RAZA followed by a RETURN RAZA 2 RAZA asks you for the specification of the logical unit you want to test RAZA DEVICE NAME DSK HWK ETC DSK DRIVE NUMBERS TO RAZA 0 3 ETC 22 In the example above we ve asked RAZA to test the disk in DSK2 To end the test type a Control C ERRORS
300. ocks were freed ERASE BAK TXT ACCNT BAK OE TXT Total of 2 files deleted 45 disk blocks freed 2 1f you use the QUERY option ERASE asks you to confirm each deletion ERASE BAK QUERY MATH BAK Y GEOM BAK Y Total of 2 files deleted 56 disk blocks freed In response to the question mark type a y for YES or n for NO Do not type a RETURN after your answer You may type a Control C at any time to prevent further deletions you then return to AMOS command level The placement of the switch on the command line affects the operation of ERASE ERASE BAK Q TXT only asks you to confirm the BAK file deletions ERASE Q BAK TXT asks for confirmation of all deletions ERRORS Cannot find DSKO SCNWLO SYS 1 4 or MEM SCNWLD SYS RA needs this ile to process wildcard symbols in file specifications The system cannot find the file in DSK0 1 6 or memory or your memory partition does not have enough room to load in the file Specification error Your command Tine is not in proper format the symbol points to the Location on the Line that ERASE does not understand Changed 30 April 1981 ERASE Cont d Page 3 XNo file oriented device corresponding to Dev is mounted You specified a device but did not include a unit number ERASE was not able to find a mounted logical unit matching that specification Cannot READ Devn device does not exist Cannot READ Devn device is not mo
301. ocumentation packet For information on command files see Chapter 8 Command Files and DO Files in the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 FORMAT EXIT message u You may include an optional message on the EXIT command Line which is displayed to the user of the command file when EXIT returns him or her to AMOS command level OPERATION 1 Place the EXIT statement in the command file where you want to terminate operation of that command file NOTE The sample below contains GOTO PAUSE and LOOKUP commands If you are not familiar with GOTO PAUSE and LOOKUP you may want to refer to the reference sheets for those commands for additional information U 4 May 1980 EXIT Cont d Page 2 Command file to compile GLIDX BAS LOOKUP GLIDX BAS File does not exist GOTO NOFILE Oops File does not exist Skip to NOFILE File does exist go ahead and compile it COMPIL GLIDX BAS RUN GLIDX BAS H EXIT keeps user from dropping into NOFILE routine EXIT Returning you to AMOS command level x NOFILE If file doesn t exist send user to text editor to create it PAUSE To create file hit RETURN otherwise type anything else VUE GLIDX BAS Y ERRORS EXIT displays no error messages CHARACTERISTICS May be used only in a command file or DO file Terminates the processing of a command file and then optionatly displays a message to the user of the command file Returns the command
302. of DSK1 DUMP TXT next block Link is 6562 005620 006562 020056 052040 062550 066400 071557 020154 067543 rm The most co 005640 066555 067157 072040 070171 020145 063157 062040 071551 mmon type of dis 005660 086160 074541 072040 065541 071545 072020 062550 063040 play takes the f 04 6555 067412 020146 064164 020145 074145 066541 orm of the exam C ERRORS DUMP displays two error messages Illegal user code You used the DUMP DIRECTORY p pnl command DUMP was not able to find that account on the specified device Make sure that the account exists on that device Command format error You probably made a typing error Make sure that you have followed the proper DUMP format for your application of the command You can also see standard AMOS error messages if you supply invalid device or file specifications For example Cannot OPEN Filespec file not found The system couldn t ind the file you specified Make sure that your device and account specifications are correct Cannot OPEN Filespec invalid filename e system did not recognize the file specification you gave For example you gave the device specification but did not include the filename Check your spelling and try again Cannot OPEN Filespec disk not mounted You must use the MOUNT command to mount the device you want to access Changed 1 May 1980 DUMP Cont d Page 4 Cannot OPEN Filespec device does not exist The system do
303. of seconds Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 smedlod FUNCTION Bootstrap loader program for a system that uses the Control Data Corporation Phoenix hard disk as the System Device HINTS RESTRICTIONS The SMDLOD program when contained on a 2716 PROM allows the system to boot off a System Disk on a Phoenix hard disk when a hardware reset occurs that is when you hit the RESET button The program is also in account DSK0 1 4J of the System Disk You may use SMDLOD at AMOS command level to reset the system if your System Device is a CDC Phoenix hard disk The Phoenix is a 90 megabyte hard disk device 75 megabyte fixed 15 megabyte removable The memory partition of the job that uses the SMDLOD command MUST be in Bank Zero if your system bank switches memory For information on bank switched systems refer to the document Memor Management Option DWM 00100 10 in the AM 100 documentation packet FORMAT SMbLOD D OPERATION 1 Type SMDLOD followed by a RETURN SMDLOD The system now resets itself by reading a copy of the SMDLOD bootstrap program into system memory and executing it 2 Once invoked the SMDLOD program reads the Operating system Skeleton monitor DSKO SYSTEM MONL1 4J into memory SYSTEM MON then brings up the system under the control of your system initialization command file SYSTEM INI 3 Once the system is up and running you see the AMOS prompt ERRORS S
304. ognizes special devices ersatz devices and wildcards The default switches are NOQUERY NODELETE The default file specifications are and the account and device you are logged into Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 FUNCTION Loads 18 frequently used system programs into your memory partition from the System Disk HINTS RESTRICTIONS RES CMD is a command file that Loads into your memory partition these programs from account DSKO E1 4 LOG QDT SYSTAT SYSACT DSKDMP DSKFIL DSKANA DSKCPY MAP DIR SCNWLD SYS DEL REDALL COPY RENAME ERASE TYPE MOUNT Users with floppy disk based systems will use RES CMD to load important programs into memory from their System Disk so that they can remove the System Disk and still have the use of their system software NOTE You can use one of the system text editors to create your own CMD file to Load into memory the specific programs you need FORMAT RES Y OPERATION 1 Type RES followed by a RETURN RES Q 2 The RES command file uses the LOAD command to load frequently used programs into your memory partition ERRORS For each program that RES tries to load into memory which does not exist you see this error message Filespec NOT FOUND For example DSKO QDT PRGL1 741 NOT FOUND RES then goes on to load the next program u 1 October 1979 RES Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS RES is a command file in the system Command File Li
305. ommand file You will probably find this command most useful within a command file you can use XY to help you position the display of your command file messages FORMAT XY Row number Column number e where Row number is the horizontal position and Column number is the vertical position of the cursor on the screen The Row number may be between 1 and 24 The Column number may be between 1 and 80 XY Screen function o Nu where Screen function is the number of the screen function that you want to perform See page 59 of the AlphaBASIC User s Manual oWM D0100 01 for a List of the screen functions you can use Also see page 2 of the Addendum at the back of that manual OPERATION 1 Type XY followed by the numbers of the screen row and column where you want to position the cursor next type a RETURN Example 1240 Q This positions the cursor to the 12th Line on the screen and the 40th character position about the middle of the screen on most terminals 2 Type XY an equal sign and the number of the screen function you want to perform Then type a RETURN Example Y 09 This uses the screen function 0 to clear the screen 1 October 1979 XY Cont d Page 2 ERRORS XY generates no error messages If you specify an invalid function number or row and column numbers that are out of range XY generally ignores your command or performs some random function So be careful to check for validity the values that you gi
306. ommand file the TRMDEF command actually defines those terminals For information on defining terminals see the document The System Initialization Command File OWM 00100 09 in the System Operator s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet Each terminal on the system must have its own TRMDEF command in the SYSTEM INI FORMAT TRMDEF GED or U u TRMDEF Terminal name Interface port In width In buffer Out buffer where the various parameters define the terminal to the system See OPERATION below for information on these parameters OPERATION At AMOS command level 1 Type TRMDEF followed by a RETURN Each Line in the display gives the following information about a terminal on the system 1 terminal name 2 job to which it is attached 3 memory address in octal at which the Terminal Definition Block for that terminal exists 4 interface driver used by the terminal 5 number of the port on the 1 0 board the terminal is using 6 terminal driver used by that terminal and terminal parameters For example TRMDEF TRM1 JOB1 025574 AM300 1 SOROC 100 100 100 TRM2 JOB2 027764 AM300 2 HAZEL 100 100 100 TRM3 JOB 3 AM300 SOROC 100 TRM 032306 AM300 6 SOROC 50 50 50 QUME 033230 AM300 5 TELTYP 50 50 100 NULL SPOOL 033646 PSEUDO NULL ite Changed 1 May 1980 TRMDEF Cont d Page 2 The example above shows that we have six terminals defined on the syste
307. ompleteiy transparent to the user of the device For information on the program that you can use to display the BADBLK SYS file see the BADBLK reference sheet You do not have to mount a logical unit before certifying it IMPORTANT NOTE You may use this certification program ONLY on devices that run under control of the AM 410 CRT410 communicates directly with the AM 410 without going through the Phoenix driver program Therefore you MUST NOT run CRT410 at the same time as other programs that access devices that run under control of the AM 410 FORMAT CRT410 Devn where Devn is the specification of the device you want to certify Changed 1 May 1980 CRT410 Cont d OPERATION 5 Page 2 Type CRT410 followed by the specification of the device you want to certify then type a RETURN For example aCRT410 SMDS CRT410 now warns you CAUTION This program writes to all blocks In other words make sure that you have backed up any data on the disk that you may need CRT410 destroys all data on the disk You can interrupt the program at this point by typing a Control C CRT410 now creates a file named BADBLK SYS in account 1 23 of the disk you are certifying This file will hold a list of all bad disk blocks that CRT410 finds Now CRT410 asks you several questions a Enter maximum acceptable number of bad tracks Give the number of bad tracks that you will accept on the disk When CRT410 finds more
308. on with the GOTO command file command LOOKUP allows you to make conditional transfers within a command file See the GOTO and EXIT reference sheets For more information on LOOKUP refer to New Features in Command Files and DO Files DWM 00100 63 in the User s Information section of the AM 100 documentation packet FORMAT LOOKUP Filespec message where telis LOOKUP not to abort the command file if the Filespec is not found but to skip over the next command file line You may also supply an optional message which LOOKUP displays if the file is not found DEFAULTS If portions of the Filespec are omitted LOOKUP assumes the account and device you are logged into and a PRG extension If you do not supply a message LOOKUP allows the appropriate AMOS error message to be printed if Filespec is not found OPTIONS If no appears after LOOKUP if Filespec is not found AMOS aborts the command file If a appears LOOKUP moves directly to the next Line in the command file if Filespec is not found otherwise AMOS skips over the next Line in the command file after the LOOKUP command and continues execution at that point message An optional message that LOOKUP displays if Filespec is not found If a appears the message must follow the slash The message may be any text you wish as long as it fits on the command Line 1 May 1980 LOOKUP Cont d Page 2 OPERATION 1 Place LOOKUP anywhere in a com
309. on of the AMOS Software Update Documentation Packet As it formats FMT210 writes over any data currently on the diskette FMT210 does not require that you mount a diskette before formatting it After formatting a diskette use the SYSACT command to initialize it unless you are going to use DSKCPY to make a literal image of another diskette on the neuly formatted one FORMAT FMT210 pevn Er where Devn specifies the device holding the diskette you want to format OPERATION 1 Type FMT210 followed by the specification of the device holding the diskette you want to format Then type a RETURN For example FMT210 DDA1 Changed 30 April 1981 FMT210 Cont d Page 2 The command above tells FMT210 to format the diskette in Drive One of the floppy device that uses the DDA driver program and therefore to use the AMS format The DOA driver handles diskettes in double density double sided AMS format 2 Now you see the message BEGIN FORMATTING 3 When FMT210 is finished you see the message EXIT 4 FMT210 now returns you to AMOS command Level ERRORS You may see the following error messages when using FMT210 Unit number must be 0 3 You specified a bad unit number Invalid device The device you specified is not a floppy disk device or is not compatible with the AM 210 Floppy Disk Controller board fError code x on track n A media drive or controller error occurred at track n of the diske
310. on the EDIT command Line You can also see several EDIT messages once you begin to edit your file For example SEARCH FAILED You asked EDIT to search for a group of characters that does not exist in your file or at least not in the portion of your file that is in memory x If you enter a command that EDIT does not recognize EDIT echoes the command back to you with a question mark For example xWSS w CHARACTERISTICS Character oriented text editor Creates a backup BAK file assumes an input file extension of MAC Recognizes an Escape which it echoes as a dollar sign as a command delimiter Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 se U email FUNCTION Allows you to access AlphaMAIL the Alpha Micro electronic mail system You may use EMAIL to exchange messages with other AlphaMAIL users on your computer system You may also create messages maintain your incoming and outgoing mail List and create an Alpha Micro Software Performance Report SPR HINTS RESTRICTIONS You may only use EMAIL if you are an authorized user of AlphaMAIL The AlphaMAIL Operator must assign you a user 1D and a password NOTE To run EMAIL the terminal you ere using must be attached to a job that has at least 32K of memory Make sure that your disk is not write protected For more information on EMAIL see the AlphaMAIL User s Manual DSS 10000 06 For information on the program
311. option Then type a RETURN For example SET HEX GET See OPTIONS above for a List of the options you may select 3 To assign a form type to a printer type SET FORMS followed by the name of the printer the form name and a RETURN For example SET FORMS QUME CHECKS The command above assigns the form type CHECKS to the printer named QUME For a List of names of printers on the system check with the System Operator The form type can be any one to six character name you choose 4 To set the recording density of a magnetic tape type SET BPI followed by the device specification that selects the magnetic tape unit you want to access drives 0 7 and the density required 800 or 1600 BPI For example SET BPI MTU1 800 This command prepares MTU1 to change the read or write data at a density of 800 bits per inch To find a list of magnetic tape units on the system type DEVTBL followed by a RETURN The system will handle a maximum of 8 magnetic tape drives CINVALID FUNCTION MET doesn t recognize the option you ve chosen Check your spelling and retype the command line If you are using the SET BPI option this message indicates that you have supplied an invalid device specification or that you have entered an invalid BPI value Make sure that you have designated the maanetic tape unit correctly and that you have specified a BPI of 800 or 1600 For a List of valid MTUs type DEVTBL followed by a RETURN Printe
312. or First file must not be a library To enable LINK to correctly resolve external references to a library you must specify the program that references that Library before you specify the Library file itself Fatal error Attempt to specify overlay xxx as optional You may not use the O switch to designate a file as optional if that object file is an overlay Fatal error Overlay symbol xxxx in segment yyyy was not defined in a previous input segment You may not reference an undefined overlay In other words LINK is trying to process a supposed overlay file but has seen no references to the overlay in a previous file Without such a reference LINK cannot construct the overlay so it aborts and returns you to AMOS command level Fatal error First file must not be an overlay To enable LINK to correctly resolve external references to an overlay you must specify the program that references that overlay before you specify the overlay file itself Fatal error Expression stack error An error occurred when LINK evaluated some expressions in your files You should never see this error message it indicates an internal error Fatal error Expression stack overflow You exceeded the number of nested expressions that LINK can handle Try to find the exceedingly complex expression in your source file and simplify it Changed 30 April 1981 LINK Cont d Page 5 CHARACTERISTICS LINK is re entrant and may
313. or example RENAME OLD BAS e renames the files TEST BAS to TEST OLD DIGIT BAS to DIGIT OLD and UNI BAS to UNI OLD RENAME is a wildcard file command For more information on the use of RENAME refer to Section 9 3 Renaming Files RENAME in the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 FORMAT RENAME Newfilespec 0ldfilespec1 OLdfilespecNH Switcht Switch2 I where Oldfilespec1 OldfilespecN selects the one or more files that you want to rename and Newfilespec determines their new names A Switch is an option request see OPTIONS DEFAULTS RENAME uses the device and PPN you are currently Logged into as file specification defaults Default switches are NODELETE and NOQUERY Defaults for unspecified filenames and extensions are 1 October 1979 RENAME Cont d OPTIONS You may select the following options option code in your command Line Page 2 by including the appropriate QUERY or Q Request confirmation to rename NOQUERY or NOQ Rename without asking for confirmation DELETE or D If file with new name already exists delete it before performing renaming If new name is in use don t perform renaming NODELETE or NOD OPERATION 1 Type RENAME followed by a Newfilespec an equal sign and one or more Oldfilespecs Type a RETURN For example RENAME TTY zDVR 2 DVR12 PRG to TTY12 PRG DVRAA TXT to TTYAA TXT DVR MAC to TTY67 MAC Total of 3 files renamed As RENAME renames th
314. ormal update package with the AMOS Version 4 3 Release Notes If your manual contains these two reference sheets discard them from this change page packet they have not been revised since that time AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE MANUAL IMPORTANT NOTE This manual is a reference manual for the experienced user of the AMOS system Before you use the system for the first time read the Introduction to AMOS DWM 00100 65 the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 and the documents in the AMOS Software Update Documentation Packet You may also be interested in reading Introduction to AMOS DWM 00100 65 which contains an introduction to computers in general and the AMOS system in particular Changed 30 April 1981 Page iii AMOS SYSTEM COMMANDS REFERENCE MANUAL Tabte of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO THE MANUAL 1 1 PREFACE 1 2 CONVENTIONS USED I THIS MANUAL 1 3 CONCEPTS Annan rnm CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION TO AMOS COMMANDS 2 1 COMMANDS TO BE USED WITH CAUTION 2 1 1 Commands that May Only Be Used From the First Memory Partition 2 Commands that Destroy Disk Contents 3 Commands Only For the Use of the System Operator 2 1 4 Access Limitations err 2 1 5 Commands for Experienced Users 2 2 PRIVILEGED COMMANDS 2 4 WILDCARD FILE COMMANDS CHAPTER 3 FILE SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 INTRODUCTION eeeel esee een CHAPTER 4
315. ors if you have used the SET DSKERR command A hard error message takes the form Cannot READ Filespec device error A soft error message may look something Like this CRC Error AMS1 Record 145 CRC Error Record 145 CRC Error Record 145 CRC Error Record 145 CRC Error Record 145 CRC Error AMS1 Record 145 CHARACTERISTICS Assumes that two of the three components it is testing i e the drive the controller and the diskette are good Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 diag3 N FUNCTION Tests memory by writing patterns of ones and zeros into memory and reading them back verifying the pattern as it does so DIAG3 also performs a leak down test HINTS RESTRICTIONS Allows you to specify which memory Locations to test from above DIAG3 itself to the Last contiguous memory address in the block You may restart the test by typing a Control C You may only end the test by resetting the computer DIAG3 performs a 10 second Leak down test on dynamic memories That is it writes a block of ones into memory waits a while then returns to that block to see if the ones are still there FORMAT DIAG3 I DEFAULTS c If you do not supply a starting address DIAG3 begins at the first free memory Location above itself if you do not supply an ending address DIAG3 ends at the last contiguous memory address OPERATION 1 Type DIAG3 followed by a RETURN DIAG3
316. orts library and optional files and can generate a load map file For information on Library optional and load map files see the AMOS Assembly Language Programmer s Manual DWM 00100 43 This manual also contains information on SYMBOL MACRO LINK GLOBAL LIB and DDT FORMAT SYMBOL switches filespec1t filespec2 filespecN switches RED where filespecs select the files you want to process and switch is an option request You may not specify an overlay or library file as the first filespec on the command Line If you have too many filespecs to fit on one screen line you may continue the SYMBOL command line by ending it with a comma SYMBOL accepts as many lines of filespecs as you wish as long as you end the preceding line with a comma If a switch appears in front of a filespec e g SYMBOL MATH O NUM SUB that option request becomes the default for the rest of the command Line If a switch follow a filespec e g SYMBOL MATH NUM O SUB it affects only that filespec NOTE Certain switches Chanaed 30 April 1981 SYMBOL Cont d Page 2 identified in the discussions below as operation switches affect all filespecs on the command Line no matter how they are placed DEFAULTS SYMBOL uses the default extension of 0BJ unless you are specifyina a Library file in which case it uses the default extension of LIB If your fitespec does not contain an account and device specification SYMBOL assume
317. ot appear on that device LOG searches the rest of the units of that device beginning with device unit 0 If you use LOG when you are already logged into the system LOG uses the project or programmer number of the account you are logged into as the defaults For example LOG 3 logs you into an account whose PPN has the same project number as the account you are logged into and a programmer number of 3 OPERATION 1 If you are already logged into an account type LOG followed by a RETURN to find out which PPN and device you are logged in under For example Changed 1 May 1980 LOG Cont d Page 3 login is DSK0 12 34 To log into the system type LOG optionally followed by a device specification and a project programmer number Type a RETURN For example LOG DSK1 47 2 GED In the example above LOG Looks on DSK1 for account 47 2 If it finds it it then looks at the account to see if 3 password is required Passwords are assigned by the System Operator in the interest of system security LOG AMSO 23 4 Password The system does not display your password on the terminal as you type it this prevents other users from seeing your password If AMOS recognizes the password it logs you into the system Once you are logged onto the system LOG displays a message that tells you which device and account you re logged into If any other users are logged into the same account LOG warns you about
318. ot mounted The device holding the disk you want to format is not mounted Mount the disk by using the MOUNT command e 9 MOUNT HWK3 Cannot INIT Devn device does not exist FMT500 cannot find the device you have specified Use the DEVTBL command to see if the device is Listed as a valid system device File specification error You did not specify a device to the FMT500 command CHARACTERISTICS Formats disks used in hard disk devices that run under control of the AM 500 Hard Disk Controller board w When you run FMTSOO make sure that your job is the only one running on the system Writes over any data currently on the disk Changed 30 April 1981 force FUNCTION Allows you to send terminal input to another job HINTS RESTRICTIONS FORCE has two modes single line and multi line Be careful when using FORCE to make sure that the job to whom you are forcing input has enough memory allocated to it to handle the task you are giving it You will often use FORCE to force input to a job that is attached to a pseudo terminal for example to bring up the line printer spooler under control of a pseudo terminal FORMAT FORCE Jobname Comnands and data 5 or FORCE Jobname 2 Commands and data Commands and data 2 2 L where Commands and data are any valid AMOS commands or data that you can enter from the keyboard OPERATION 1 Type FORCE followed by the name of the job to whom you wi
319. otherwise enter the specification of the device on which the data file is to reside Once ISMBLD has created a new data primary index file combination it enters file loading mode It asks Load from file You may enter either a RETURN to create an empty data file or you may specify a sequential data file from which you want to Load data ISMBLD assumes a file extension of SEQ for this data file After Loading the data file ISMBLD returns you to AMOS command Level If you are not creating a new data index file combination i e you have specified a file to ISMBLD that already exists ISMBLD goes directly into file loading mode instead of asking you the List of file parameter questions above you see Processing existing file This notifies you that you are in file Loading mode not file creation mode Now ISMBLD asks for the specification of the file from which you want to Load Load from file ISMBLD assumes a file extension of SEQ for this sequential data file You may enter RETURN to tell ISMBLD not to toad from a file To change the data file device after an ISAM file has been created use the D switch on the ISMBLD command Line For example you want to change the device of the data file from DSKO to DSK1 ISMBLD MAIL D I Processing existing file Current device name is DSKO Enter new device name DSKT 2 1 October 1979 ISMBLD Cont d Page 4 ERRORS Below we List several of t
320. ou can access the files in that account Once you are on the system you can use LOG to tell you which account you re Logged into and you can use LOG to transfer between accounts and devices HINTS RESTRICTIONS The only system commands that you may use if you are not logged into the system are LOG SYSTAT MEMORY ATTACH SYSTEM HELP and SET LOG recognizes the ersatz devices For example LOG BAS Logged into BAS logs you into the System BASIC Language Library Account DSKO 7 6 For a List of the ersatz devices available on the system see Section 1 3 of this manual If you do not use an ersatz device specification to log into an account with which an ersatz device is associated LOG lets you know that such an ersatz device exists LOG DSKO 1 4 Logged into DSK0 L1 41 Ersatz name is SYS Because they are such common typing mistakes LOG treats the characters m and as commas e g the command LOG 100m is translated into LOG 100 1 You may be required to supply a password before the system will log you into an account If you have a command file in your account named START CMD LOG automatically runs that file after it Logs you in This command file can contain AMOS system commands program invocations the names of other command files etc If you want to see the processing of the command file on your terminal remember to include the T symbol in your command file See Chapter 8 Command
321. ount specifications Also writes date and time of backup Used in combination with TAPFIL to transfer files from tape back to disk and TAPDIR to see list of files on a tape For more information on FILTAP TAPDIR and TAPFIL see The Magnetic Tape File Backup Programs in the System Operator s Information section of the AMOS Software Update Documentation Packet Allows you to perform one backup on multiple tape reels A wildcard file command See Chapter 9 Wildcard File Commands of the AMOS User s Guide DWM 00100 35 for information on wildcard specifications You may back up files from any disk account onto tape whether or not the account iS within the project you are logged into Although FILTAP writes the disk specification of the file to the magnetic tape along with the file it does not transfer any password that may be associated with that disk account Always use the NOAPPEND switch when you are writing to a blank e 9 new tape NOAPPEND tells FILTAP to start writing files at the beginning of the tape the APPEND switch tells FILTAP to start uriting files at the end of any existing files on the tape Not for transferring data between Alpha Micro and non Alpha Micro computers use TAPE for that purpose See the TAPE reference sheet Because FILTAP writes the date and time of backup to the tape before you use FILTAP you should remember to use the DATE and TIME programs to make sure that the system date and time
322. our job is the only one running on the system Changed 30 April 1981 fmt500 FUNCTION Formats disks used in hard disk devices that run under the control of the AM 500 Hard Disk Controller e q CDC Hawk hard disk HINTS RESTRICTIONS Formats the disk into physical records of 512 bytes Each logical unit contains 9696 records Before you format a disk FMTSOO0 requires that you use the MOUNT command to mount that disk e 9 MOUNT OSK2 As it formats the disk FMTSOO writes over any data currently on that disk IMPORTANT NOTE When you run FMT500 your job must be the only job running on the system After formatting a disk use the SYSACT command to initialize the disk unless you are going to use DSKCPY to make a literal image of another disk on the newly formatted disk FORMAT FMTSNO Devn where Devn specifies the device holding the disk you want to format OPERATION 1 Type FMT500 followed by the specification of the device holding the disk you want to format Then type a RETURN for example FMTSOO DSK1 GED The command above tells FMTSOO to format the disk in Drive One of the System Device 2 Now you see the message BEGIN FORMATTING Changed 30 April 1981 FMT500 Cont d Page 2 3 When FMTSOO is finished you see the message EXIT 4 FMTSOO now returns you to AMOS command Level ERRORS You may see the following error messages when using FMT500 Cannot WRITE Devn device n
323. ow SYSCPY tells you that the disk copy is done by ringing your terminal bell five times ERRORS If a hard disk error occurs while SYSCPY is using DSKCPY to make a literal image of DSKO you see a device error message Check with the System Operator for help CHARACTERISTICS Command file uses DSKCPY to make Literal image of DSKO onto DSK1 Verifies the copy Assumes that you are not running off the cartridge DO NOT use on devices that run under control of the AM 410 Hard Disk Controller or that have a file BADBLK SYS 1 21 Returns terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 sysmem FUNCTION As part of the system initialization command file defines which memory Locations will be allocated to the bank switchable area of system memory For use only in systems that bank switch memory At AMOS command Level tells you what memory locations are assigned to the system area of switchable memory HINTS RESTRICTIONS Switchable system memory is used to allocate BITMAPs and other system areas in bank switchable memory reducing total resident monitor size When SYSMEM appears within the system initialization command file it must appear after MEMDEF commands and before any BITMAP commands If you are not familiar with bank switching memory on the Alpha Micro system see the Alpha Micro Integrated Systems User s Guide DWM 00101 00 We will not discuss here the mechanics of setting up a bank switched system
324. pdate documentation packet for information on the system boot up process After the system is up and running the SYSTEM command takes on a new purpose it allows you to see what programs are resident in system memory If your System Device is a hard disk SYSTEM also tells you if the system is running off the cartridge FORMAT SYSTEM or SYSTEM Filespec where Filespec selects the program to be included in system memory You may only use the second format within the system initialization command file SYSTEM INI DEFAULTS When you use SYSTEM within the system initialization command file you may optionally include a file specification the default file extension is PRG and the default account is DSK0 1 4 Changed 30 Aprii 1981 SYSTEM Cont d Page 2 OPERATION At AMOS command Level 1 Type SYSTEM followed by a RETURN SYSTEM now Lists all of the Programs that are currently in system memory and tells you how many bytes of memory are used by the monitor The following programs are allocated in system memory VUE PRG TRM DVR Total resident monitor size is 21607 bytes 2 If there are no programs in system memory SYSTEM says No Programs allocated in system memory 3 If you have a hard disk system SYSTEM Lets you know if the system is using your disk cartridge as the System Disk System is runnina from cartridge disk Within the SYSTEM INI 1 You can use one or more SYSTEM
325. pec Size ken where Filespec selects the file you want to create and Size is the number of disk blocks you wish to allocate to that file DEFAULTS If you omit portions of the file specification CREATE assumes the device and account you are logged into and a DAT extension OPERATION 1 Type CREATE followed by the specification of the file you want to create and the number of blocks to allocate to that file Then type a RETURN For example CREATE CUSIOX NEW 10 GED The command above creates the file CUSIOX NEW in the account and device you are logged into The file is ten disk blocks Long 2 When CREATE is finished creating the file it tells you so For example Changed 30 April 1981 CREATE Cont d Page 2 CREATE DSK3 MTNDEWF110 11 5 MTNDEW DAT created ERRORS If you do not enter the CREATE command line in the proper format e g if you type CREATE followed by a RETURN you see Command error You can also see standard AMOS error messages For example Cannot OPEN Filespec device full AMOS wasn t able to find enough contiguous disk blocks to allocate your file Even though the total number of disk blocks free on the disk may be greater than the number of blocks you want to assign to your random file AMOS cannot create your file unless it finds enough blocks that physically adjoin on the disk Ask the System Operator to pack the disk to consolidate the free disk blocks into a contiguous gro
326. pecifications then it Lists them 2 You can use standard wildcard symbols in your file specifications For example DEL NEWPR 2 NEWPR1 SBR NEWPRT PRG ERRORS DEL displays no error messages You ll know that it wasn t able to find the modules you specified if it does not report back with a List of modules that it erased 1 October 1979 DEL Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Y When it erases modules it shifts any remaining modules up in memory if they have memory addresses greater than the deleted modules Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 devtbl FUNCTION As part of the system initialization command file defines the devices used on the system At AMOS command level DEVTBL tells you what devices are defined in the system initialization command file HINTS RESTRICTIONS When used in the system initialization command fite SYSTEM INI DEVTBL tells the system which device driver programs to include in the system monitor As the system processes the DEVTBL command line it builds a device table in memory The fiie system consults the device table for device assignments The DEVTBL command line thus defines the devices that you can use on the system Every time you add a new device to the system e g a new type of disk you must add it to the system device table Remember to also define bitmaps in the SYSTEM INI for every new disk device see the BITMAP reference sheet NOTE
327. pecifies the account on SMDS where AMOS can find the file A N CHAPTER 4 FILE SPECIFICATION DEFAULTS AND WILDCARD SYMBOLS 4 1 DEFAULTS If you omit elements of a file specification most commands can fill in some of the missing information for you For example if you omit the device specification most commands assume that you want to access a file on the device you are currently logged into The assumptions that commands make bout missing file specification elements are called defaults The defaults that a command uses depends on the specific command Each reference sheet in this manual lists the defaults used by the command if they differ from the standard system defaults 4 1 1 Standard System Defaults ALL AMOS commands use the standard file specification defaults below Several other commands the wildcard file commands also assume additional default information 1 If you omit a device and unit number from a specification e g WORKER BASL100 41 AMOS assumes the device and unit number that you are currently logged into 2 If you omit the device unit number e 9 DSK WDOBJ PRGL23 41 AMOS uses the default unit number zero The specification above then selects file DSKO WDOBJ PRG 23 4 3 If you omit the PPN AMOS uses as the default the account you are currently Logged into FILE SPECIFICATION DEFAULTS AND WILDCARD SYMBOLS Page 4 2 4 If you omit a file extension the default extension depend
328. r 1979 hwklod FUNCTION Bootstrap loader program for a system that uses the Control Data Corporation Hawk hard disk as the System Device HINTS RESTRICTIONS The HWKLOD program is embedded in the micro code ROM on the AM 500 which allows the system to boot off a System Disk on a Hawk hard disk when a hardware reset occurs that is when you hit the RESET button You may use HWKLOD at AMOS command level to reset the system if your System Device is a CDC Hawk hard disk The Hawk is a 10 megabyte hard disk device five megabyte fixed five megabyte removable The memory partition of the job that uses the HWKLOD command MUST be in Bank Zero if your system bank switches memory For information on bank switched systems refer to the document Memory Management Option DWM 00100 10 in the AM 100 documentation packet FORMAT HWKLOD 2 OPERATION 1 Type HWKLOD followed by a RETURN HWKLOD I The system now resets itself by reading a Copy of the HWKLOD bootstrap program into system memory and executing it 2 Once invoked the HWKLOD program reads the operating system Skeleton monitor DSKO SYSTEM MONE1 4 into memory SYSTEM MON then brings up the system under the control of your system initialization command file SYSTEM INI 3 Once the system is up and running you see the AMOS prompt ERRORS HWKLOD generates no error messages If it is not able to find SYSTEM MON on the cartridge HWKLOD searches the fixed d
329. r not found You tried to use SET to associate a form type with a printer but SET doesn t recognize the printer name you specified Check your spelling then check with the System Operator for a List of printers on the system Changed 30 April 1981 SET Cont d Page 4 CHARACTERISTICS A Allows you to choose various system output options for your job see the options currently in effect define a form type to be mounted on a specific printer or SET the read or record bits per inch rate on a magnetic tape unit Changed 30 April 1981 FUNCTEON Tells you the size in bytes of your disk file HINTS RESTRICTIONS Tells you the number of bytes in the specified file in decimal FORMAT SIZE Filespec Y where Fitespec specifies the file whose size you want to know DEFAULTS SIZE assumes the account and device you are logged into and a file extension of PRG OPERATION 1 Type SIZE followed by the specification of the file whose size you want to see Then type a RETURN For example SIZE FORM TXT SIZE IS 1483 BYTES ERRORS You may see several of the more common system error messages when you use SIZE For example Cannot OPEN Filespec file not found SIZE was not able to find the file you specified Check your spelling and make sure that the account and device specifications were correct Cannot READ Filespec device does not exist SIZE doesn t recognize the device you specified Check
330. r system NOTE You may not use single density AMS format if you are going to be running the drive under control of the AM 210 disk controller Remember to add a BITMAP command in the system initialization command file for each new format drive controller combination you create You may also need to modify the DEVTBL command Line FORMAT FIXDVR GE OPERATION 1 Log into the system Device Driver Library account LOG DSK0 11 6 D 2 Type FIXDVR followed by a RETURN FIXDVR 3 FIXDVR now begins to ask you a series of questions a Controller type A AM 200 B AM 210 or C Icom nter the etter A or to select the type of floppy disk controller you are using for your floppy disk drive 1f you select the Icom controller FIXDVR now skips down to question d see below Changed 30 April 1981 FIXDVR Cont d Page 2 5 b Drive type A Persci B Wangco or C COC Enter the letter that selects the type of disk drive you are using You may not select CDC if you selected AM 200 above Double density FIXDVR asks this question only if you have already selected the AM 21N as your disk controller Enter a Y for Yes or an N for No depending on whether or not you want to use double density disks d Format A STD B AMS or C IMG Enter the letter that selects the disk format you want the driver to use You may not specify the AMS format if the driver is to use the Icom controller or if it is to u
331. re performing the disk copy DSKCPY warns you that it is suspending all users while the disk copy takes place ALL other users will be suspended while HAWK copy is running it return to continue or control C to abort Changed 30 April 1981 DSKCPY Cont d Page 4 If any users are running on the system type a Control C When you are sure that no one else is running you can use the DSKCPY command again Remember that if the device specification of a Hawk device is DSK you can just enter the unit numbers of the devices you want to copy between For example DSKCPY GED FALL other users will be suspended while HAWK c py is running Hit return to continue or control c to abort BE Input drive Output drive 165 TCopying 9696 blocks Tbuplication and verification completed The fast copy takes about six minutes 2 If other users are running on the system you may want to use the old mode of disk copying This type of disk copy will take longer than the fast copy but you can perform it while others are using the system Type DSKCPY followed by a 0 then type a RETURN DSKCPY O Input drive HWk2 Output drive HWK3 Teopying 9898 blocks ouplication and verification completed The old Hawk disk copy mode takes about 13 minutes 3 To generate a hash total for the disk copied to use the H switch For example DSKCPY H ED or DSKCPY O H ERRORS You may see the
332. red key in bytes When you Later access the ISAM file you are now building you must remember to pad with blanks or other characters keys that are smaller than this size b Position of key Enter the Location of the key within the data record Enter the number of the first character position in the record that the key occupies c Size of data record Specify in bytes the size of the records in the data file or the maximum size in the case of variable Length records d Number of records to allocate Number of records which the data file is to contain 5 Entries per index block Enter the number of entries per each index block f Empty index blocks to allocate Enter the number of additional empty index blocks you want to allocate g Primar Directory If you are creating a data file primary index file combination enter Y otherwise enter N h Secondary index to file If you are creating a secondary index file instead of a data file primary index file combination ISMBLD prompts you for the specification of the primary index file to which this secondary index file cross indexes After you supply this information 1 October 1979 ISMBLD Cont d Page 3 ISMBLD returns you to AMOS command level i Data File Device ISMBLD asks this question if you are creating a data file primary index file combination f the index file and data file are to be on the same device enter just a RETURN
333. rmation section of the AMOS Software Update Documentation Packet The tape you read via TAPDIR must previously have been written by FILTAP See the FILTAP and TAPFIL reference sheets Accepts full wildcard specifications which select the files to be Listed in the directory The account and device portions of the specifications refer to the disk account and device from which the files were originally backed up TAPDIR is a wildcard command See Chapter 9 of the AMOS User s Guide OWM 00100 35 for information on wildcard file specifications Similar in use to DIR See the DIR reference sheet FORMAT TAPDIR switchMListfilespec HinspeciH inspec2 inspecN En where switch is an option request The optional Listfilespec specifies a disk file to contain the tape directory display Inspec specifies the files on the tape whose directory listing you want to see DEFAULTS The default Listfilespec is DIRECT LST in the account and device you are logged into The default inspec is and the account and device you are logged into The default maqnetic tape drive device specification is MTU OPTIONS The single TAPDIR switch is KILL it tells TAPOIR to delete any existing Listfite that matches the specified Listfilespec before creating the new Listfile KILL is an operation switch it may appear anywhere on the command Line 30 Aprit 1981 TAPDIR Cont d Page 2 OPERATION 1 Type TAPDIR followed b
334. rror messages when using CRT410 You must be logged into PPN 1 23 to run CRT410 Because it writes data into every block on the disk CRT410 is a rather dangerous command to use You must be logged in as System Operator to use it 215 bad tracks is maximum You tried to give a number larger than 15 as the number of bad tracks you will accept on the disk you are certifying Track 0 did not verify First track must verify CRT410 could not verify track O Because the first track MUST verify for the certification to continue CRT410 now stops the certification and returns you to AMOS command Level Track n did not verify CRT4TU marked track n as a bad track in the BADBLK SYS file Device has exceeded maximum number of errors R ound more bad tracks than the value you specified as the maximum number of bad tracks you will accept CRT41D now stops the certification and returns you to AMOS command levet 25100 data transfer error An error occurred with the AM 410 controller CRT410 stops the certification and returns you to AMOS command Level A number of these errors can indicate hardware problems Changed 1 May 1980 CRT410 Cont d Page 4 Nonexistent device our device specification on the CRT410 command Line is invalid The system believes that the device does not exist Check your spelling and try again 2Certification incompiete You typed a Control C or some other event happened to interrupt the certifi
335. rrors See the REDALL reference sheet for more information about disk diagnostic tests The problem can be fixed using DSKDDT but the data in the block may be lost for more information on DSKDDT see the DSKDDT reference sheet Sentinel field error during disk hash drive N block X where drive N is a decimal number and block X is an octal or hexadecimal number This can only happen when you are using the fast copy mode of DSKCPY or HASHER on a Hawk hard disk system The contents of a disk block have become unformatted Verify if there is a problem by using REDALL to diagnose the disk and report any read errors See the REDALL reference sheet for more information about disk diagnostic tests Undefined error during disk hash drive N block X where drive N is a decimal number and block X is an octal or hexadecimal number This can only happen when you are using the fast copy mode of DSKCPY or HASHER on a Hawk hard disk system A hard error occurred which was not definable as any of the foregoing AM 500 hard disk controller errors Verify if there is a problem by using REDALL to diagnose the disk and report any read errors See the REDALL reference sheet for more information about disk diagnostic tests See the documentation that accompanies the AM 500 board for more information on these errors and the conditions they report CHARACTERISTICS HASHER generates a hash total for a specified disk If you want a hash tota
336. s Like Line feed but decrements current location counter If DT does not understand a command it echoes it back to you with a question mark Y Y CHARACTERISTICS For example Useful for testing devices on the S 100 bus by allowing you to examine and modify the memory locations used by the 1 0 ports Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 queue FUNCTION Use within the system initialization command file to increase the number of blocks allocated to the monitor queue Use at AMOS command level to find out how many monitor queue blocks are available for use HINTS RESTRICTIONS Various portions of the system e g the Line printer spooler use the monitor queue system The monitor queue is also available for use by user programs The initial size of the queue is 20 ejght word blocks The number of queue blocks you need depends on the tasks you need to perform Use the QUEUE command in the system initialization command file to increase the size of the monitor queue Remember however that increasing the number of queue blocks increases the amount of memory used by the monitor To find out how many queue blocks are available use the QUEUE command at AMOS command Level a FORT nr or QUEUE n OPERATION 1 To find out how many queue blocks are available at AMOS command level type QUEUE followed by a RETURN QUEUE 97 Queue blocks available 2 To increase the number of bl
337. s embedded in the files HINTS RESTRICTIONS Use one of the system text editors to create a text file Enter TXTFMT commands directly into the text file TXTFMT commands must be the only text on a line and must begin in the first character position at the left of the Line You must precede each command with a slash After exiting the editor i e you are at AMOS command level you may now invoke TXTFMT to format the text file s you have created TXTFMT formats one or more text files into a single formatted file This formatted file bears the same name as the first file specified on the TXTFMT command line but it has a LST extension I For information on using TXTFMT and on the TXTFMT commands refer to TXTFMT User s Manual DWM 00100 07 Rev 8N0 FORMAT M TXTFMT Filespec1 Filespec2 Filespech CED where Filespec selects the text file s you want to format DEFAULTS TXTFMT assumes file extensions of TXT Many of the TXTFMT commands have default values Refer to the TXTFMT User s Manual for information on the TXTFMT commands OPERATION 1 Type TXTFMT followed by the one or more file specifications that select the text files you want to format Then type a RETURN For example TXTFMT HEADER COPYRT TITLE PRFACE MAIN GEN The command above formats the files HEADER TXT COPYRT TXT TITLE TXT PRFACE TXT and MAIN TXT into the single file HEADER LST iu Changed 30 April 1981 TXTFMT Cont d Page 2 2
338. s every block on the disk even if some blocks contain no data Ccopyina 500 blocks Duplication and verification completed The amount of time it takes to perform this disk copy depends on the device An AMS format diskette takes about two minutes to copy and verify a Phoenix hard disk takes about 28 minutes If you want DSKCPY to generate a hash total for the disk copied to use the H switch For example DSKCPY H Input drive STON Gen Output drive STD1 Copyina 500 blocks Duplication and verification completed Hash is 672 DSKCPY displays the hash total for disk after it has finished the disk copy You can now check this number against the hash total for the source disk to make sure that a perfect copy was done To generate a hash total for the source disk use the HASHER command See the HASHER reference sheet in this manual To copy between Hawk hard disks 1 Enter DSKCPY followed by a RETURN DSKCPY Now DSKCPY asks you for the Input drive and the Output drive Enter the specifications of the devices that contain the disk you want to copy from and the disk you want to copy to You should write protect the disk you are copying from so that you don t accidentally write to it When you are copying between Hawk disks DSKCPY automatically uses the special fast copy mode Because this mode causes DSKCPY to communicate directly with the AM 500 no other users on the system may run while you a
339. s of the cartridge down onto the first fixed disk DSK1 Remember when you mount the System Disk cartridge and reset the system the cartridge becomes DSKO and the fixed disk becomes DSK1 IMPORTANT NOTE If you bring up the system with a non System Disk cartridge mounted and then mount a System Disk cartridge without resetting the system it continues to run off the fixed disk In this case if you use CPY410 it copies everything from fixed disk DSK0 to fixed disk DSK1 writing over all data on DSK1 Unless that is precisely what you want to do make very sure that you are running off the cartridge before using CPY410 Changed 1 May 1980 CPY410 Cont d Page 2 If you are not sure whether or not you are running off the cartridge or the fixed disk type SYSTEM followed by a RETURN If you are running off the cartridge that is if the cartridge is DSKO SYSTEM tells you so SYSTEM GED SYSTEM IS RUNNING FROM CARTRIDGE DISK x FORMAT CPY410 OPERATION 1 Place the System Disk update cartridge in the Phoenix drive Reset the system by pushing the RESET button 2 Type SYSTEM followed by a RETURN If you do not see SYSTEM IS RUNNING FROM CARTRIDGE DISK x x you are running off the fixed disk CPY410 will copy from the fixed disk DSKO to fixed disk DSK1 If are running off the cartridge type CPY410 followed by a RETURN CPY410 GED 3 You now see the following message Type a RETU
340. s on the command you are communicating with For example TXTFMT assumes a TXT extension ERASE assumes an empty extension IMPORTANT NOTE The wildcard file commands handle file specification defaults a Little differently than do the rest of the commands on the system Refer to Section 9 1 Introduction to Wildcard File Commands in the AMOS User s Guide for information on these commands 4 2 WILDCARD SYMBOLS This section discusses the special symbols that can appear in file Specifications The basic file specification selects only one file For example the specification DSK1 CRLF MACC300 21 selects the file CRLF MAC on device DSK1 in account 300 2 Wildcard symbols allow one file specification to select several files For example TXT selects all files in the account and device you are logged into that have TXT extensions regardless of name Not all AMOS commands recognize wildcard symbols ALL of the commands that are able to process wildcards recognize the standard system wildcards In addition wildcard file commands have an advanced wildcarding ability not shared by the rest of the commands on the system 4 2 1 Standard System Wildcard Symbols Below are the standard system wildcard symbols Matches any symbol or group of symbols in a filename or extension BOTANY selects all files in your account that have the name BOTANY regardless of extension You may precede the with one or more symbols e g
341. s that the file is in the account and device you are logged into Next it Looks in your project Library account P 0J Finally it Looks in the System MACRO account DSKN L7 73 The default switches are S generate a symbol table file and R designate a required file OPTIONS You may select one of the options below by specifying the appropriate switch E Include equated symbols in the symbol table file You may also use E with the M switch to tell SYMBOL to put equated symbols in the Load map file Operation switch L Designates a library fite M Generate a Load map MAP file Operation switch IN Suppress S switch Operation switch 0 Designates an optional file P Generate program PRG or OVR file Operation switch R Designates a required file The default switch Cancels the L and O switches IS Generate a symbol table SYM file The default switch Operation switch You may specify multiple switches by preceding each switch with a slash OPERATION 1 Enter SYMBOL followed by the soecifications of the files you want to Process together then type a RETURN For example SYMBOL M VISFIL VIS1 UTILIT LIR L GEN Notice that the command Line above specifies a Library file UTILIT LIB L By using the M switch we are also asking SYMBOL for a load map file 2 If you have more file specifications than will fit on one line end the current command Line with a comma SYMBOL now displa
342. s the CPU real time clock a value to use in converting clock ticks to actual time in seconds The usual frequency in the United States is 60 Hz overseas it is 50 Hz Place CLKFRQ after all SYSTEM commands in the SYSTEM INI Use CLKFR at AMOS command level to find out what frequency was defined by the CLKFRQ command in the system initializaton command file You can also change the frequency set in the SYSTEM INI by using CLKFRQ at AMOS command Level NOTE You must include the CLKFRQ command in the SYSTEM INI If you do not the system stores a zero in the monitor Location reserved for the clock frequency and those programs that refer to the real time clock e g BASIC will not be able to calculate time correctly Note that CLKFRQ in no way affects the speed at which your system operates FORMAT ELKFRO Y or ELKFRO n y where n is the frequency in Hz that is being applied to the input Line of the CPU real time clock OPERATION 1 At AMOS command level to find out what value is being used as the clock frequency type CLKFRQ followed by a RETURN ELKFRO Y CURRENT CLOCK FREQUENCY VALUE SET FOR 60 HZ 1 October 1979 CLKFRQ Cont a Page c To set the frequency used by the reai time clock use one the system text editors ana egit the SYSTEM INI file Enter the CLKFRQ command after ali SYSTEM commands Type CLKFRG followed by the frequency in Hz being applied to the CPU real time clock line For examp
343. s you to kitl the program currentiy being run by another job HINTS RESTRICTIONS The KILL command kills the program currently being executed by the specified job If other programs are waiting in Line to be executed you must enter one KILL command for each program you want to halt KILL stops the execution of a program by sending a Control C to the job if the program running does not accept Control Cs a KILL command accomplishes no purpose NOTE TO THE SYSTEM OPERATOR To properly initialize the jobs on the System your system initialization command file must contain one KILL command for each job defined on the system The KILL command for a particular job must appear after the ATTACH command that attaches a terminal to that job but before any FORCE commands that force input to the job DO NOT KILL the job i the system is coming up under i e the first job in the JOBS command Line Use a separate KILL command for each job FORMAT KILL Jobname I where Jobname selects the job you want to kill OPERATION 1 Type KILL and the name of the job whose program you want to kill then type a RETURN SKILL J0B4 ERRORS CNONEXISTENT J083 You entered an invalid job name Check your spelling then use the SYSTAT command to see a List of the valid jobs on the system n Ns 1 October 1979 KILL Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS You can use KILL either at AMOS command level or within the SYSTEM INI file to send a Control C to a job
344. se single density format on a drive running under control of the AM 210 controller If you have previously selected the Icom controller FIXDVR now skips down to question f e Double sided FIXDVR asks this question only if you have previously selected the AM 210 controller Enter a Y for Yes or an N for No depending on whether you plan to use the driver on double sided disks f Enter new driver name Enter the name you want to assign to the driver program Each driver must have a unique three character name After you have finished answering its questions FIXDVR configures the driver and says New driver is now in memory bitmap size is nn en enver 15 DOM In memory bitmap size is nn where nn is the number of words you must assign to the bitmap for the new device Although the new driver is in memory it is not yet a file on the disk Save it to the disk by using the SAVE command For example SAVE DDS DVR GED If you do not specify an extension SAVE saves the file under the DVR extension indicating a device driver program Changed 30 April 1981 FIXDVR Cont d Page 3 6 If you are adding a new device to the system remember to modify the system initialization command file to change the system device table and bitmap areas See the reference sheets for DEVTBL and BITMAP ERRORS Could not find xxxxxx DVR FIXDVR couldn t find the necessary file If you are configuring a driver for the AM 20
345. sh to force input If you now type a RETURN you inform AMOS that you want to use FORCE in multi line mode FORCE J0B2 O Now type one or more Lines of commands and data To end the FORCE command enter two RETURNS i e make a blank Line For example FORCE 3083 2 TOG DSK0 110 5 TXTFMT HEADER 9 2 1 October 1979 FORCE Cont d Page 2 2 To use FORCE in single line mode enter a single line of commands or data after the Jobname on the FORCE command line FORCE JOB2 RUN SINE 2 ERRORS You may see any of the system error messages that can result from the commands and data that you ve forced to the other job You may also see the following CNONEXISTENT JOB FORCE doesn t recognize the name of the job to whom you are trying to force input Check your spelling then use the SYSTAT command to see what jobs are on the system CNO TERMINAL ATTACHED TO JOB You need to use the ATTACH command to assign a terminal to the job to whom you want to force input You can assign a pseudo terminal if you do not need to see any output from that job CHARACTERISTICS Forces input to another job on the system Make sure that the job to whom you are forcing input has enough memory allocated to it to handle the tasks Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 global FUNCTION Takes a group of assembly Language object OBJ files and produces an alphabetic cross reference which Li
346. sion of MAC OPERATION 1 Type EDIT followed by the specification of the file you want to edit Then type a RETURN For example EDIT MASTER MAC Y After a moment you see the EDIT prompt a 1 October 1979 EDIT Cont d 2 Page 2 Now you can begin to enter EDIT commands See the summary Ne below Commands may be either in upper or lower case To tell EDIT to execute a Line of commands end that Line with two Escapes To exit EDIT enter the E command or EQ if you want to exit without updating your original file and two Escapes ESS COMMAND SUMMARY The List below briefly summarizes most of the EDIT commands For an explanation of the commands see the document EDIT A Character oriented Text Editor DWM 00100 39 Rev A01 in the AM 100 documentation packet To repeat a command enclose the command in angle it For I Dun s FS N HK HD EQ brackets preceded by the number of times you want to repeat example 30 lt 10C 20 gt Append file records Linefeed Line advance and type Print free memory OJ Jump pointer to front Insert text of buffer Insert special char 2J Jump pointer to end acter n is its ASCII of buffer value nJ Jump pointer to nth Search character in buffer P Search and replace Gx Get auxiliary buffer Whole file search Vx Verify auxiliary buffer Kilt entire buffer Xx Save auxiliary buffer Delete entire bu
347. specification error SKIP did not understand your device specification Make sure that the device you specified is defined in your system device table Type DEVTBL followed by a RETURN for a List of the valid devices on the system 1 October 1979 SKIP Cont d Page 2 CHARACTERISTICS Requires that MTSTAT SYS be in system memory and that the device you want to access be defined in your system device table Do not use while other jobs are accessing the specified device Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 sisep FUNCTION Allows you to put your own job to sleep for a specified amount of time HINTS RESTRICTIONS The number you give SLEEP tells the operating system how many seconds to keep your job inactive The SLEEP command is useful in command files for keeping your job inactive until another procedure completes FORMAT SLEEP N where N is a decimal number that specifies the number of seconds you want your job to stay inactive DEFAULTS If you do not specify an amount of time to the SLEEP command SLEEP assumes a value of 0 seconds OPERATION 1 Type SLEEP followed by the number of seconds you want your job to remain inactive Then type a RETURN For example SLEEP 60 I 2 The example above tells AMOS to put your job to sleep for one minute ERRORS SLEEP displays no error messages CHARACTERISTICS Puts your job into inactive status for a specified number
348. specs to fit on one screen Line you may continue the LINK command line by ending it with a comma LINK accepts as many Lines of filespecs as you wish as long as you end the preceding Line with a comma lf a switch appears in front of a filespec e g LINK MATH 0 NUM SUB that option request becomes the default for the rest of the command Line lf a switch follows a filespec e g LINK MATH NUM O SUB it affects only that filespec NOTE Certain switches identified in the discussions below as operation switches affect all filespecs on the command Line no matter how they are placed DEFAULTS LINK uses the default extension of 0BJ unless you are specifying a Library file in which case LINK uses the default extension of LIB If your filespec does not contain an account and device specification LINK assumes that the file is in the account and device you are logged into Next it Looks in your project library account P 01 Finally it looks in the System MACRO account DSK0 L7 7 The default switches are P generate a program file and R designate 8 required file You may select one of the options below by specifying the appropriate switch E Include equated symbols in the symbols table file You must use E with the M or S switch Operation switch L Designates a library fite M Generate a Load map MAP file Operation switch N Suppress P switch Operation switch 0 Designates an optional file
349. ss of course the new file has the same name and extension as one of the old files If you do not specify the extension of the new file specification APPEND assumes a null extension that is an extension with no characters If you do not specify the extension of the first old file specification APPEND assumes that the first old file specification has the same extension the new file specification has Similariy if you do not specify the extension of any subsequent old file specification APPEND assumes that that old file specification has the same extension as the old file specification immediately previous to C it FORMAT APPEND Newfilespec Oldfilespect Oldfilespec2 Oldfilespech Rer where Newfilespec specifies the new file that will hold the contents of the combined files and Oldfilespect OldfilespecN Lists the one or more files that you want to merge DEFAULTS APPEND assumes the account and device you are currently logged into APPEND assumes a null file extension i e a no character extension for the new file specification APPEND assumes the extension of the new file specification for the first old fite specification and then assumes for each subsequent old file specification the actual or assumed extension of the previous old file specification u Changed 30 April 1981 APPEND Cont d Page 2 OPERATION r 1 4 ERRORS Type APPEND followed by the specification of the new file
350. st memory board is usually 100 octal b The ON and OFF constants These values determine which sections of memory on the memory boards are assigned to the bank and whether they are turned ON or OFF One value specifies the number to be sent to the memory board to turn those sections of memory ON one specifies the number to be sent to the memory board to turn them OFF These values vary depending on the type of memory boards you use Refer to the documentation for that memory board for this information A typical MEMDEF statement might look Like MEMDEF 100 0 14 where 100 selects the 1 0 port address used by the memory board that makes up the bank O is the ON constant 14 is the OFF constant Note that you may incorporate more than one memory board in a bank by including the slash symbol For example MEMDEF 100 1 0 101 1 0 102 1 0 1 October 1979 MEMDEF Cont d Page 3 defines a single memory bank that uses portions of three different memory boards that are located at 1 0 port addresses 100 101 and 102 ERRORS MEMDEF generates the following error messages MEMORY MANAGEMENT NOT ACTIVE You have used MEMDEF from AMOS command level but your system does not bankswitch memory LFORMAT ERROR IN PARAMETER SEQUENCE MEMDEF does not understand the MEMDEF command Line you supplied Make sure that you are using the symbols correctly and that each MEMDEF Line contains 1 0 port address ON constant and OFF const
351. standard system error messages if you provide invalid file or device specifications For example 2Cannot READ Devn device does not exist Make sure you have defined the magnetic tape drive in your system device table You can also see the following TAPE message You are writing O characters in a tape block This message indicates that you made an error in entering values to the TAPE questions that asked for blocking information Type a Control C to exit to AMOS command Level and try using TAPE again CHARACTERISTICS MTSTAT SYS must be in system memory Make sure that you convert the data you transfer so that it is compatible with the AMOS system TAPE works only with sequential disk files that contain fixed length data records The default blocking factor and data record size for writing data from file to tape is blocking factor 1 data record size 512 bytes Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 time FUNCTION Displays or sets the system time of day and resets the time of day on the AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board HINTS RESTRICTIONS Displays time in AM PM format allows you to set the time either in that format or in military i e 24 hour format Requires the file TODCNV PRG in account 1 4 of your System Disk Certain features are enabled only if your system contains an AM 120 Auxiliary 1 0 Controller board The AM 120 board performs several functions
352. sts all global symbols in the files and shows which files define them and which files accept them as externally defined symbols HINTS RESTRICTIONS The Alpha Micro macro assembler MACRO allows you to segment assembly Language programs You can assemble these segments separately and then Link them together with LINK the linkage editor Each segment is able to reference symbols that occur in other segments MACRO accomplishes this by allowing you to use the INTERN and EXTERN statements Let s say that you define a symbol within a file By using the INTERN statement you can make the symbol available to other segments that will be Linked together with that file Other files that reference a symbol defined in another segment must contain an EXTERN statement for that symbol so that LINK knows that a definition for that symbol exists in another segment MACRO also allows you to overlay a portion of a program with a program from the disk the OVRLAY statement accomplishes this For each OVRLAY statement an INTERN statement must exist in another segment which identifies the start of the overlay in that segment GLOBAL produces a Listing file that contains a cross reference of all symbols that have been referenced in an INTERN EXTERN or OVRLAY statement so that you can see in which segments those references occur For information on INTERN EXTERN OVRLAY and MACRO see AMOS Assembly Language Programmer s Reference Manual DWM 00100 43
353. switch The L switch tells DSKANA to display a full listing of all 1 PPNs 2 account directories and files along with the disk addresses of the blocks that they occupy If you omit the L switch from the DSKANA command Line you do not see this information or any specific file error messages but you still see the regular OSKANA messages The E switch The E switch tells DSKANA to List only the PPNs of the accounts on the disk and those disk blocks in which errors occurred for each error you see the following information 1 number of the block at which the error occurred 2 the appropriate file error message 3 the file account and device in which the error occurred OPERATION Using DSKANA without the L or E switches 1 Type DSKANA followed by the specification of the device whose contents you want to analyze type a RETURN DSKANA now tells you that it is beginning to analyze the disk For example DSKANA DSK3 BEN TBegin analysis of DSK1 2 You see nothing more for some moments until DSKANA finishes reading the disk except the numbers of the PPNs as DSKANA progresses through the disk accounts For example 1 2 120 0 20 11 Changed 30 April 1981 DSKANA Cont d Page 3 When DSKANA finishes reading the disk it displays the following information The following blocks were marked in use but not in a file You may next see a List of block numbers his is not necessarily anything to be al
354. t 45 IDX freelist pointer 000004 IDX freecount 22 Records allocated 5 Update counter Top dir blk pointer 000001 000001 000000000002 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000 177777 000002 ee 000000000003 000000000000 000000000000 1000000000000 Chapter 3 Dumping an ISAM File with ISMDMP in the ISAM System User s Guide discusses the elements of the ISMDMP display in detail Several of the items of information in the upper portion of the display are parameters that you supply when you use ISMBLD to build the ISAM file e g Size of data record Size of key etc Some of the other important elements of this display are a Size of dir entry Amount of storage needed to store key key rounded up to even 4 1 October 1979 ISMDMP Cont d Page 4 b Size of dir block Number of entries per block size of dir entry 2 c Type of key Always zero d Blocking factor This value gives the number of Logical data records that fit into each physical disk block This number gives the blocking factor for the data file and is thus 512 record size e IDA freelist pointer A byte pointer into the data file f IDA freecount Number of records free in data file g IDX freelist pointer Logical block number of next free block
355. t Important Notice for ISAM Users DWM 00100 36 Rev A01 in the AM 100 documentation packet NOTE Although you call ISAM functions from within your BASIC or assembly Language programs you may not run the program ISAM PRG directly from AMOS command Level FORMAT ISMBLD Filespec t Switches I where Filespec selects the name you want to assign to the IDA data and IDX index files DEFAULTS ISMBLD assumes an extension of SEQ when you specify a file from which to load data OPTIONS You may select the options below by including the proper switches on the ISMBLD command Line For information on Exclusive Open Mode and Counted Update Mode refer to the document Important Notice for ISAM Users DWM 00100 36 Rev A01 1 October 1979 ISMBLD Cont d Page 2 OPERATION 1D IN 1 Change the data file device specification Prevent ISMBLD from using Exclusive Open Mode If you want to use ISMBLD to create a new ISAM file type ISMBLD followed by the name you want to assign to the file For example ISMBLD LABELS 9 To create an ISAM file im Counted Update Mode use the N switch on the ISMBLD command Line otherwise ISMBLD uses the Exclusive Open Mode If the file you specify does not yet exist ISMBLD asks you a series of questions from the parameters you supply ISMBLD generates a data file primary index file combination ISMBLD asks a Size of key Enter the size of the desi
356. t be to attach a printer to a job as a terminal so that you can get hardcopy of program output FORMAT ATTACH GED or ATTACH Job or ATTACH Terminal Job GE Using ATTACK in the first format tells you what jobs and terminals are attached to each other Using ATTACH in the second format attaches the specified job to your terminal Changed 1 May 1980 ATTACH Cont d Page 2 Using ATTACH in the third format attaches the specified terminal and job OPERATION 1 ERRORS To find out what jobs and terminals are attached to each other type ATTACH followed by a RETURN ATTACH GED TERMI ATTACHED TO JOBA TERM2 ATTACHED TO JOBC DUKE ATTACHED TO SPOOL To attach your terminal to a specific job type ATTACH followed by a job name Type a RETURN The job name is set by the JOBS command in the SYSTEM INI To see the names of all of the jobs on the system type SYSTAT followed by a RETURN The first column on the left of the SYSTAT display lists the jobs ATTACH DUKE EN To attach a specific job to a specific terminal type ATTACH followed by the terminal name a comma and the job name Type a RETURN ATTACH TERMI JOB4 The terminal names are set by the TRMDEF commands in the SYSTEM INI To see the names of all of the terminals on the System type TRMDEF followed by a RETURN The first column on the Left of the display Lists all of the terminals If you try to attach a termi
357. t data that is not ASCII e g a machine Language program the display won t make sense Enter the number of the disk record you want to display in the same number base that the system is using for your numeric displays usually octal You can change this system display base to hexadecimal by using the SET HEX command FORMAT ASCDMP Devn nnnn I where Devn specifies the logical unit on which the record occurs and nnnn is the number of the physical record on the disk that you want to display OPERATION 1 Type ASCDMP followed by a device specification and physical record number Then type a RETURN For example ASCDMP DSKO 200 Y 2 ASCDMP tells you what record it is accessing LRECORD nnnn1 and then displays the contents of the physical disk record on your terminal in ASCII form To find out what records are contained in a specific file use the DSKFIL command ERRORS ASCDMP generates no error messages of its own but can display some of the standard system error messages For example Cannot INIT Devn device does not exist The system cannot find the logical unit you specified Check your spelling and try again For example did you enter DKS1 instead of DSK1 2 1 October 1979 ASCDMP Cont d Page 2 Cannot READ Devn disk not mounted You are trying to access a logical unit that is not mounted Use the MOUNT command to mount the disk and try again CHARACTERISTICS On
358. t for more information about disk diagnostic tests The problem can be fixed using DSKDOT but the Changed 30 April 1981 DSKCPY Cont d Page 6 data in the btock may be lost for more information on DSKDDT see the DSKDDT reference sheet Sentinel field error during disk copy drive N block X where drive N is a decimal number and block X is an octal or hexadecimal number This can only happen when you are using the fast copy mode of DSKCPY or HASHER on a Hawk hard disk system The contents of a disk block have become unformatted Verify if there is a problem by using REDALL to diagnose the disk and report any read errors See the REDALL reference sheet for more information about disk diagnostic tests Undefined error during disk copy drive N block X where drive N is a decimal number and block X is an octal or hexadecimal number This can only happen when you are using the fast copy mode of DSKCPY or HASHER on a Hawk hard disk system A hard error occurred which was not definable as any of the foregoing AM 500 hard disk controller errors Verify if there is a problem by using REDALL to diagnose the disk and report any read errors See the REDALL reference sheet for more information about disk diagnostic tests See the documentation that accompanies the AM 500 board for more information on these errors and the conditions they report CHARACTERISTICS Makes a literal image of one disk onto another Optiona
359. t result from invalid device specifications For example 3Cannot READ Devn device does not exist You specified a device that REDALL does not recognize Check your spelling Then use the SYSTAT command to see a list of valid mounted devices on the system As 1 October 1979 REDALL Cont d Page 2 Cannot READ Devn disk not mounted The device you specified is a valid device but it is not presently mounted Use the MOUNT command CHARACTERISTICS Performs a disk read diagnostic test that does not harm the data on your disk Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 FUNCTION Renames one or more files that exist within the same account HINTS RESTRICTIONS The new file specification you assign to a file cannot contain a PPN or a device specification You can only rename files within an account RENAME recognizes special devices For example RENAME Newfilespec MEM Oldfilespec e renames memory modules MEM must be defined in your system device table RENAME also recognizes wild card symbols and ersatz devices For example RENAME OLD BAS SBR renames each file in the BASIC Library Account DSKO C7 6 that has a SBR file extension to a OLD extension You may use the standard wildcard Symbols in your file specifications lf you use wildcard symbols in your Newfilespec the wildcard symbols are replaced by the appropriate elements specified by the Oldfilespec s F
360. t the colon after the bank number changed 30 April 1981 SYSMEM Cont d Page 3 Non existent bank number You ve given SYSMEM a bank number Larger than the total number of MEMDEF statements in your SYSTEM INI That is you ve specified a bank that has not been defined Allocation overlaps monitor memory The monitor memory is used by the operating system You must not allocate any of this memory to switchable system memory You must either reduce the size of the monitor or change your user memory allocations Illegal memory range end is below base Ending address must be greater than starting address Allocation is not within requested bank s defined memory You ve specified a valid bank number but it TS not addressed for the memory addresses you ve requested Check the addressing of your memory boards and the MEMDEF statements in your SYSTEM INI ALlocation overlaps memory previously allocated to a job You ve tried to allocate to switchable system memory an area that has already been allocated via the JOBMEM command to a user job Check your bank number and memory addresses If they re OK check the user memory partition allocation CHARACTERISTICS Allows you to reduce the size of the resident monitor by defining an area of switchable memory in which bitmaps can be placed Only for use on systems that bank switch memory Acts both as a user command and as a system initialization command
361. than this number it tells you so and returns you to AMOS command Level b Display current track Y or N i you want CRTZTO to tell you as it certifies each track enter Y otherwise enter an N NOTE Asking CRT410 to display the number of the track that it is verifying greatly increases the time it takes to certify a disk c Enter serial number 10 char max You may optionally give RT410 a ten character alphnumeric 1 D for the logical unit it is certifying CRT410 writes this identifier into the BADBLK SYS file After you answer the questions above CRT410 begins to certify the disk You see this message Begin certification of Devn where Devn is the specification of the device you are certifying If you asked CRT410 to tell you its current track position you see a List of messages that take this form Current track is 12 Changed 1 May 1980 CRT410 Cont d Page 3 ERRORS 7 When CRT410 encounters a track it cannot verify it tells you so For example Track 79 did not verify 8 When it finishes certifying the disk CRT410 tells you how many bad tracks it found For example 22 bad tracks detected 9 CRT410 writes a List of all bad tracks into BADBLK SYSL1 2J and computes and stores in the file a hash total for BADBLK SYS Other programs can check this hash total against the contents of the file to make sure that BADBLK SYS contains undamaged data You can see the following e
362. the system area OPERATION 1 At the AMOS command level to find out what memory is allocated to the system area type SYSMEM followed by a RETURN For example SYSMEM GE Current system memory allocations are The message above tells you that switchable system memory is from address 32370 to address 177376 in Bank One the second bank of the system 2 To allocate memory to the switchable system area from within the system initialization command file use SYSMEM a bank number and starting and ending memory addresses For example SYSMEM 4 100000 160000 SYSMEM expects you to enter the starting and ending memory addresses in the number base the system is currently using for your numeric displays The default number base if you do not use the SET command is octal For information on changing the display base from octal to hexadecimal refer to the SET reference sheet 3 If you want to allocate more than one area to switchable system memory use more than one SYSMEM command When you use the BITMAP command in the SYSTEM INI to allocate bitmaps if you use the S switch the monitor will try to place that bitmap in the switchable area allocated by the first SYSMEM if there is not enough room left in that area the monitor will try the area allocated by the second SYSMEM and so on ERRORS Memory allocation format error SYSMEM doesn t understand the format of your command Line For example did you Leave ou
363. the two to come up with the Listing Line data If these two files get out of sync there is no way that the listing may proceed and you see this error message MACRO then closes out the list file at the point of the sync error but the Line that caused the error will not have been included This message probably means that you are using an object file that was generated by a different version of MACRO than the one you are using now and you have specified the 0 assembly switch Or you may have found an undiagnosed assembler bug If you see no obvious errors in your source file try to re assemble the program again without specifying the 0 switch thus building a new object file Changed 30 April 1981 MACRO Cont d Page 5 ka CHARACTERISTICS A multi pass macro assembler Provides options that allow you to generate an assembly listing and a symbol cross reference MACRO handles nested conditionals and nested macros It also handles Local symbols MACRO is not re entrant and may not be loaded into system memory The default extension is MAC the default device and account are the ones you are logged into Changed 30 April 1981 make V FUNCTION Creates the first record of a sequential file HINTS RESTRICTIONS One of the system text editors EDIT PRG will not allow you to edit a file that does not yet exist The MAKE command starts a sequential file by making an entry for the file in your User File Directory a
364. tion of the BASIC Language processor RUN PRG is reentrant the System Operator may include it in system memory via the SYSTEM command in the system initialization command file If RUN is in system memory each user who wants to use it may then use the copy in system memory instead of having to load it into his own memory partition Use RUN only on programs that you have previously compiled For information on writing BASIC programs using BASIC in interactive mode BASIC PRG and using the compiler portion of the BASIC Language processor COMPIL PRG refer to the AlphaBASIC User s Manual DWM 00100 01 FORMAT RUN Filespec 9 where Filespec specifies the compited BASIC program you want to execute DEFAULTS Assumes a file extension of RUN OPERATION 1 Type RUN followed by the specification of the file that contains the compiled BASIC program you want to execute Then type a RETURN For example RUN INVOIC RUN Y NOTE Compiled programs usually have the RUN extension The BASIC runtime package now executes your program 2 To interrupt program execution type a Control C RUN ACCNT RUN Q Enter new account number You type a Control C herel Operator interrupt in ACCNT RUN 1 October 1979 RUN Cont d Page 2 ERRORS You may see any of the standard BASIC error messages Refer to the back of the ALphaBASIC User s Manual for a list of the BASIC messages CHARACTERISTICS Assumes
365. to DSK2 NEW OLDI10 31 Y MTUO DSK3 B3 MACI 10 4 to DSK2 832 0L0010 41 Y MTUO DSK3 SCRTCH MACL10 61 to DSK2 SCRTCH OLDT10 67 N otal o iles transterre You may enter a Control C at any time to stop the file transfer Remember the placement of the TAPFIL switches modifies their effect 4 As with the COPY command you may not copy files into an account that is outside of the project you are copying from unless you are Logged into 1 21 or are logged into the account you are writing to If you are logged into 1 2 TAPFIL will copy to any account and will create the account you are writing to if it does not already exist When you are loaged into 1 27 the default output account specification is J ERRORS Cannot find DSKO SCNWLD SYSL1 41 or MEM SCNWLO SYS TAPFIL needs this file to be able to process wildcard symbols in your file specifications This message can mean that SCNWLD SYS does not exist or that you do not have enough memory to load the file into your partition Cannot READ Devn device does not exist Cannot READ Devn device is not mounted You tried to copy to or from a device that is not listed in the DEVTBL command in your SYSTEM INI does not have a driver in account 1 61 of the System Disk is not file structured or is not mounted Devn is the device you specified XNo file oriented device corresponding to Devn is mounted You specifie a levice ut eft o the unit number TAP
366. to the device and PPN that you are logged into The name of the new file is the first six characters of the IBM file s name it has the extension IBM 3 Since each logical record in an IBM file is 80 characters long the new AMOS file consists of a series of 80 character lines each Line ends with a carriage return line feed sequence 4 When IBMCPY is finished it displays this message Copy complete 1 October 1979 IBMCPY Cont d Page 2 ERRORS File not found on IBM diskette IBMCPY looked for the file that you wanted to make a copy of but couldn t find it on the IBM diskette Make sure that you ve spelled the name of the file correctly IBMCPY can also display the standard system error messages if you provide an invalid device specification For example Cannot READ IMG1 device does not exist Make sure that IMG is defined in your system device table as a valid device To see a list of system devices type DEVTBL followed by a RETURN Be sure to mount IMG1 before using IBMCPY CHARACTERISTICS Requires that IMG be a valid system device and that IMG DVR 1 6 exists on your System Disk For use on IBM 3740 diskettes that contain 80 byte records Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 iemdir mu FUNCTION Prints directory of a 3740 diskette prepared on an IBM data entry station HINTS RESTRICTIONS IBMDIR uses the image driver IMG DVR to access the data
367. ts DSKN DSK18 You must format each logical unit separately as if it were a separate disk NOTE If you are not using the Trident hard disk as your System Device when you reset or turn on the machine you must run the appropriate initialization program e g T80INI or TRIINI before using the device FORMAT FMT400 Devn GET where Devn specifies the device holding the disk you want to format OPERATION 1 Type FMT400 followed by the specification of the device holding the disk you want to format Then type a RETURN For example FMT400 DSK1 Changed 30 April 1981 FMT400 Cont d Page 2 ERRORS The command above tells FMT4ND to format the disk in Drive One of the System Device 2 Now you see the message BEGIN FORMATTING 3 When FMT400 is finished you see the message EXIT 4 FMT400 now returns you to AMOS command Level You may see the following error messages when using FMTA4DO CHARACTERISTICS DRIVE NOT READY Make sure that the drive has completed its power up cycle CANNOT REZERO DRIVE ERROR AFTER RETRY COMMAND STATUS ERROR FOR COMMAND n DRIVE STATUS ERROR FOR COMMAND n The messages above are an indication of hardware problems specifically drive or interface failure Formats disks used in hard disk devices that run under control of the AM 400 Hard Disk Interface board As it formats writes over any data currently on the disk When you run FMT400 make sure that y
368. tte For information on the error codes refer to the hardware documentation that accompanied your disk device No interrupt received after WRITE TRACK ndicates either a bad drive or a bad controller board CHARACTERISTICS Formats diskettes used in floppy disk devices that run under control of the AM 210 Floppy Disk Controller board When you run FMT210 make sure that your job is the only one running on the system Selects the disk format to use on the basis of the device specification you provide As it formats writes over any data currently on the diskette Changed 30 April 1981 fmt400 No FUNCTION Formats disks used in hard disk devices that run under the control of the AM 400 Hard Disk Interface e g Century Data Trident HINTS RESTRICTIONS Formats the disk into physical records of 512 bytes As it formats the disk FMT400 writes over any data currently on that disk I IMPORTANT NOTE When you run fMT400 your job must be the only job running on the system FMT400 does not require that you mount the disk before formatting it After formatting a disk use the SYSACT command to initialize the disk unless you are going to use DSKCPY to make a Literal image of another disk on the newly formatted disk The AM 400 communicates with the Century Data 1150A formatter Each kuss Century Data Trident contains a number of logical units within one physical device For example the T 300 contains 19 logical uni
369. turned you to AMOS command level and you then invoke another command file that is also interrupted because of a PAUSE command the contents of the second command file are written into CNT CMD replacing the remainder of the first command file This does no harm except that you may not now resume execution of the first command file FORMAT CONT OPERATION 1 To resume execution of a command file that has previously been interrupted via the PAUSE command type CONT at AMOS command Level then type a RETURN CONT After CONT loads CNT CMD into memory and processes it CONT erases the CNT CMD file from the disk 1 May 1980 CONT Cont d Page 2 2 You may also inctude CONT within another command file which then resumes execution of the first command file ERRORS If CNT CMD does not exist in the account you are logged into CONT simply returns you to AMOS command level since it is unable to resume execution of a command file it then displays the message Can t continue Make sure that you are logged into the account where the command file you want to continue was interrupted i e that you are in an account that contains a CNT CMD file CHARACTERISTICS Resumes execution of a command file that has previously been interrupted by the PAUSE command Accepts no arguments or switches 1 May 1980 U copy FUNCTION Copies one or more files within accounts between accounts and between disks HINT
370. turns your terminal to AMOS command level if the system resets successfully 1 October 1979 FUNCTION Allows you to temporarily save AMOS command Lines and to Later invoke them by typing a single character HINTS RESTRICTIONS You can use the U command to temporarily save any AMOS command line To invoke that command Line type a U For example rather than typing the command Line ERASE BAK 0BJ LST every time you want to erase those types of files you can use the U command to save that command Line and later to invoke it U saves the command Line in your memory partition in a memory module named U SCS so when you clear your memory partition or turn off the system the command Line you saved is gone FORMAT U Command Line o where Command tine is the AMOS command Line that you want to save or Ue when you want to invoke the command Line that you previously saved OPERATION 1 To save an AMOS command Line Type U followed by the command Line Then type a RETURN The command Line may be any legal AMOS command Line that is it may contain an AMOS command with file specifications a command file specification etc For example U PRINT COPIES 2 LST RST WAIT NOBANNER 9 U remembers the command Line but does not send it to AMOS To change the saved command Line use U again and enter a new command Line 2 o invoke a command Line that you ve saved Type U followed by a RETURN U sen
371. u have previously saved while using BASIC in interactive mode or is a Program you have created using one of the text editors For information on COMPIL writing BASIC programs using the BASIC runtime package RUN PRG to execute programs or using BASIC in interactive mode BASIC PRG refer to the AlphaBASIC User s Manual DWM 00100 01 COMPIL is re entrant the System Operator may include it in system memory thus saving space in individual users memory partitions via the SYSTEM command in the system initialization command file 1f COMPIL finds errors it does not produce a RUN file NOTE COMPIL does not require that your BASIC program contain Line numbers FORMAT COMPIL FilespecC Switches where Filespec specifies the file that contains the program you want to compile and Switches selects one or both of the COMPIL operation Switches DEFAULTS COMPIL assumes an extension of BAS OPTIONS You may select the following options by including them at the end of the COMPIL command Line after a slash Y This switch is designed primarily as a debugging tool It tells COMPIL to display each Line of your source program as COMPIL scans the Line If an error occurs during compilation the use of this switch helps you to pinpoint the program tine where the error occurred Changed 30 April 1987 COMPIL Cont d Page 2 OPERATION ERRORS 70 1M js The 0 switch telis COMPIL to omit Line number references
372. u tried to modify an existing Library fite but the object files you specified were not present in the Library file Make sure that you did not accidentally use the restrictor symbol 30 Aprit 1981 LIB Cont d Page 5 Fatal error xxx is an overlay You may not specify an overlay as an element of an object file Library CHARACTERISTICS LIB creates and modifies an object file library SYMBOL and LINK both support the use of library files LIB is re entrant and so may be loaded into system memory It is also serially re usable LIB assumes an input file extension of 0BJ an output file extension of LIB and a listing file extension of LST If you omit account and device specifications LIB looks for the specified file in the account and device you are logged into your project library account and the System MACRO account DSKO0 7 71 30 April 1981 u link FUNCTION Creates executable machine language programs by Linking and resolving one or more assembled object files HINTS RESTRICTIONS When you use MACRO to assemble an assembly Language program the 0BJ file that results is in an intermediate form that is not ready for execution Separate 08J files may contain symbol references to each other that cannot be fully resolved because these files cannot be assembled together LINK is a Linkage editor That is it links together and resolves several 08J files to produce a OVR or PRG progr
373. unt the logical unit and try using BADBLK again CHARACTERISTICS For use on disks that have been processed by a disk certification program that creates a BADBLK SYS 1 2 file Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level Changed 1 May 1980 basic FUNCTION Allows you to use the BASIC language processor in interactive mode HINTS RESTRICTIONS BASIC is an easy to learn programming language This command invokes both the compiler and runtime package portions of the BASIC Language Processor Use this command when you want to use BASIC in interactive mode Once in BASIC you may use the BASIC LOAD and SAVE commands to load and save BASIC programs For information on writing BASIC programs or on using either the compiler COMPIL PRG or the runtime package RUN PRG portions of BASIC separately refer to the AlphaBASIC User s Manual CowM 00100 01 BASIC PRG is reentrant the System Operator may include it in system memory via the SYSTEM command in the system initialization command file However because of the size of BASIC PRG this is not usually done unless most users on the system will be doing extensive BASIC Program development NOTE To exit from BASIC enter BYE followed by a RETURN To interrupt the execution of a program type a Control C FORMAT BASIC OPERATION 1 Type BASIC followed by a RETURN BASIC D You now see the BASIC prompt READY You can either load in a BASIC program
374. unte You tried to erase from a device that is not listed in the DEVTBL command in your SYSTEM INI does not have a driver in the area 1 6 of the System Disk is not file structured or is not mounted Devn is the device you tried to erase from XAccount does not exist p pn The indicated PPN does not exist to create it you must be logged under 1 2 See the SYSACT reference sheet More than one output specification You cannot specify more than one output specification for example ERASE BAK TXT MAC is an illegal command XNo files deleted ERASE could find no files that had the names and extensions you specified CHARACTERISTICS A wildcard file command Understands ersatz and special devices Default switch is NOQUERY Default file specification is null extension and account and device you are logged into changed 30 April 1981 exit FUNCTION Terminates a command file and optionally displays a message to the user of the command file HINTS RESTRICTIONS May appear only in a command or DO file You will find EXIT most useful in the case of conditional transfers within a command file where EXIT can be used to prevent user from falling into a segment of the command file branched to by a GOTO statement See GOTO reference sheet For more information on EXIT see New Features in Command Files and DO Files DWM 00100 63 in the User s Information Section of the AN TOO d
375. up on the disk CHARACTERISTICS Creates random files of specified size If you omit portions of a file specification CREATE assumes the device j and account you are logged into and a DAT extension Changed 30 April 1981 ertd10 FUNCTION Certifies the disk media of a device that runs under control of the AM 410 Hard Disk Controller Also takes the place of the FMT410 command HINTS RESTRICTIONS Because of the high data density of the disks that run with the AM 410 e g the CDC Phoenix media flaws are a more likely possibility than on more conventional drives e g the CDC Hawk Therefore you must run CRT410 on each Logical unit of every device that runs under control of the AM 410 CRT410 certifies a Logical unit by writing and verifying data in every block of the device so make sure that you back up any data you need on that device before you certify it Because CRT410 destroys any data on the disk it is certifying CRT410 requires that you be logged into the System Operator s account 1 21 before certifying a disk NOTE CRT410 takes the place of the disk formatting program FMT410 because it formats the disk as well as certifying it CRT410 creates account 1 21 on the disk you are certifying Then it creates a file BADBLK SYSL1 2 that contains a list of all bad disk tracks on the certified device CRT410 assigns alternate tracks for these bad tracks thereby making the fact that some tracks are bad c
376. ur MAC programs to make sure that your overlay references are correct xxxx undefined An external symbol is undefined This is a very common error You have referenced a symbol which has not previously been defined Changed 30 April 1981 SYMBOL Cont d Page 4 e g you have made a reference to a label that does not exist Make sure that an EXTERNed symbol in one segment is defined by an INTERN statement in another seqment Fatal error First file must not be a library To enable SYMBOL to correctly resolve external references to a Library you must specify the proaram that references that Library before you specify the Library file itself Fatal error Attempt to specify overlay xxx as optional You may not use the 0 switch to designate a file as optional if that object file is an overlay Fatal error Overlay symbol xxxx in segment yyyy was not defined in a previous Input segment You may not reference an undefined overlay In other words SYMBOL is trying to process a supposed overlay file but has seen no references to the overlay in a previous file Without such a reference SYMBOL cannot construct the overlay so it aborts and returns you to AMOS command Level Fatal error First fite must not be an overlay To enable SYMBOL to correctly resolve external references to an overlay you must specify the program that references that overlay before you specify the overlay file itself Fata
377. ure design R REFERENCE TREE Specifies the start of a List of procedure names on successive lines Each procedure name is a root of a reference tree listing The R command is optional but if it appears in your file it must be the Last command in the design ERRORS X IS AN ILLEGAL COMMAND BYPASSING LINE PDLFMT found a command X in the design that it does not recognize The only legal commands are IT IS IP or R REPEATED DEFINITION Xxxxxx REFERENCES WILL BE TO LAST OCCURRENCE xxxxxx is a section or procedure name that occurred in a section or procedure command more than once 1 October 1979 PDLFMT Cont d CHARACTERISTICS Assumes a file extension of PDL LI Transforms a file that you have previously created text editors Produces a LST file Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 using one Page 3 of the perlod FUNCTION Bootstrap toader program for a system that uses the Persci floppy disk as the System Device HINTS RESTRICTIONS The PERLOD program when contained on a 2716 PROM allows the system to boot off a System Disk on a Persci floppy disk when a hardware reset occurs that s when you hit the RESET button The program it also in account DSK0 1 4J of the System Disk You may use PERLOD at AMOS command Level to reset the system if your System Device is a Persci floppy disk drive The memory partition of the job that uses the PERLOD comma
378. urns All numeric input is in decimal eparate n meric answers on the same Line with spaces AUT NUMERIC answers default to 0 If you have any problems refer to the NEWTRM documentation 4 NEWTRM now begins to ask you a lona series of questions These questions are structured into four groups 30 April 1981 NEWTRM first asks questions generally applicable to all terminals First is the unique name you want to give to the driver NEWTRM is about to build Enter just the name in six characters or less Do not supply a file name extension What is the name of the driver SOROC RET where SOROC is the name you have selected The name Should readily identify the terminal which the drive will support You must include this name in the system initialization command file TRMDEF statement that defines your terminal For further information on modifying the system initialization command file to add a new terminal to your system see The System Initialization Command File in the System Operator s Information section of the AMOS Software Update documentation packet NEWTRM asks some more questions of a general nature dealing with time delays following Linefeed and formfeed commands from the driver to the terminal NEWTRM then moves to the second group of questions and accepts information which identifies the terminal type and capabilities to the driver The driver must know if the terminal has a keyboar
379. used by the AlphaMAIL Operator to manage and maintain the AlphaMAIL system see the OPR reference sheet FORMAT EMAIL RET OPERATION 1 Log into the account you have set aside for using AlphaMAIL Next type EMAIL followed by a RETURN EMAIL GD 2 Now the screen clears and EMAIL asks you for your password EMAIL Version 1 0 ENTER YOUR PASSWORD Enter your password exactly five characters You must enter it exactly as it was given to you by the AlphaMAIL Operator 3 When you have correctly entered your password the screen clears and you see the EMAIL main menu 30 April 1981 EMAIL Cont d Page 2 EMAIL Version 1 0 new messages received COMMAND CODES E Display command menu M Send mail and receive mail x Return to AMOS Incoming Mai List all messages Read message n Print message n Forward message n to another user Delete message fn from incoming mail List Ar oja 3 5 5 3 Outgoing Mail B List all messages Rn Read message n Wn Print message n Cn Delete message n from outgoing mail list S Create new message I Create Software Performance Report En Edit message fn EML gt Choose one of the EMAIL commands by entering the appropriate command code after the EMAIL prompt symbol EML gt For example to create a message EML gt S GET If you forget what commands are available enter a question mark followed by a R
380. utt specification for the system initialization command file is OSKO SYSTEM INIF1 67 the default file extension is null that is SYSTEM The default monitor file extension is MON Changad 30 April 1981 MONTST Cont d Page 2 OPERATION 1 Type MONTST followed by the specifications of the system monitor and the system initialization command file under whose control you want to bring up the system separated by a comma Then type a RETURN For example MONTST SYSTEM MON NEWSYS INI ERRORS You may see any of the standard system error messages when using MONTST For example filespec NOT FOUND MONTST couldn t find the monitor or the system initialization command file that you want to test File specification error MONTST did not understand your command Line For example MoNTST ED File specification error CHARACTERISTICS MONTST brings the system up under control of the specified system monitor and system initialization command file Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level Changed 30 April 1981 A mount FUNCTION You can use MOUNT to mount a disk unmount a disk or display a list of all mounted disks on the system HINTS RESTRICTIONS The system has no way of knowing when you change disks in your disk drives When you change disk cartridges in your hard disk system or change floppy disks in your flopppy disk drives you must tell the system that you have done
381. ve XY CHARACTERISTICS Requires that the driver program for your terminal be able to use TCRT screen calls Returns your terminal to the AMOS command level 1 October 1979 APPENDIX A THE ASCII CHARACTER SET APPENDIX A THE ASCII CHARACTER SET Many of the commands in this manual display data in numeric form In the case of text files that contain data encoded in ASCII these commands display the ASCII values of the data ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange provides a standard set of values for representing text characters in numeric form The next few pages contain charts that List the complete ASCII character set We provide both the octal and hexadecimal representations of the ASCII values The number base in which you see data displayed is usually octal but you can tell the system to use hexadecimal as your display base See the SET reference sheet Note that the first 32 characters are non printing Control characters THE ASCII CHARACTER SET CHARACTER THE CONTROL CHARACTERS OCTAL HEX MEANING Null fill character Start of Heading Start of Text End of Text End of Transmission Enquiry Acknowledge Bell code Back Space Horizontal Tab Line Feed Vertical Tab Form Feed Carriage Return Shift Out Shift In Data Link Escape Device Control 1 Device Control 2 Device Control 3 Device Control 4 Negative Acknowledge Synchronous Idle End of Transmiss
382. ve entered a bad PPN as an Add Change or Delete parameter Check the number and enter it again Account has files on it ou tried to delete an account that still had files in it Exit SYSACT log into the account you tried to delete and erase all files ERASE Now you can invoke SYSACT again and delete that account SYSACT is a privileged program may only be run from PPN 1 2 You must Tog into account T1 2 to run Invalid command type H for help SYSACT did not understand the command you entered To see a summary of all SYSACT commands type H followed by a RETURN 2MFD is full no new accounts may be added The Master File Directory for each disk can contain no more than 63 entries You tried to allocate the 64th account on the disk Account does not exist ou tr ed to change the password of an account or tried to delete an account but that account does not exist Use the L command to see a List of all PPNs on the disk CHARACTERISTICS If a disk has never been used before and it does not run under control of the AM 410 after you format the disk you must use SYSACT to initialize the disk Then use SYSACT to add accounts to the disk s MFD Returns your terminal to AMOS command level if you use the Exit command E or a Control C Changed 1 May 1980 syscpy u FUNCTION Copies all files from DSKO to DSK1 HINTS RESTRICTIONS SYSCPY is a command file that uses the DSKCPY command to
383. vice You should run DSKANA regularly to reclaim lost blocks and to check the bitmap DO NOT run while other users are accessing the specified disk You must be logged into 1 2 to run DSKANA Changed 30 April 1981 dskcpy FUNCTION Creates a backup disk by making a Literal image of one disk onto another Optionally generates a hash total for the backup disk HINTS RESTRICTIONS You may use DSKCPY on any kind of disk device However the three character device specification must be the same for both devices you are copying between For example if you want to make a copy of the disk in device HWK1 you may copy it to HWK2 or HWK0 but you may not copy it to AMSO or STD3 Remember that DSKCPY makes a literal image of one disk onto another This means that any data on the disk you are copying to will be irretrievably lost after a disk copy is done As of AMOS Version 4 4 you may use DSKCPY on devices that run under the control of the AM 410 hard disk controller e g the Phoenix drive NOTE TO HAWK HARD DISK USERS DSKCPY uses a special fast copy mode for Hawk hard disk devices If you do not inhibit the Hawk fast copy mode no one else may run on the system while you perform the Hawk disk backup This Ts because this mode causes DSKCPY to communicate directly with the AM 500 controller instead of going through AMOS See OPTIONS below for information on the 0 switch which tells DSKCPY to use the old disk copy met
384. vice you are logged into then it Looks in your project library account P 0 Finally LIB looks in the System MACRO Library account DSKO 7 7 If you do not include an output specification LIB creates an output file with the same name as the first input specification If you use the L switch to create a Library Listing LIB uses the default extension LST for that Listing output file If you use the L switch and omit an output file specification LIB uses the default output specification TRM that is it sends the listing to your terminal display OPTIONS You may include the L switch on the LIB command line to tell LIB to create a library Listing file This listing looks similar to a load map file and Lists all object files in the Library and all INTERNed symbols OPERATION To create a library file 1 Type LIB followed by the specification of the library file you want to create type an equal sign and then enter the specifications of the object files you want to combine into a library file separating the filespecs with commas Then type a RETURN For example 30 April 1981 LIB Cont d Page 3 LIB MYLIB ADNUM RDBIN WRTBIN ASCCHK SRCHS RET The command Line above causes LIB to create an output file named MYLIB LIB that contains the specified object files If you want to enter more file specifications than will fit on one command line just end the first command line with a comma and LIB wilt display an
385. want to abort the backup type a Control C ERRORS Cannot find DSKO SCNWLD SYSC1 4 or MEM SCNWLD SYS FILTAP needs this file to be able to process wildcard symbols in your file specifications This message can mean that SCNWLD SYS does not exist or that you do not have enough memory to load the file into your partition 2 Cannot READ Devn device does not exist Cannot READ Devn device is not mounte ou tried to copy to or from a device that is not listed in the DEVTBL command in your SYSTEM INI does not have a driver in account 01 6 of the System Disk is not file structured or is not mounted Devn is the device you specified XNo file oriented device corresponding to Devn is mounted You specified a device but Left off the unit number FILTAP tried to find a logical unit that matched the device code you specified but failed to do so Try mounting the device 30 April 1981 FILTAP Cont d Page 4 Tape is full please mount another tape then type RETURN to continue or type Control C to abort copy There is no more room on the current reel of tape Mount another reel and type RETURN to continue the backup process or type a Control C to abort the backup procedure CHARACTERISTICS A file oriented disk backup Program that allows you to copy disk files to magnetic tape See reference sheets on TAPFIL and DIRTAP to see how to transfer files from tape to disk and to display a directory of a magneti
386. when allocating blocks to the files Block marked as bad A block marked as bad in the BADBLK SYS 1 21 file has somehow been allocated to a file Device error on Devn This block contains a hard error that the system could not recover from funabte to Locate BITMAP for rewrite DSKANA couldn t find the bitmap area in memory for the device This means that the bitmap in memory may be invalid BITMAP rewrite error code XXXXX For some reason the bitmap could not be written back out to the disk The number you see is the error code that indicates what the problem was for a list of these error codes see Chapter 6 The File Service System in the AMOS Monitor Calis Manual DWM 00100 42 This file has a bum block count The actual block count for the file where this message appears does not match the block count assumed by the file itself Once again an error has been made in allocating blocks to this file Changed 30 April 1981 OSKANA Cont d Page 6 Illegal block Link A link in the file where this message appears points to an invalid block address e g to a block that does not exist Block reserved for system use only A Tink in the file where this message appears points to a block that cannot be allocated to a file Once again an error has been made in allocating blocks to this file Block creates endless loop in file The Linking structure of this file is such that eventually the blocks point b
387. which is the indication that you are at AMOS command level The symbols indicate that the xd REFERENCE SHEET FORMAT Page 5 3 enclosed command Line elements are optional These optional elements may be nested several deep as in the case of the Switches above A curly arrow indicates the place in the command Line where you must type a RETURN The brief narrative following the sample command line identifies the elements of the command Line and gives you information on using the command or the options and switches OPERATION This section details the step by step function of the command It discusses all action that occurs between you and AMOS while you use the command including what happens when you use the available options COMMAND SUMMARY as needed A few reference sheets contain summaries of the special symbols you can enter to the program invoked by the command ERRORS This section contains a List of all important error messages you can See while using the command The error messages are produced either by the operating system or by the command itself Most operating System messages usually begin with a question mark and the word Cannot For example Cannot OPEN Devn disk is not mounted The second word in this type of message is capitalized because it designates the particular monitor call that failed For a List of all operating system error messages refer to Appendix A AMOS System Error Messag
388. y a RETURN Changed 1 May 1980 VUE Cont d Page 3 COMMAND SUMMARY Ns Below is a partial list of the VUE commands refer to the VUE manual for a full list of commands Some terminals allow you to use the cursor control keys marked with arrows to move the cursor others require that you use Control J Control K Control H and Control L to move the cursor You may also use the RUBOUT key to delete characters Control A Move cursor to front of last word Control W Move cursor to front of next word Control U Move cursor to beginning of Line Control N Move cursor to end of line Control R Move cursor to Last page Control T Move cursor to next page Control E Move cursor to end of file HOME Move cursor to beginning of file Control B Insert blank line Control F Insert space Control 0 Append lines Control D Delete character and space Control Y Delete text on Line to end of Line Control Z Delete line including RETURN at end of Line Control RUBOUT Same as Control U followed by a Control Y Escape Enter Command or Screen mode toggle mode C In Command mode F Finish and update text Search for string Q Finish without updating R text Search and Replace COPY Copy block of text DELETE Delete block of text ERRORS If you specify an invalid command you can see the usual system messages e g file not found VUE itself can generate several error messages Insufficient space to complete transfer our file cannot fit int
389. y an optional Listfilespec and equal sign Then type any input specifications Type a RETURN The Listfilespec specifies a disk file that will contain the directory display If you omit the Listfilespec and the equal sign TAPDIR sends the display to your terminal If you omit the Listfilespec and include the equal sign TAPDIR uses the default Listfilesoec DIRECT LST and the account and device you are logged into For example to send a directory display of all the fites on a tape to your terminal enter TAPDIR ALL J GD Now TAPDIR asks you for the specification of the magnetic tape drive that contains the tape you want to access Enter tape unit number The default device code is MTU so to access a tape in drive MTU3 you can either enter 3 or MTU3 The display you see iooks something like this TAPDIR ALL DJ DAT MAC RET Enter tape unit number 0 EEN DSK0 SYS MAC 140 1 16 L 14 May 80 14 52 23 2 DSK0 NBSORT MAC 140 1 4 L 14 May 80 14 52 25 OSKO FILTAP MA 25 L May EA 7 DSKO JANE DAT 140 1 99 C 14 May 80 14 52 27 Total of 4 files in 142 blocks The first number on the Line tells you the file s relative position on the tape Next you see the device specification the filename and extension and the account specification of the file as it appeared on the disk it was being backed up from The next number tells you the number of disk blocks the file takes up TAPDIR now tells you whether the file is a s
390. y boards you may not include an argument on the MEMERR command Line See 1 above If your system also contains other types of memory boards you must include the proper 1 0 error address for those boards For example MEMERR 250 PARITY 101 102 103 See the Alpha Micro Integrated Systems User s Guide for information on the 1 0 error port address for Piiceon 32K word memory boards ERRORS Your system can respond to a parity error in a number of Ways depending on your system s hardware configuration See the document Software Installation Instructions for the AM 710 Memory Board in the System Operator s Information section of the AMOS Software Update documentation packet for complete information on what happens when parity error occurs and how to handle such an error The PARITY command can itself generate several error messages if you use the command improperly 2There is no AM 710 at port address xxx Where xxx is an 1 0 port address you specified on your PARITY command Line This address did not match the jumpered 1 0 port address of any of the AM 710 boards in your system Check the PARITY command Line to make sure that you entered the port address correctly then check the memory boards to make sure that their port addresses are jumpered correctly Command format error You did not supply any I 0 port addresses or in some other used an improper format 30 Aprit 1981 way PARITY Cont d Page 3
391. y the message above again You may type a Control C to interrupt the TAPE command and return to AMOS command level 3 Now you see Tape can do character code conversion What type of conversion do you want to do None 2 Convert the ASCII file to an EBCDIC file 3 Convert the EBCDIC file to an ASCII file Type the number of the option you wish Answer Enter 1 2 or 3 followed by a RETURN Remember that the conversion if any will be done on the data going to the 1 October 1979 TAPE Cont d Page 3 output device Whether this device is the disk or tape unit depends on your answer to question 1 above 4 If you asked to copy a disk file to tape TAPE begins to ask a new series of questions d 1 October 1979 TAPE requests a file specification give the AMOS specification of the file you want to copy and a device specification give the specification of the tape drive to which you want to copy Now TAPE asks if you want to do reblocking Reblocking consists of specifying the number of file data records to place in each tape block If you say no to this question TAPE assumes that each data record is 512 bytes long and that the blocking factor is 1 that is that you want to write one disk block of 512 bytes into one tape block If you tell TAPE that you want to do reblocking it asks you the size of the data records in the file in bytes including record delimiters and the bl
392. you are logged out you are off the system The only AMOS commands you may use when logged off are ATTACH SYSTEM HELP LOG SYSTAT MEMORY and SET NOTE LOGOFF deletes any memory modules in your memory partition as it logs you off the system FORMAT LOGOFF D OPERATION 1 Type LOGOFF followed by a RETURN LOGOFF 2 LOGOFF logs you off the system and Lets you know which account you are Leaving The number it displays is the PPN of that account LOGOFF y User 110 3 logged off ERRORS Not Logged in If you try to use LOGOFF when you are not logged into the system LOGOFF cannot Log you out since it has nothing to log you out of CHARACTERISTICS Resets your default device to DSK0 Therefore if you don t include a device specification the next time you use LOG the system begins looking for your account on the System Disk DSK0 1 October 1979 LOGOFF Cont d Page 2 Resets the flags in your job table to ECH and NOGUARD flags O OCTAL NODSKERR NOVERIFY See the SET reference sheet for an explanation of these Returns your terminal to AMOS command level 1 October 1979 lookup FUNCTION Allows you to check for the existence of a file from within a command file and then choose whether to continue or abort execution of the command file depending on whether or not the searched for file exists HINTS RESTRICTIONS May be used only in a command file or DO file Used in combinati
393. your Spelling To see a list of valid system devices type DEVTBL followed by a RETURN CHARACTERISTICS Returns your terminal to AMOS command Level 1 October 1979 FUNETION Skips to the next file mark on a tape mounted on a magnetic tape unit HINTS RESTRICTIONS Use SKIP to skip over files or a header block on a magnetic tape IMPORTANT NOTE DO NOT use SKIP while another job is accessing the specified tape drive Such an action causes unpredictable results You may specify Q to 7 tape drives e g MTUO MTU7 The magnetic tape drive you specify must be defined in the system device table as an unsharable device See the DEVTBL reference sheet The program MTSTAT SYS must be in system memory See the SYSTEM reference sheet for information on modifying the system initialization command file to include a program in system memory FORMAT SKIP Devn where Devn specifies a magnetic tape drive OPERATION 1 Make sure that the tape you want to access is mounted 2 Type SKIP followed by the specification of the tape you want to access Then type RETURN For example SKIP MTUS Y 3 SKIP issues a command to the magnetic tape driver to read forward on the currently mounted tape until it detects a file mark If the drive is positioned at the front of a file this command causes the tape driver to skip to the next file 4 When SKIP finishes it returns you to AMOS command level ERRORS File
394. your file If that is not the form defined as mounted on the printer then PRINT asks you to mount the proper form x may be any one to six character name you choose You can define the type of form to be mounted on a specific orinter by using the SET command The System Operator sets the initial form type for each printer during system initiatization A file switch KILL or K Delete the specified file from the printer OPERATION 1 queue K is an operation switch it affects all filespecs on the command line You may not wildcard the specifications of files to be deleted from the queue When you use K PRINT tells you which files were deleted from the queue To find out if any print requests are waiting in the printer queues type PRINT and a RETURN PRINT Tris command Lists the contents of the queues for all of the printers defined on the system If you wish to see the contents of the queue for a single printer type PRINT followed by the name of the printer whose queue you want to see an equal sign and a RETURN For example PRINT MULTI GED The display you see tells you what files are waiting to be printed what form type they are to be printed on how many b ocks total are in the queue how many blocks remain for each file how many copies of each file are to be printed and which file is currently being printed Changed 30 Aprit 1981 PRINT Cont d Page 4 ERRORS If there are no pri
395. ys an asterisk and you may continue your List of file specifications Changed 30 April 1981 SYMBOL Cont d Page 3 4 ERRORS You may enter as many Lines of file specifications as you wish as long as you end the preceding command line with a comma Now SYMBOL displays several messages as it processes the files The exact messages you see depend on the options you have requested and the files you have specified For example Linkage Editor Version 2 0 Processing VISFIL OBJ Processing VIS1 0BJ Optional and Library Request Processing UTILIT LIB GETADR Symbol and Map files finished If any errors occur during Linking SYMBOL tells you so For example Symbol file finished 4 errors exist You can see the following error messages while using SYMBOL Command error There is something wrong with your command Line For example you tried to use SYMBOL without specifying a file on which to work Fatal error Insufficient memory You must increase the size of your memory partition there was not enough room to perform the procedure you specified Undefined switch x ignored SYMBOL didn t recognize the switch x you specified Refer to the section OPTIONS above for information on the valid SYMBOL switches Fatal error Overlays of code are not permitted Next expected address is xxxx Overlay code address 1S xxxx Your program is trying to overlay previous code Check yo

AMOS 4.5 Sys Cmd Ref Man

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents